Home
LinSig Version 3 user Guide
Contents
1. Two Separate LinSig Models before Importing Importing refers to the process of adding a LinSig network to another Network It does not refer to the process of loading and converting LinSig files from earlier versions 4 27 1 Points to Consider before Merging Networks Whilst planning whether and how to merge Networks the following Sometimes contradictory points need to be considered e With LinSig 3 1 and above different Junctions within the model can now operate at different cycle times e Merging two Networks into a larger Network will increase the run time of optimisation and assignment Merging two Matrix Based Networks will generally increase run times by a larger factor than merging two Lane Based Networks as the number of routing options increases disproportionately e Merging Matrix Based Networks may be desirable as it allows rerouting due to signal timing or Network changes to be modelled Remember LinSig isn t intended to be a large area model though like SATURN or VISUM e Merging Networks reduces the number of model files and assists with version control e For complex models which take some time to run it is often possible to structure the model into separate semi independent Network regions which will provide large improvements in run time without a great loss of accuracy This is particularly beneficial for Matrix Based Networks as routing is then only modelled within each region as opposed to between
2. e The Rotate and Scale is particularly useful to align several separately imported Junctions prior to merging connecting Zones e lf the Apply Rotation to Signal Groups option is ticked LinSig will also rotate and scale any Signal Groups associated with the selected Items Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 144 View Reference 4 4 Traffic Flows View The Traffic Flows View is used to carry out the following tasks e Create and manage Traffic Flow Groups e Specify traffic flows by entering origin destination matrices for each Flow Group e Specify pedestrian flows by entering an OD matrix for each Junction for each Flow Group The View can be opened by choosing Show Traffic Flows View on the Traffic Flows menu afa Traffic Flows View 4 ee eis Traffic Mode Pedestrian Mode v Edit Lane Based Layers Delete all unused Flow Groups Clear Lane based Flows Flow Groups Traffic Origin Destination Matrix Description Type Start End Duration u i Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Copy Paste AM Peak Current Scenario Standard 08 00 __09 00 01 00 OD matrix flows PM Peak Standard 16 30 17 30 01 00 OD matrix flows AM Peak Lane Based Flows Standard 08 00 09 00 01 00 Lane based flows lfAuto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Flow Matrix will automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flo
3. Arm 1 London Road Arm 4 High StLondon Rd Park St PRC 68 7 Total Traffic Delay 138 9 pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped TT 2 s Ped Level Of Service F SCATS Site Num 1032 A aS wed E WY Clearance Timing Dial Interval Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Lane All Co 4 3 15 1 Adding a Timing Dial to the Network Layout View To add a Timing Dial to the Network Layout View e Choose Add Timing Dial from the Timing Dials pop out on the LinSig Network Menu e Position the Timing Dial on the Network Layout View and click to drop the Dial The Create Timing Dial dialog box opens allowing options to be set e Set the options for the new Timing Dial Available options include o Controller The Controller for which the Timing Dial displays timing information o Show Title Select whether to display the Controller name next to the Timing Dial o Show Timings in Grab Handles If the Timing Dial is large enough this option can be used to display the phase change point values in each of the phase change point handles o Set Timing Dial Size Sets the size of the Timing Dial Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 140 View Reference e Click OK to close the Create Timing Dial dialog box and display the new Timing Dial e The Timing Dial will always show the Phase lengths for the current Scenario If the current Scenario is chan
4. O i Mean Cruise as C Speed km Hr 129 Use custom lane length for cruise timespeed Custom Lane Lengthim 20 E calculations on this Connector Delay based assignment cruise time weighting 5 o When modelling buses Mean Bus Stopped Time s o Bus Speed km hr Platoon Dispersion lw Use Platoon Dispersion Platoon Dispersion Coefficient 35 The General tab allows the following settings to be changed e From Lane The Lane the Lane Connector starts from e To Lane The Lane the Lane Connector ends at e Allow Routes to use this Connector This setting governs whether LinSig will use this Lane Connector when building Routes through the Network The setting can be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 96 View Reference used to avoid LinSig building unnecessary or undesired Routes in part of the Network e Default Mean Cruise Time Speed sec or km hr Either the mean cruise time or speed between the downstream ends of two Lanes Whichever setting is provided LinSig will calculate the other using the Lane Connector Length as defined below Where Junction Exit Arms are used the Lane Connector within the Junction should be used to specify the cruise time speed from the stop line of the Lane entering the Junction to a notional point at the exit from the Junction where the Junction Exit Arm is located The Lane Connector between a Junction Exit Arm and the next Junction should specify the Cruise Speed Time from a notional exit point at
5. Route or How Layer amet FTTH Edit Overnide Delete Overnide E pe Mean Cruise time 10 3 A5 Uses default lane length for TREE cruise time speed calculations na When modelling buses ata Mean Bus Stopped Time s 15 Bus Speed km hr 125 This is a list of all the override rules in this model Override rules will be applied in order beginning with the rule at the top of the list and proceeding dovmwards Only the first rule that matches will apply If no rules match then the default rule highlighted in italics will apply The Overrides tab allows different cruise speed time and bus stop times to be specified on the Connector for different Routes Lane Based Flow Layers and or Flow Groups By default the same cruise speed time and bus stop times will apply to all Routes Flow Layers and Flow Groups on the Connector unless otherwise overridden The Overrides tab allows the following settings to be changed e Overrides This lists all Overrides that apply to this Connector Each entry in the list corresponds to a selection of Routes Flow Layers and or Flow Groups to which the Override will apply The final entry in the list is always for the Default settings that will apply to all Routes Lane Based Flow Layers and Flow Groups unless otherwise overridden e Override Data For the Override that is selected in the Overrides list the cruise speed time and bus stop time are displayed These can be edited for the
6. lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel The expected usage is the average number of PCU in the additional short lane at the start of green rather than the physical length of the short lane The expected usage will always be shorter than the physical usage due to effects such as traffic in an adjacent lane preventing traffic from reaching the short lane The free utility LINSAT can be used to predict the expected usage from the physical lane length LINSAT is currently available for free download from JCT Consultancy s web site Remember that the new LinSig 3 short lane model automatically allows for a number of issues such as short lane blocking which are not explicitly modelled in the MultiLane additional short lane model Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 83 Advanced Settings iSq Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Effective Green Displacements Random Delay Start Disp 5 2 End Disp 5 3 Ignore Random Delay Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow da HB Flows G Movmt to 5 1 Ahead The Ad ta Optimiser Queue Constraints Queue de sliver Excess Queue Limit pou De sliver threshold pcu eneral Traffic Threshold at which LinSig considers the uniform queue to be a Sliver Queue Refer to User Guide before using Optimiser Weightings Entry Profiles Apply Optimiser Stops Weighting 100 00 Inherit cydic flow profile from upstream exit Lane Apply Optimiser Dela
7. Flow Consistency Mode can be switched on in the Network Layout View by choosing Flow Consistency Mode from the main View menu When Flow Consistency Mode is switched on the Network Layout View changes to show Lane arrows instead of normal Lanes Lane Based Flows are also shown for the currently selected Flow Group fe S 24 alealea 15 ALLA ARRI SAR elele Aeka alsa SE mer EFIS mucio fw Farm f aE onr fo Fon Group AMPeakLane BasedFows J1 Ped Crossing PRC 101 7 Total Trafic Delay 2 0 sabe pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 39 8 sP ed Controller 1 A Display Lane Based Flow inconsistencies based on Significance Colour Oo Route Filter Reset Origin Zone an v arm ally Lane all Contains unc An v arm all Lane AI x Destination Zone All Arm Al Lane all Flow Consistency errors are highlighted at the upstream and downstream end of each Lane Where a consistency error occurs LinSig displays a coloured circle the size of which depends on the size of the consistency error The size of the circle can be changed using the Display Lane Based Flow Inconsistencies based on option on the Network Layout View s bottom toolbar The options available are e Absolute Difference The circles are scaled by the absolute level of flow inconsistency e Percentage Difference The circles are scaled by the percentage difference of flow inconsistency e Significance A combined meas
8. cccceecceseeeecseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeessseeesenees 196 4 13 2 Golden Rules of Matrix Estimation ccccccccescccseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesseeesaeeeesseees 197 4 13 3 Working with the Matrix Estimation VieW ccccccccseceseeeseeeseeeseeeneeeseeeneenes 198 4 13 4 Working with Traffic COUNTS cccccccccceececeeeeceeceseeeeeseeetaeeeeseueeseeeeseeeeneaees 199 4 13 5 Estimating an Origin Destination Matrix cccccccseccseeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeens 202 4 13 6 Validating an Estimated Matrix or Assignment ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeees 204 A 14 PUMA COMS VIEW wie sad cscins ti nman a a EAE 206 AAs OlOMaly TINMNGS VENerea cee teehee lee eal eh aale das 209 4 15 1 Selecting which Controller to View ccccceececeeeeseeeeeceeceseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeseaees 209 4 15 2 The Signal TIMINGS SettinGS cccccccceeccceeeseecesseeeeceeeessaeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeensaees 210 4 15 3 The Signal Timings Panel cccccccsececeeeceeeceececeeecceeeceuseceeeeeeeessueeseeeseeeens 211 AAG eane MIMI SAV NSW nsss sie ieee vic a kasicacitiekanarn E 213 ATAPA Overlap VICW cis tociecuitar tessa a a aie lle ho aie ets od 215 4 17 1 Selecting which Controller to View cccccccccceececeeeeeseeceseeeeeseeeesesesseeeesaaees 215 4 17 2 Working with the Phase Overlap ViICW cccsscccssececeseeteeeeceeeetseetaeeeeneness 215 A216 S GKOUD Data VIC W sucunstictaistneteucis Golausieicbi
9. e Enter the two Merge Zones Each Zone must be from a separate unconnected part Network e Enter a default cruise time for the new Lane Connectors which will replace the existing pair of Zones This can be adjusted later if required e Click Finish to complete the Zone Merge e LinSig will carry out the merge generating new Routes based on combining Routes in each of the existing part Networks at the merge point This can lead to large numbers of new Routes in some cases If feasible the Routes in the new merged Network should be examined using the Route List View and any unlikely or undesirable Routes marked non permitted After the Zone Merge Wizard is complete further Networks can be imported and merged into the new Network if desired lt Network Layout View eae fe Sie xalx Be 2 21 ell sle ALE SIO SIS elel aaa eea BIOS Find sanction Te ind arms Fe Ma S fd A e ul 25h m l J1 1 2 e r ae pr Arm J1 5 Arm J2 2 High St WB a Arm J1 1 High St EB PEE erie Arm J2 1 High StEB gt g A 1 2 t Pe i e A O a 31 2 2 n e251 Tat J1 2 1 Ji Junction J2 Eas t Junction Sos TratSc Deby Conraier 1 Total Traffic Delay Conmolier 282 Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane all Contains Junc Al Arm All v Lane All Destination Zone All Arm All v Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2
10. Arms pop out menu on the Network menu A new Arm will be created which can be dragged into its desired position and dropped by clicking with the mouse If necessary the Arm can be rotated and repositioned more accurately after it has been created as described below in Moving and Repositioning Arms e When the Arm is dropped the Edit Arm dialog box is displayed This allows the Arm s settings to be entered Edit Arm Am Mo 1 Junction West St London Hoad Am Mame West St OF Cancel e The following settings are available for an Arm o Arm Number The Arm Number will default to one more than the maximum Arm Number of the existing Arms Arms can be numbered in any order but all Arm Numbers must be used with no Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 67 gaps in the sequence If the new Arm is allocated the same number as an existing Arm the new Arm will be inserted into the Arm numbering sequence and higher numbered Arms renumbered o Junction The Junction the Arm belongs to The Junction is used to group Arms and other Junction related items so that they can be moved as a group rather than one by one The Junction is also used to organise Network input data and results o Arm Name The Arm Name is a simple text name to describe the Arm Usually this will be the road name of the street the Arm represents e Click OK to finish creating the Arm 4 3 5 2 Moving and Repositioning Arms Ar
11. Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Phase Overlap View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Phase Overlap View will display the Phase Overlaps for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Phase Overlaps for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Phase Overlap View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Phase Overlap View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the Phase Overlap View s title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Phase Overlap View too 4 17 2 Working with the Phase Overlap View The Phase Overlap View comprises of e Phase Change Selection The Phase Overlap View only displays overlap data for a single Phase Change at at a time e The Signal Group Overlap List The Signal Group Overlap List displays a list of all Signal Groups starting finishing or running through the Phase Change It allows you to define the overlap behaviour for each S
12. Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 64 View Reference e Select a Junction with the mouse The Junction outline turns red indicating the Junction is selected and LinSig indicates which Arms belong to the selected Junction e The selected Junction can be dragged with the mouse to move the Junction and its associated Arms Lanes etc e lf the SHIFT key is held down whilst dragging the Junction the Junction can be moved independently of its Arms Lanes etc 4 3 4 3 Editing Junction Settings A Junction s settings can be edited by selecting the Junction and choosing Edit Junction from the Junction pop out menu on the Network menu This will open the Edit Junction dialog box Junction settings can then be edited as described above in Creating New Junctions 4 3 4 4 Editing Junction Turning Counts Traffic Turning Counts in LinSig can be used for the following purposes e Estimating a Traffic OD Matrix e Validating a traffic assignment If neither of these processes is being carried out it is not necessary to enter Turning Counts Traffic Counts are entered using either a turning count matrix for a Junction or using the Matrix Estimation View Edit Junction Turning Counts Junction Turming Counts are used for Mate Estimation andor for validating assigned turning Flows Enter Turning Counts here for use in Matra estimation andor assignment validation Turing Counts are for currently selected Flow Group Flow Group being edit
13. View Route statistics such as travel times and delays Make manual changes to the traffic flow allocated to each Route Highlight a Route in the Network Layout View by selecting the Route in the Route List o Filter the Route List to display a sub set of Routes in the Route List and in the Network Layout View o View and edit Pedestrian Routes for each Junction e Matrix Estimation View The Matrix Estimation View lists all Traffic Turning Counts defined in the Network These counts can be used either for estimating an OD Matrix or as a validation check that whichever method has been used flows have been entered correctly The Turning Count View also provides a graphical view of all Turning Counts The Matrix Estimation View can be used to o View edit and delete Traffic Turning Counts o View edit and delete Zone entry and exit constraints o Compare Traffic Turning Counts with modelled Flows e Turning Count View The Turning Counts View provides a graphical way of viewing and editing Turning Counts used for Matrix Estimation or validation The Turning Counts View can be used to graphically o View edit and delete Traffic Turning Counts o Check Turning Counts for consistency errors Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 20 LinSig Basics o View edit and delete Zone entry and exit constraints o Compare Traffic Turning Counts with modelled Flows e Scenario View The Scenario View allows Traffic Flow Groups and Network Control Plans to be
14. e Click OK to create the Pedestrian Zone The Pedestrian Zone displays dotted Zone Feeds in the Network Layout View to indicate which Pedestrian Links it is feeding traffic to or accepting it from 4 3 12 2 Repositioning Pedestrian Zones A Pedestrian Zone can be repositioned by dragging it to its new position with the mouse 4 3 12 3 Editing Pedestrian Zones Pedestrian Zones are edited as follows e Select the Pedestrian Zone with the mouse e Choose Edit Pedestrian Zone from the Pedestrian Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu e The Edit Pedestrian Zone dialog box is displayed which is similar to the Create Pedestrian Zone dialog described in Creating Pedestrian Zones above e The Pedestrian Zones settings can be changed in the same way as described above in Creating Pedestrian Zones Disconnecting a Pedestrian Zone from its associated Pedestrian Links will delete all Pedestrian Routes starting from or ending at the Pedestrian Zone Any Pedestrian flow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 133 allocated to Pedestrian Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and the Actual Pedestrian Flows Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Pedestrian Routes through the disconnected Pedestrian Zone Connector should be reallocated to the new Pedestrian Routes created when the Pedestrian Zone is reconnected possibly to a different Pedestrian Link
15. gt DLL 1 ALLE SPSS well Alelalalelxl a Find Junction x Fna O 1 1 I B u Arm 5 oe Arm 2 High Street a gt P gt 7 a p eee 21 gt ao Arm 1 London Road 18819 WEY Uy Arm 6 z Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc All v Arm All v Lane All v Destinati Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 286 Examples The settings governing the Right Turn Lane are entered using the following tabs of the Lane 1 1 Edit Lane dialog box e Movement tab for Ahead movement to Lane 5 1 e Movement tab for Right Turn movement to Lane 6 1 e Storage in Front of Stop Line tab e Non Blocking Storage tab Ahead Movement Tab The Ahead Movement tab is simply used to specify that the Anead movement is non give way This is done by unticking the This Movement Gives Way box Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat Flow Data Advanced Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Non Blocking Storage Movement Give Way Data ri ihe a fie oe How when opposing traffic is stopped f Use Maximum Flow while Giving Way Value f Use Lane Saturation Flow Value Masimum Flow while Giving Way pouHr 1440 f Use Custom Value peusHr Right Turn Movement Tab The Right Turn Movement tab is used to enter the give way parameters for the Right Turn in
16. 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 19 underutilised green and demand dependency The Lane Timings View can be used to o Show green times for each Lane at each Junction o Adjust the start and end points of each Lane s green time using Bonus Greens e Network Control Layout View The Network Control Layout View shows the signal control structure for the whole Network at once Each Controller is shown together with its Signal Groups e Traffic Flows View The Traffic Flows View is used to define Traffic Flow Groups and edit each group s Origin Destination Matrix The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Create delete and edit Traffic Flow Groups Enter the Desired Flows OD Matrix for each Flow Group View the Actual Flow and Difference Matrices for each Flow Group View and edit Pedestrian Flow Matrices for each Junction for each Flow Group o Define Formula Based Flow Groups O O O e Route List View The Route List View is used to view and manage Routes through the LinSig Network Route management is an important part of LinSig Network model development as poor usage of Routes for example modelling many unlikely weaving routes will slow down the model substantially and possibly give less accurate results The Route List View can be used to o View edit and sort Zone to Zone Traffic Routes through the LinSig Network o Allow and disallow routes through the Network either manually or using automatic policies
17. 4 25 SCATS Flow Data MPOM a iiini aai 251 Azole NOUN Aled INC ia a a T det devoueatins 251 4 28 2 Preparing the LinSig model for SCATS Flow Data Import cee 252 4 28 3 Using the SCATS Flow Data Import WIZard cccccceccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 4 28 4 Specifying turning proportions ccceecccseeceeeeceecceeecceeeceueeceeeseeeessueeseeesseeens 254 A 29 AniMating LINSIG VIEWS sissi iise heseb halon ea obidadsivoclansigiiianseakd 256 429 1 COM UOlInG Ihe ANMA sects cata recta doen resent Meat ede Polos date Ba datn 256 4 29 2 Viewing Animation in the Network Layout VICW ccccccseeeseeeseeeneeeneeeneeenes 25 4 29 3 Viewing Animation in the SGroup VIEW ccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeesanees 258 4 29 4 Viewing Animation in the Phase Sequence VICW cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 258 4 29 5 Viewing Animation in the Signal Timings View cccccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeees 258 5 Detailed Controller Background scsceceesseeceeseeseesseseenseesees 259 g1 SCATS Phase SUruCture IN LIN SIO riesi ea ls wee EE EE 259 5 2 SCATS Pedestrian operation in LINSIG ccccecceeeceecseeceeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeas 259 5 2 1 Isolated Operation Pedestrian Signal Groups cccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesseesaeeens 259 5 2 2 Walk for Green Pedestrian Signal GroupS ccccssecccesceseeeeeceeeenseeeenseeensaees 260
18. Controller Multiple Controller Sets are only required if multiple traffic signal cycle times are required in a single LinSig Network If all Junctions share the same cycle time the default Controller Set will be sufficient 4 6 2 1 Creating a New Controller Set A new Controller Set can be created as follows e Choose Add New Controller Set from the Controller Set pop out menu on the Controllers menu or alternatively use the Add New Controller Set button on the Controller List View s toolbar e The Edit Controller Set dialog box is shown allowing the new Controller Set s initial settings to be changed as described below in Editing Controller Sets e When all settings have been set click OK to create the new Controller Set 4 6 2 2 Editing a Controller Set A Controller Set is edited as follows e Right Click on the Controller Set to be edited in the Controller List View and choose Edit Controller Set This will open the Edit Controller Set dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 162 View Reference Edit Controller Set Controller Set Number 2 Controller Set Name Controller Set 2 Scenario Cyde Times Cycle Time AM Peak Current PM Peak e The Edit Controller Set dialog box allows the following settings to be changed o Controller Set Number The Controller Set Number defines the order Controller Sets are listed in the Controller List View o Controller Set Name
19. Delete Phase Sequence from the Phase Sequences Menu After deleting a Phase Sequence the next Sequence is automatically selected When a Phase Sequence is deleted any Network Control Plans using the deleted Phase Sequence will become invalid Additionally any Scenarios using invalidated Network Control Plans will become invalid and will no longer be available for modelling until their Network Control Plans are corrected or a new Network Control Plan chosen 4 10 3 The Phase Sequence Display The Phase Sequence Display shows the Phase order configured for the current Phase Sequence Phases can run in any order and can if necessary be repeated Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 178 View Reference The Phase Sequence shows a Phase diagram for each time a Phase runs in the Phase Sequence Each Phase diagram shows the Signal Groups running in the Phase and other information about the Phase This includes e The Signal Groups running in the Phase are displayed The Phase Sequence View toolbar provides options on how Signal Groups are displayed e The duration of the Phase Running Interval in this Phase Sequence is shown in the bottom centre of the Phase This is for display only the Phase Running Interval duration can be changed in the Signal Timings View This is only shown for the Phase Sequence associated with the Current Scenario as other Phase Sequences do not store signal timings e The Clearance Interval duration between a Phase and it
20. Description Lane han J1 Main Road E K Add PCU General Traffic to Lane J2 4 1 General Traffic ic Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound e Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane LinSig will display the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box which allows detailed settings for the Lane Flow being entered to be specified Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 111 Specify Lane Based Flow Details Flow Details Upstream Lane J2 1 1 General Traffic 0 PCU not yet assigned to destination Downstream Lane J2 4 1 I General Traffic Additional Flow PCU lw Also add same flow to Upstream Lane total flow lf Also add same flow to Downstream Lane total flow LinSig will again intelligently guess at most of the settings and for most typical situations little or no data entry will be required In this case as only a single Layer is defined LinSig will set both Source and Destination Layers In this case all that is required is to specify the amount of traffic travelling between the two Lanes in PCUs for example in this case 100 PCU The settings available are O Source Lane Layer The Layer on the Source Lane from which traffic is leaving Destination Lane layer The Layer on the Destination Lane to which traffic is travelling This will be the same as the Source Lane layer apart from unusual advanced situations where multiple Layers ar
21. Each graph is displayed at the same size but the flow axis can be scaled separately To change a graph s scale e Right click on the graph and choose Set Scale from the pop up menu e Either enter a maximum value for the graph s flow axis or tick Autoscale for LinSig to calculate a flow axis scale that will accommodate the graph Autoscale is less useful when presenting a number of graphs as scales may all be different making the graphs difficult to compare Sizing Graphs All graphs are shown at the same size The size of the graphs can be adjusted using the Slider on the Cyclic Flow Profiles View toolbar Showing Inflows and Outflows Separately For complex graphs it is possible to show just the Inflows or Outflows for a Lane For example Link 6 1 All Routes Link 6 1 All Routes 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0 12 24 36 46 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Inflows Only Outflows Only A graph can be set to show either inflows or outflows as follows e Select the graph using the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 236 View Reference e Either Right Click the graph with the mouse and choose from the pop up menu or use the Flow Profiles menu to choose Show In Profile or Show Out Profile as appropriate Showing Separate Graphs for each Route through a Lane Whilst LinSig is modelling a Lane it keeps Traffic Flows on the Routes passing th
22. If the graph is inserted between existing graphs the existing graphs will be moved to accommodate the new graph Deleting a Graph To delete a Flow Profile Graph select it with the mouse and choose Delete Graph from the Flow Profiles menu 4 25 2 Graph Types The Flow Profile View can display three types of graph These are e Flow Profile Graphs These show the profile of traffic flow into and out of a Lane or Lane Group during a typical signal cycle e Uniform Queue Graph These show the position of the front and back of the Uniform Queue on a Long Lane or Lane Group e Storage Graph Storage Graphs show the amount of traffic currently in a Short Lane or Right Turn Storage Area lal Flow Profiles View sa o S amp Diagram Size 9 Lane 1 1 Flows Lane 1 1 Queue 1800 1500 1200 900 Uniform 8 8 6 600 i a Queue 2 2 0 0 300 Graph UT OTT TTT Flow Profile 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 384 Graphs Lane 1 2 Flows Lane 1 2 Storage In Front 5 5 Storage 1800 Graph 1500 1200 900 600 300 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Graphs can only be viewed if traffic model results are available If any errors exist preventing the traffic model from calculating results the Graphs will display an error message Further details of how the Graphs are calculated and their interpretation is given in the modelling section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2
23. It is relatively uncommon practice to use Uniform Flows as it is usually better to model sources of traffic explicitly in more detail Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 108 View Reference Where Flows are displayed by Layer each Layer Flow is shown in the colour of the Layer it is on Layer colours are defined using the Edit Layers dialog box which is opened by choosing Edit Lane Based Flow Layers from the Traffic Flows menu Choosing which Lane Based Flows to Show Lane Based Flow Mode will display Lane Based Flows for the Flow Group selected in the Network Layout View toolbar As Lane Based Flows define the assignment of flows to the Network they are defined for each Flow Group not for each Scenario as Route Flows are This is because Route Flows could assign differently for each Scenario depending on signal settings or other Scenario specific criteria Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Add Edit Delete Total incoming 170 Add Edit Delete Total outgoing 170 Check Uniform Flow o Total entering downstream flow 170 Apparent flow loss 0 Flow from this lane leaving network o Where a model uses multiple Flow Layers the display can be filtered to only show flows for a specific Layer This can be done by selecting the Layer to display from the Layer Filter in the Network Layout View toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 109 o 4 sles SOs sl CL ep gax Bele ae
24. NGIWORK SUCU E ies eee teeet aie tarsl aici tastes ainteettgiatens aietesdteis tant 58 4 3 3 opeciiying NEtwoOrk INTOA sanrio dented a 61 A234 VV OFKING WIE SUNICUONS sss axsdet svanadce ts an E TE E E 62 Acer WORKIN WUTAN S serrr EE AEA E Eai 66 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 6 Working with LANGS ccccccceecceeeceeeceeceeeceeeceeeceueceueceuseeueseueseusseeeseeeseeeseeesaeees 68 4 3 7 Joining Lanes with Lane CONNECHOMS cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeneeeeess 93 4 3 8 Defining Network Entry and Exit Points using ZONES ccccseceseeeeeeeseeeneeenes 101 4 3 9 Working with Lane Based FIOWS ccccsecccseeceeeeceecceeeceuseceeeeeeeeseueeseeesseens 105 4 3 10 Working with Pedestrian LINKS ccccsecccseeceeeeceeeeseeeseeeceeeeeeeesueesseessaeens 126 4 3 11 Joining Pedestrian Links with Link CONNECHOMS cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 129 4 3 12 Defining Pedestrian Start and End Points using Pedestrian Zones 131 4 3 13 Displaying Signal Phasing on the Network Layout VieW sccesseeeeeeees 134 4 3 14 Annotating the Network Layout ViCW ccccceeceseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeesaeees 136 4 3 15 Displaying and Using Timing Dials cccccceececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeess 139 4 3 16 Displaying Lane Bandwidths on the Network Layout View ccceseeeees 141 4 3 17 Rotating and Scaling
25. Scenario s associated Flow Group or Network Control Plan however the Signal Timings and Traffic Routing contained within the Scenario are lost 4 12 1 5 Copying a Scenario s Traffic Flows to Turning Counts By choosing Copy this Scenario into Turning Counts a copy of the Scenario and a copy of its Flow Group will be created The Turning Counts data of the new Flow Group will automatically be set to match the traffic flows consisting of both Route Flows and Lane Based Flows in the original Scenario and Flow Group This can be useful when merging simple Networks which contain no Tuning Counts into a larger Network as it is useful for the larger merged Network to contain Turning Counts These can be used in the merged Network to estimate a combined matrix More detail is provided in Re Estimating a Combined Matrix for Merged Matrix Based Networks in the Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks section 4 12 1 6 Managing Cycle Times Cycle times are managed slightly differently depending on whether multiple Controller Sets exist within the model Managing Cycle Times for a Single Controller Set Model The Scenario s cycle time can be changed by either clicking on a Scenario s existing cycle time and entering a new one or by selecting the Scenario and entering a new Network cycle time in the main LinSig toolbar Managing Cycle Times for a Multiple Controller Set Model Where multiple Controller Sets exist the cycle time
26. The Controller Set Name allows the Controller Set to be given a name for reference and reporting purposes o Scenario Cycle Times The Controller Set s cycle time can be set independently for each Model Scenario The cycle time will be used for all Controllers in the Controller Set If different cycle times are required the Controller Set should be split into two or more Controller Sets Cycle times can also be managed from the scenario View and on the main toolbar e Click OK to update the Controller Set with the new seitings 4 6 2 3 Deleting a Controller Set A Controller Set can only be deleted when all Controllers in the Controller Set have been deleted or moved into other Controller Sets A Controller Set can be deleted by right clicking on the Controller Set in the Controller List View and choosing Delete Controller Set from the pop up menu 4 6 2 4 Moving Controllers between Controller Sets A Controller can be moved to a different Controller Set by dragging it to a new Controller Set in the Controller List View The Controller will adopt the cycle time of its new Controller Set 4 6 3 Working with Controllers LinSig can model one or more Controllers each of which can be grouped into Controller Sets as described above to allow multiple cycle times to be used within the same Network Each Controller adopts the cycle time of its parent Controller Set Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 6 Controller List View 163 4 6 3
27. The greater level of detail has a cost in terms of model run times The high level of detail being modelled can lead to longer run times especially in larger Networks An Origin Destination Matrix is required for the region of Network being modelled For larger Networks it is unusual to have a directly counted OD Matrix although ANPR developments are making this increasingly more feasible Although LinSig provides a facility to estimate a matrix from traffic turning counts it can be onerous for an unfamiliar user to produce a sufficiently robust OD matrix for a large Network if traffic counts are of poor quality Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig 41 e In larger Networks with significant opportunities for rerouting the number of possible Routes through the Network can be very large Although the number of Routes can often be substantially reduced by judicious removal of unfeasible Routes a large number of valid Routes can often remain which can make fine tuning of traffic routing by manually adjusting Route Flows unfeasible e When traffic routes through the Network using criteria other than delay eg signing significant manual Route Flow changes and or Route locking may be required when calibrating to ensure the OD Matrix and Route Flows match traffic counts Advantages of Lane Based Flow Methods include e The entry of flow information is much more direct and avoids more complex conce
28. The minimum duration of a Phase may depend on factors relating to the adjacent Phases in the sequence for example Pedestrian Clearance and Phase Overlap The Phase Minimum Matrix shows the Phase Minimum for the subject Phase for all combinations of preceding and succeeding Phases allowing the spread of minimums to be ascertained For example for Phase A LinSig will calculate the Phase Minimums for Phase A in the sequences C A B C A C B A B and B A C 4 19 1 2 The Minimum Phase Minimums Summary The Minimum Phase Minimums Summary summarises the different Phase Minimum Matrices by showing the Minimum Phase Minimum for each Phase Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 20 Network Results View 219 4 20 Network Results View The Network Results View displays a range of detailed performance statistics and data for the Network and Network items such as Junctions Lanes and Pedestrian Links The View can be opened by choosing Network Results View from the Modelling menu The figure below shows an example of the Network Results View showing a selection of data items Results are always shown for the currently selected Scenario as shown in the scenario View or main toolbar Network Results View H kolaj i PCUs and Capacity Values Tree Columns View Type Al Stream Show Exit Lanes Display Per Period Collapse Column Set 1 Use Tree View C Lane Route j show non zero C Display Per Cyde Expan
29. menu The batch optimisation in the Scenario View is controlled using the When optimising optimise for drop down list in the Scenario View s toolbar r 4 Scenarios View BQ Automatically recalculate results for all Scenarios v au ee oe ee ERER ied Network Control Plan a rn is 1 AM Peak AM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 90 70 14 0 26 33 Delay Optimised 2 PM Peak PM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 90 70 443 22 12 Calculated a 3 AM Peak 2015 AM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 90 70 9 5 33 62 Calculated E PM Peak 2015 PM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 90 70 33 6 24 98 Calculated The options available are e Optimise All Scenarios When either the Optimise Scenarios for Delay or Optimise Scenarios for PRC button on the Scenario View s toolbar is clicked LinSig will optimise the signal times for all Scenarios For complex models or large numbers of Scenarios this may take a few seconds or even some minutes in extreme cases e Optimise Current and Marked Scenarios When either of the optimise buttons on the Scenario View s toolbar are clicked LinSig will optimise the signal times for both the currently selected Scenario and any Scenarios ticked in the Scenario View s Marked column This allows a subset of Scenarios to be batch optimised which can be useful when optimising larger models or when a large number of Scenarios
30. 5 23 Pedestrian Protectii ekes E E EEEE TE E E 260 5 24 Signal COUR OV CHADS asrki 261 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 Reporting and Printing see 263 6 1 Printing Graphical Layout VIEWS wit iisc ona es eee ieee eee ncneeies 263 6 2 Printing Flow Profile DiIAQraAMs cccccccceccceeeceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeesueeeeeeaueesueeaeeeaeeeneeenaes 265 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder siini a a aaa aa 265 6 3 1 Report Definitions and Templates cccccccceeeceeeceeeseeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeenes 266 6 0 2 Quickly Prnting a Default REDON armsan a aE 266 6 3 3 USING the Report Build onene a a 267 6 3 4 Viewing and Printing a REPOMT cccccccseecseeeseeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeneeenes 274 Ort EXPONO GraNi aaa R wien soar tcancesetos tea uisagenneee ee 275 6 4 1 Exporting a VIEW 10 C AD ncaec cecsnnacsnonsanacvsianesuasasncagmenadansloadonsasisanedsasinnesecapiseneseasionns 275 6 4 2 Exporting Views to DIP and Word Processors ccccceecseeeceeeceeeneeeneeenaeenes 275 T lt 1 1 ee ea ee eee ee nee eee 276 Po lXGiM UC tube EX Ain pl OS wesitinas Saunas sek ia did adondadandoideigdandatansenieeeasenns 276 Tki Example l Flared ENUY sesi diol eacian lect casubas a 276 lt EXample 2 Let Turn Baya cese a a a 277 7 1 3 Example 3 Left Turn Give Waynas a 278 7 1 4 Example 4 Left Turn Give Way from a Short Lane cccececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 280 7 1 5 Example 5 Right Turn
31. 7 Examples A number of examples showing how to code different junction and Arm types into LinSig Appendices A Installation and Setup Provides detailed information on how to install activate and setup LinSig including how to setup Network Licence Servers You do not need to read this section if LinSig has been set up for you The LinSig software is designed to have functionality to allow you to work with UK Controllers or SCATS controllers or both There are some aspects of the software that are the same whether you are working with UK Controllers or SCATS Controllers however some functionality and nomenclature only apply to either UK or SCATS Controllers This is the SCATS specific version of the User Guide It assumes that models are built using SCATS Controller Types only and will not include any detailed information that is specific only to UK Controllers Detailed information specific to UK Controllers can be found in the UK specific version of the User Guide 1 1 What is LinSig LinSig is a computer software package for the assessment and design of traffic signal junctions either individually or as a network comprised of a number of junctions It is used by traffic engineers to construct a model of the junction or network which can then be used to assess different designs and methods of operation Apart from stand alone junctions it can be used for multiple traffic signal junctions complex compound junctions suc
32. Am D 200 High St London Rd Park St PRC 26 0 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Level Of Service C b q a i U an n nH T cr Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane All Contains Junc Al Arm all Lane Al Connector AN A Zone should be created for every point traffic enters or exits a Matrix Based Network or Matrix Based regions of a Network Zones are not required for Lane Based Flow Network regions unless journey times are being calculated on Routes through the region Further information is given on structuring a Network using Matrix Based and Lane Based Flow regions in the Essential Background section Three types of Zones exist in LinSig These are e External Zones External Zones feed traffic into the end of an Arm which contains only Lanes with no incoming Lane Connectors or receive traffic from an Arm which contains only Lanes with no outgoing Lane Connectors They are typically used at entry and exit points around the edge of the Network Most if not all Zones in the majority of models will be External Zones In LinSig 3 1 and above more than one External Zone can be connected to the same Network Entry or Exit Arm e Internal Zones Internal Zones feed traffic along an Arm which contains Lanes with incoming Lane Connectors and are used for two purposes These are o To represent traffic entering the Network from on street parking or from a series of minor side ro
33. Based Terminology LinSig can display Traffic Signal Controller based views using terminology and labelling consistent with the SCATS adaptive traffic control system developed by New South Wales Roads and Traffic Authority e SCATS Controller specification LinSig allows you to specify input data for SCATS controllers in a form consistent with the SCATS system e Level of Service indicator LinSig can display a Level of Service indicator for Lanes Junctions and the entire Network e SCATS Flow Import LinSig can import traffic flows from detector data output by the SCATS Traffic Reporter program e SCATS Daisy Chain offsets LinSig can display controller offset timings relative to a master controller for easy extraction into the SCATS system How to use these features is described in General View Features in the View Reference Section of this User Guide 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process Although LinSig models can be built up in any order it is recommended when new to LinSig to follow the editing sequences described below This will avoid inadvertently missing out any crucial steps or becoming lost within the modelling process The following is intended to be a quick review of how to build a LinSig model Much more detail on the aspects covered is found later in this User Guide The modelling sequences below assume the model will be built up with each step being carried out for all Jun
34. Controller Controllers can be numbered in any order but all Controller numbers must be used with no gaps in the sequence If a new Controller is given the same number as an existing Controller the new Controller will be inserted into the Controller numbering sequence and higher numbered Controllers will be renumbered Controller Type The Controller Type setting allows the Controller to be set to follow traits of a particular controller manufacturer Controller Name A descriptive name for the Controller SCN System Code Number A standard code number identifying the Controller Signal Group Minimum Type This setting only applies to UK Controller Types 164 View Reference Allow Multiple Phase Streams This setting only applies to UK Controller Types Allow Non Standard Filters This setting only applies to UK Controller Types Notes A note which allows any information relevant to this Controller to be added Controller Set This setting allows the Controller s Controller Set to be changed The Controller Set can also be changed by dragging the Controller into a new Controller Set in the Controller List View SCATS Daisy Chain Offset Master This setting allows you to specify which other controller is the Master when display SCATS Daisy Chain relative offsets e Click OK to finish creating the Controller 4 6 3 3 Editing Controller Settings A Controller s settings can be edited by selecting the Controller in
35. Definition in the left panel Each fragment has a different set of options with the number of options available reflecting the complexity of the fragment Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 269 6 3 3 1 Managing Report Definitions Each LinSig file can contains several Report Definitions each of which is used to define the layout of a LinSig Report A Report can be produced or rerun at any time based on any of the Report Definitions Creating a new Report Definition A new Report Definition can be created as follows e Click the Add New Report Definition in the Report Builder The Create a New Report Definition Dialog Box will open as shown below a Create A New Report Definition f Create a new Report Definition from a Template Browse for a Template Delete Selected Template Template Description Basic Results Summary A Basic Summary of Model Results Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data followed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig V1 report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data Signal Timing A Report showing the current signal timings for each A Report showing traffic flow data used in the model A report showing all input data followed by the results A report producing output similar to a LinSig V1 report A report showing just the signal configuration data A Report showing the cu
36. Flow Group Controller or Scenario the dependency indicator will automatically be shown as green without the need to use a Repeat Select Block for that criterion 6 3 4 Viewing and Printing a Report As LinSig Reports are created in RTF format they are viewed edited and printed using an external RTF compatible Word Processor or viewer It is anticipated that almost all users will have a modern word processor available to them on their PC however for users who do not have such software available a free Microsoft Word Viewer can be downloaded from Microsoft s web site www microsoft com You may need to consult your IT department before downloading or installing the viewer Although JCT will always try to assist with any Word Processor or Viewer related problems it may sometimes be quicker to contact your Word Processor Vendor or Helpdesk to assist with purely Word Processor related problems You should ensure the software you wish to use to view LinSig Reports is set up as the default application for opening RTF files Sometimes other applications can hijack the RTF extension leading to Reports inadvertently opening in an incorrect application To correct this use your Word Processor or Windows settings to re associate the RIF extension with your Word Processor of choice Once a Report has been defined the Report can be viewed in several ways using the buttons at the bottom of the Report Builder s left pane These are e Preview
37. Flow Groups List It is Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 146 View Reference changed by selecting a new current Scenario in the Scenario View When the Current Scenario is changed LinSig will recalculate model results using the Flow Group and other settings from the new Current Scenario Creating a New Flow Group A new Flow Group can be created as follows e Choose Add Flow Group from the Flow Groups pop out menu on Traffic Flows menu e Select the type of Flow Group to create A Flow Group can be a Standard Flow Group or a Formula Flow Group which is calculated from one or more component Flow Groups e A new Flow Group with a default name and time period is created at the end of the Flow Group List The new Flow Group can be edited as described in Editing Flow Groups below Inserting a Flow Group into the Flow Group List A new Flow Group can be inserted at any position in the Flow Group List as follows e Select a Flow Group next to where the new Flow Group is needed e Choose Insert Flow Group After Selected Flow Group or Insert Flow Group Before Selected Flow Group from the Traffic Flows menu as appropriate A new Flow Group is created and inserted into the Flow Group List e The new Flow Group can be edited as described in Editing Flow Groups below Editing a Flow Group s Details Editing a Flow Group s traffic flow information is covered below in the section Origin Destination Matrices A Fl
38. Group already defined Efe Traffic Flows View am Traffic Mode i Pedestrian Mode Flow Groups Start End A 08 00 09 00 _ 16 30 17 30 The Flow Group List shows the following information for each Flow Group Flow Group Number A unique reference number for the Flow Group Description A text description of the Flow Group Type Whether the Flow Group Is a Standard or Formula Flow Group Start Time The time of day the Flow Group starts End Time The time of day the Flow Group ends Duration The duration of the Flow Group Formula The formula if it is a Formula Flow Group Component Indicates if the Flow Group is a Component Flow Group Unused in Scenarios Indicates if the Flow Group is not being used in any Scenarios or referenced in any formulae Lane Based Flow Indicates if the Flow Group contains Lane Based flow data The Selected Flow Group The Selected Flow Group is highlighted in red The Selected Flow Group is the Flow Group which for which the OD matrices are displayed in the right panel of the Traffic Flows View It is not necessarily the Flow Group being used for model calculations The Selected Flow Group can be changed by clicking a Flow Group in the Flow Group List The Current Scenario Flow Group The Flow Group currently being used for model calculations is inferred from the current Scenario selected in the Scenario View and is shown in bold and labelled current Scenario in the Traffic
39. Groups can be changed if necessary using the SGroup View Signal Groups are displayed as follows e Green showing directional arrows The Signal Group runs in the Phase with the directional arrows indicating which movements the Signal Group controls e Red with no Arrows The Signal Group cannot run in the Phase due to a conflict with a Signal Group already running in the Phase No arrows are shown indicating the signal group is not running e Grey with no Arrows The Signal Group could run in this phase but is not currently selected to do so No arrows are shown indicating that the signal group is not running Phase Minimums LinSig can optionally show the minimum possible Phase Minimum for each Phase In many cases Phases can run in a variety of orders and a Phase could have a different effective minimum for each possible Phase Sequence LinSig therefore calculates Phase minimums for all possible sequences of three phases and displays the lowest Phase Minimum found for the middle Phase The Phase View shows only a summary of the minimum Phase Minimums The Phase Minimum View shows more detail on how Phase Minimums vary for different Phase orders Phase Timing Parameters LinSig shows four timing parameters that can be specified for the Phase These are Late Start Minimum Green Early Cut Off Green and Yellow All Red 4 9 3 Selecting Phases and the Current Phase When carrying out an action on a Phase LinSig needs to know
40. If the method of control is modified to provide a right turn Arrow Phase as shown below then right turners can turn in gaps during Phase A at full saturation flow during Phase B and will also receive a bonus for the number of vehicles stored in front of the stop line prior to Phase B starting The capacity is simply calculated as The number turning in gaps the number turning during the Arrow the bonus for storage in front of the stop line 3 in this case Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 285 7 1 6 Example 6 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in a single lane This example features ahead and right turning traffic sharing the same Lane A critical factor in modelling capacity for situations which have a mixture of ahead and right turning traffic in a single lane is whether or not right turners at the front of the queue block the Ahead vehicles LinSig has a unique feature which allows this to be modelled The area in front of the stop line is known as the Storage Area and represents the number of right turners that can wait in front of the stop line The number of PCU which can store before blocking is used to specify how many of these waiting PCU do not block the Ahead traffic whilst waiting Two Right Turners can store without blocking Ahead Traffic Clear Conflict The LinSig Model Lane Structure used to model the above is XF Network Layout View w olez os 61a
41. January 2013 114 View Reference Drag with the mouse to one of the Destination Lanes where traffic is moving to Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane As in Case 1 above LinSig does not know how much flow is involved in this action and has insufficient information to make a guess The Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box is therefore displayed to request details of the action In this case it is desired to add 200 PCU from the Source Lane to the first Destination Lane The 200 PCU is entered into the dialog box and Add Lane Flow clicked All other options have been anticipated correctly 200 PCU is added to the Source Lane Total Flow the Lane Connector and the Destination Lane Total Flow Drag with the mouse from the same Source Lane to the second Destination Lane As the current Source Lane Total Flow is all allocated to outgoing Lane Connectors LinSig anticipates that flow is being added rather than propagated from the Source Lane as in Case 2 As new flow is being added and LinSig doesn t know how much flow is being added the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box is displayed to allow this to be entered 100 PCU is entered as moving between Source and Destination Lanes Additionally as LinSig has anticipated that flow is being added rather than propagated the options in the dialog box have both defaulted to adding the new flow to both Source and Destination Lanes When Add
42. List e The Currently Modelled Phase Sequence The Phase Sequence currently being used for model calculations is inferred from the Network Control Plan being used by the Current Scenario selected in the Scenario View and is shown in bold and labelled current in the Phase Sequence List It is changed either by changing the Current Scenario s Network Control Plan or by selecting a new Current Scenario in the Scenario View When the Current Scenario is changed LinSig will recalculate model results using the Phase Sequence and other settings from the new Current Scenario Creating a New Phase Sequence A new Phase Sequence can be created by choosing Create Phase Sequence from the Phase Sequences Menu or by right clicking on the Phase Sequence List and choosing Create Phase Sequence from the pop up menu The Phase Sequence will be created with a default name but with an empty Phase Sequence Editing a Phase Sequence A Phase Sequence can be edited by selecting it in the Phase Sequence List and choosing Edit Phase Sequence from the Phase Sequences menu This will open the Edit Phase Sequence dialog box which can be used to renumber the Phase Sequence and to change its name Alternatively the Phase Sequence Name can be edited directly by clicking on a Sequence name in the Phase Sequence List Deleting a Phase Sequence A Phase Sequence can be deleted by selecting the Phase Sequence in the Phase Sequence List and choosing
43. List displays the following columns Junction The Junction the counted traffic is passing through For counts that pass through multiple Junctions this will show the Junction where there counted traffic Starts Arms The s through which the counted traffic passes through Count The amount of counted traffic on this movement in PCU Assigned The total assigned flow on this turning movement in the Current Scenario Balancing Factor A measure of how much the matrix estimation process has changed OD matrix movements through this count Diff The percentage difference between the count and the total assigned flow on this turning movement in the Current Scenario Positive values are displayed with a red background and negative values with a blue background Diff The difference between the count and the total assigned flow on this turning movement in the Current Scenario in PCU Positive values are displayed with a red background and negative values with a blue background Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 199 e GEH The GEH or Geoffrey E Havers GLC transport planner who invented the Statistic in the 1970s Statistic The GEH statistic measures a combination of relative and absolute error between a traffic count and a modelled flow and is commonly used to test the goodness of fit of modelled flows to observed counts Values greater than 5 0 are displayed in red This is explained in more detail below The Zone
44. Multi Lane Advanced oo ae G WG Arday Of Pest lsu MB Flows General Traffic a eiciibaans tial Sat Flow Default Calculated Turn Prop Radius m Calculated Turning Proportions are for Current Flow Group Oene nfnit Sateation Flow Selecting this for exit bottlenecks and lanes exiting the network will ensure no delay is incurred on them lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel To change a Lane with a saturation flow to a unconstrained Lane select the Unconstrained Infinite Saturation Flow option on the Saturation Flow Data tab It is recommended that all Junction and Network Exit Lanes are modelled as unconstrained Modelling a constrained exit from a Junction requires careful thought and it is not adequate just to model this with a constrained Junction exit Lane MultiLane MultiLanes were introduced in LinSig 3 1 and effectively provide a mechanism similar to Links in previous versions of LinSig A MultiLane in LinSig represents a group of Lanes which behave in an identical manner That is e All physical lanes in the MultiLane receive the same green times Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 81 e Any give way behaviour is identical across all lanes e Traffic distributes equally between each lane MultiLane 0 LIN Arm 1 London Road MultiLanes fulfil the following functions e They are directly compatible with models created in earlier versions of LinSig e Th
45. Network It MS ccccceccesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesaeees 143 4 4 Traffic Flows VIO Wins suctucisavtuavacsunsaundausta ved teGunbosdan cabin tag anbow ded capintrdunboc dnd cebintrdunbow doa cage 144 4 4 1 Defining Traffic Flows in LINSIQ ccccecceseeeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeess 144 4 4 2 Defining Pedestrian Flows in LINSIG ccccseccssecceeeeceeeceuseceeeseueeseueesseesseeens 144 4 4 3 Managing Flow Groups using the Traffic Flow Group List ccceseeeseeeees 145 4 4 4 Working with the Origin Destination Matrices cccccccseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeneeesaeeens 149 4 5 The Route List V IOW asi tna ncout tear tavetinahavs vena tleaTaacddeaPeucelud Mun neteaseiia led Mannetsuneioatnmaneieunem 153 4 5 1 Working with Routes in LINSIQ ccccseccceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeceeceuseseeeaeeessueeseeesseeess 153 4 5 2 Assigning the Desired Traffic Flow Matrices to Routes using the Route List 159 AG GOmtOlen LIST WiC W sc stcts cte Sota Senate eet occ Saree aetna aot ere aa a tae da 161 A 6 Als DENUN S sitcaiwattanmet licen tacients tasientan eustachian axchanaaacenagacaneanmenaganees 161 4 6 2 Working with Controller Sets ccccceccccseeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeseeceseeeeeseesesseeesseeeesaaees 161 4 6 3 Working With CONTO lEI S acn 162 AT COUR VIEW weauieccbestintgeue nce Oeceludsivedinestedecdc a a a E 165 4 7 1 Selecting which Controller to VEW a a 165 A 12 USI
46. Network Results View section and the Modelling Background section e Add Pedestrian Network If pedestrian delay is being modelled Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Zones are added using the Network Layout View Remember that each Junction has its own separate Pedestrian Network If it is not required to model pedestrian delay it is not necessary to add Pedestrian Links etc but timing constraints such as Pedestrian Signal Group Walk times Clearance times and Pedestrian Protection should still be modelled by including Pedestrian Signal Groups in the Controller model e Add Pedestrian Flow Information Pedestrian Flows are specified in the Traffic Flows View using a separate Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrix for each Junction Remember that even if pedestrian flow information isn t available it is still possible to partially model pedestrian delays by entering estimated relative flow weights in the Pedestrian OD Matrices e Review the LinSig Routes LinSig uses Routes to define how OD Flows are assigned to the Network A Route in LinSig is defined as a path of Lanes between two Zones LinSig automatically creates all possible Routes through the Network and lists them in the Route List View The Route List View can be used to examine Routes to check for sensible routeing patterns and either automatically or manually disallow any Routes which are unfeasible or undesirable e Edit the Signal Group Conflict matrix Confli
47. Opposed Movement at Signals cseceseeeeeeeees 282 7 1 6 Example 6 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in a single FEAT E E E teats es tie ets cts set E E E E ET 285 7 1 7 Example 7 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple WINS S EET AE E E EEEE E EEE A A OE E E AAA E EEE A 288 7 1 8 Example 8 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple Flared Langs nee ee ree ee eee 289 7 1 9 Example 9 Mixed Ahead and Turning Traffic in a single lane with differing CONIFONTIOF The TUNNING Trai eeann a a erent dain dtaaeldaiaasto 290 A Appendix A Installation and Setup ccccccssesseesesseeeeeeseeeeeneesees 292 Ale rlarawale AGCOUIFEMEMNS cinermreisicacidaeneisiareretinasiun naasiewndiniennaseierndiniesnaceieeaaste 292 Ace SOltware Requirements wccssccase oes he cad E EE 292 Piso AVS CUNNING MEWS Oee E E Eea rreo a 293 A 4 Activating the LinSig Software Licence ccccccceceecesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeseesesseeees 293 PMB D CTIMIMIOUIS eisa a a a 293 A 4 2 Product Activation for Individual PCS aisciai ana 294 A 4 3 Product Activation for Unlimited Networked PC Licences cccceseeeeeeeees 298 A 5 Obtaining and Installing Updates to LINSIG cccececceececeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeas 300 B Appendix B Third party licences csccceesseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeees 301 BW USI PO cai tsa ceca is er cece E T 301 BS WIMO
48. Select Block The Repeat Select Block s options are shown below and indicate that the Fragments enclosed by the block will be repeated for All Controllers Repeat Select For Generate Options 0 Generate for each Scenario C Generate for each Flow Group f Generate for each Controller Controllers iw All Controllers CICI West Controller C2 East Controller Repeating a Block of Report Fragments A block of Report Fragments can be repeated as follows e In the Report Builders Report Definition List click the fragments you wish to repeat whilst holding the control CTRL key down This will select multiple Report Fragments from the list e Click the Add Repeat Select Options for selected fragment s button below the Report Definition List The Report Builder will try to determine what criterion to repeat the fragments for based on the fragment types being repeated The repeating Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 273 fragments are shown indented in the Report Definition List emphasising that they are part of the Repeat Select Block e To review the Repeat Select Options for the block select the Repeat Select Fragment in the Report Definition List The right pane in the Report Builder shows the Repeat Select Options If desired these options can be changed either to repeat the block based on a different criterion or to select only a subset of items for example Controllers for which to repe
49. Sequence View from the Phase Sequences Menu The Phase Sequence View is comprised of two panels e The Phase Sequence List down the left hand side of the View lists all the stored Phase Sequences for the Controller e The Phase Sequence panel on the right shows the Phase order of the currently selected Phase Sequence and also displays timing information for the Phase Sequence such as Phase durations and minimums R Phase Sequence View A ee aaee ae Se Aa EEEE ln No Phase Seque All Stages Current Stages a aa i F i No Right Arrow 4 10 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Phase Sequence Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Phase Sequence View shows the Signal Groups for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the SGroups View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Phase Sequence View will display the Signal Groups for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller d
50. Short Lane segments where traffic within the Lane segment is preventing traffic from entering from upstream but may not be forming a queue with a distinct front and back as modelled on a normal Long Lane For most purposes especially for Short Lane segments such as occurring when flared Lanes or Right Turn Storage is modelled it is usually sufficiently accurate to think of storage as the same as a queue Storage Graphs can be shown for the following Items A Long Lane within a Long Lane Short Lane Group This graph shows traffic storing within the Long Lane of a Lane Group in front of the point where traffic splits into the Short Lane It is useful for assessing whether and when traffic in the Long Lane blocks traffic in its adjacent Short Lane A Short Lane within a Lane Group This graph shows traffic storing within the Short Lane in a Lane Group Similar to above this graph is useful for assessing whether and when traffic in the Short Lane blocks traffic in its adjacent Long Lane A Right Turn Storage Area The Right Turn Storage Area is the space within the centre of a junction where right turning traffic can wait in front of the stop line to turn in gaps in the oncoming traffic This graph shows traffic storing within the Storage Area and is useful for assessing how right turning traffic blocks ahead traffic in an adjacent Long Lane 4 25 5 1 Creating Storage Graphs Uniform Queue Graphs are created as described above and selecting St
51. Short Lane can be converted to a Long Lane as follows Select the Short Lane with the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 73 e Right click on the Lane Choose Convert to Long Lane from the pop up menu If this menu option is unavailable it is because converting the Lane to a Long Lane would create an illegal Lane arrangement e LinSig converts the Lane to a Long Lane making a intelligent guess regarding Lane Connectors Lane Connectors should be checked and adjusted if incorrect e Edit the Lane to set the Lane length and any other settings which may be different for the Long Lane Editing Lane Settings Each Lane has many different settings which can be edited using the Edit Lane dialog box The Edit Lane dialog box can be opened for a Lane either by selecting the Lane and choosing Edit Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network menu or by double clicking on the Lane A detailed explanation of Lane Settings is given below in Configuring Lane Settings Deleting Lanes A Lane can be deleted by selecting it and choosing Delete Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network Menu If a Long Lane has an attached Short Lane the Long Lane cannot be deleted until the Short Lane has been first deleted Deleting a Lane also deletes the following e Any Lane connectors entering or leaving the Lane e Any Routes passing through the Lane e Any Lane Based Flows defined on the Lane
52. Stopline Non blocking Storage Lanes lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel which include Right Turns that have Storage in front of the Stop Line require additional settings to model all the components of right turn capacity modelled by LinSig These settings are contained on the Storage in Front of Stop Line tab They include Does the Lane have Right Turn Storage in Front of Stop Line This setting specifies whether the Lane contains Storage in front of the Stop Line and hence whether the remaining settings on the tab are required to be validly completed Right Turn Storage in Front of Stop Line This is the total number of PCUs which can store in front of the Stop Line whilst waiting to turn right LinSig uses this value in calculating right turn capacity bonuses for traffic discharging with a right turn green arrow Maximum Right Turns in Intergreen PCU This setting specifies how many PCUs waiting in front of the stop line can turn right during the Intergreen after a right turn Lane has terminated It may be different from the Right Turn Storage value as it may not be possible for all vehicles in front of the stop line to turn right during the Intergreen Right Turn Move Up Time sec This specifies the time for a vehicle at the stop line to reach the point at the front of the storage area in the centre of the junction where it waits for a gap to turn right LinSig can estimate this value by assuming the move up time
53. T997 98 94 33 94 102 51 47 51 62 65 35 65 76 08 39 08 47AT 43 77 130 79 66 79 111 47 57 47 76 70 50 70 90 86 54 86 40 10 30 10 A B A C A D B A B C B Cc B D E D C A C A C E C B C D D A D D E D B D C The following tasks can be carried out using the Route List View e Reviewing Traffic Routes through the Network and viewing delay and journey times along Routes e Specifying whether a Route is permitted or not Sometimes LinSig will discover Routes which although logically valid Routes through the Network wouldn t in practice be used by traffic LinSig allows Routes to be defined as non permitted meaning that LinSig will never allow any traffic to be allocated to the Route e Manually editing Route Flows where it is preferred to set a Route Flow rather than allow LinSig to automatically assign it e Lock a Route Flow to prevent the LinSig assigning it a different flow during automatic assignment 4 5 1 Working with Routes in LinSig A Route in LinSig represents a unique path through the Network from one Zone to another Depending on the size and complexity of the Network one or more Routes may exist between two Zones Each of the Routes represents a different choice of Lanes for drivers or Links for Pedestrians travelling or walking between two Zones Routes can be one of two types e Traffic Routes Traffic Routes are comprised of a sequence of individual Lanes and Lane Connectors from one Traffic Zo
54. This can be done using the Pedestrian Route List in the Route List View More information is given in the sections on the Tratfic Flows and Route List Views 4 3 12 4 Deleting Pedestrian Zones A Pedestrian Zone can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Pedestrian Zone from the Pedestrian Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Zone also deletes any Pedestrian Routes originating or ending at the Pedestrian Zone and also deletes any Pedestrian flows originating from or travelling to the Zone in the Traffic Flow View s Junction Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrices Pedestrian Zones should not be deleted unless you wish to delete its associated Pedestrian flow data When restructuring the Network instead of deleting a Pedestrian Zone a better option may be to disconnect the Pedestrian Zone from its associated Pedestrian Links and reconnect it to new Pedestrian Links as appropriate This will retain Pedestrian OD flow information but Pedestrian Route flows will need to be recreated using the Route List View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 134 View Reference 4 3 13 Displaying Signal Phasing on the Network Layout View LinSig can display a copy of the Phase View or Phase Sequence View on the Network Layout View This is extremely useful when printing the network especially larger networks as it allows the phasing of a Junction to be concisely included on the main network diagram Each Network La
55. This creates the report file in a temporary location avoiding polluting the main data folder with a large number of report files as the Report is refined If desired the Report can be edited in the word processor but if so it should be saved to a folder other than the temporary folder e Final Save and View When you are happy with your Report use Final Save and View to specify where the file will be saved before opening the file in your word processor This allows you to ensure the file is saved in your preferred location e Save This saves the Report file without viewing and is intended for the quick preparation of a number of reports for later checking Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 4 Exporting Graphics 275 6 4 Exporting Graphics Several LinSig Views can be exported to a number of graphics file formats to allow them to be used in engineering drawings or Desk Top Publishing DTP applications 6 4 1 Exporting a View to CAD A View is exported to CAD using the universal DXF Drawing Interchange Format file format This file can then be imported to any CAD software that supports DXF import 6 4 2 Exporting Views to DTP and Word Processors Many DTP packages support DXF and this can be used in this case As a quicker alternative LinSig allows a View to be copied to the Windows Clipboard as a scalable metafile This can then be pasted into many Desktop Publishing and Word Processing packages using standard Windows cut and past
56. Totals List The Zone Totals List shows selected Traffic Flow Group s Zone origin and destination totals implied from the turning counts and allows unspecified Zone totals to be entered Zones should always have totals either implied or explicitly entered specified before running matrix estimation If Zone totals are not specified the matrix estimation process will use the Zone to indiscriminately allocate traffic into to better match traffic counts regardless of whether this is sensible This process is often referred to as Zone Dumping and is usually undesirable All traffic flow or count values displayed in the Matrix Estimation View are in PCUs 4 13 4 Working with Traffic Counts The starting point for matrix estimation or Network validation is a robust set of traffic counts LinSig allows a set of turning counts for each Traffic Flow Group to be entered for each Junction or for the Network as a whole A Traffic Turning Count in LinSig is defined as a measured amount of traffic moving from one Arm from Arm to another Arm to Arm Usually both Arms will be at the same Junction but they do not have to be as long as Lanes on both Arms are directly connected with Lane Connectors Currently it is not possible to specify Lane to Lane counts in LinSig Traffic Counts can be entered in three ways These are e Using a Turning Count Matrix in the Network Layout View Counts can be entered using the Edit Junction Turning Count Dialog b
57. View e Turning Counts View e Matrix Estimation View e Lane Timings View The Controller Views are e Controller List View e SGroup View e SGroup Conflict Matrix View e Phase View e Phase Sequence View e Network Control Plans View e Network Control Layout View e Phase Overlaps View e Signal Timings View e SGroup Data View e Phase Minimums View The Results and Reporting Views are e Scenario View e Network Results View e Travel Time Delay matrix View e Model Auditing View e Audit History View e Cycle Time Optimisation View e The Report Builder e Cyclic Flow Profiles View e Time Distance Diagrams View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 50 View Reference Other Miscellaneous Views e Error View e Undo History View e Lane Data Grid View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 1 General View Features 51 4 1 General View Features some features are common to a number of Views 4 1 1 Always on Top The Always on top feature allows a View to be kept on top of all other Views This is useful if you wish to prevent a smaller View becoming lost behind a larger View Always on Top can be switched on for a view by clicking the pin icon located to the right of each View s Title Bar Current Selection ial f Se 2 2 21 8 2 Always On Top Off Current Selection i n nET z rae TR Eg Always On Top On If two overlapping Views are both set to always on top t
58. View has been aborted part way through some cycle times will have been optimised and some will not If this box is ticked LinSig will only allow the cycle time cursor to select timings which have been optimised If the box is un ticked all cycle times can be selected with the cursor but un optimised cycle times will use estimated Phase Lengths instead of true optimums 4 24 1 3 Cycle Time Optimisation for Larger Networks The Cycle Time Optimisation View does a considerable amount of optimisation work and for a large or complex Network may take some time to run In this case we recommend assessing Cycle Time options using several Scenarios using the same Traffic Flow Group and Network Control Plan but different cycle times This allows better control of the number of cycle times assessed and hence optimisation time Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 232 View Reference 4 25 Cyclic Flow Profiles View The Cyclic Flow Profiles View displays detailed Flow Profile graphs for Lanes or Lane Groups showing flow profiles calculated by the traffic model The graphs are the same graphs as can be shown on the Network Layout View but the Flow Profile View allows them to be laid out on a page for printing at a larger size The Cyclic Flow Profiles View can be opened by choosing Show Cyclic Flow Profiles View from the Cyclic Flow Profiles pop out menu on the Modelling menu ial Flow Profiles View j Diagram Size Lane 1 1 Flows TTT 0 12 2
59. Wetwork Control Traffic Flows Modelling Reports Window Help Bl lBl py se ee wl we EE amp a at bal ED antroller Phase Stream eat q a a e Te xt Forma pr View Arrangements J Flows F a ew ae n am BA 2 218 2 Se mime Sep fe als eller 4 4 a A Find Arm g Layer Filter Creating Customised Text Display Formats New Text Display Formats can be defined using the Text Display Format Manager This is opened by choosing Manage Lane Text Display from the View Menu or by clicking the button to the right of the Text Display Format drop down list Manage Text Display Formats Available Formats Flows Filtered Demand Flow Flows Incl Lane Connectors Add New Filtered Flows Incl Lane Connectors Lane Geometry Delete Lane Sat Flow Flow DegSat and MME Ped Dela com Cruise Times Mame Lane Information Lane Display Format Back Of Lane Middle Of Lane Front Of Lane Lane Armm Lane Number Flow Demand In Flow Lane Full and Arrow SGroups On Lane Lane Connector Display Format Demand Flow Pedestrian Links This Side of Crossing Both Directions This Side of Crossing Link Full SGroup On Link The Text Display Format Manager lists the available Text Display Formats allows them to be copied or new ones created and displays the layout of data and result items on Lanes Lane Connectors
60. Zone has a flat profile over a signal cycle Where the Zone is used to split the Network into regions the model will be more accurate if traffic leaving a Zone to enter a region uses the cyclic flow profile shape of traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 87 modelled as terminating on the other side of the region boundary This setting achieves this by profiling traffic leaving a Zone based on the cyclic flow profile of traffic terminating at the Lane s previous upstream Lane More information on splitting a Network into regions is provided in the Essential Background section LinSig Give Way Model Several of the tabs in the Edit Lane Dialog refer to the LinSig Give Way model The Give Way Model is summarised here and further information is available in Give Way Lanes in LinSig in Section 3 Essential Background The give way model used in LinSig is a standard linear equation model that has been used in a number of modelling packages for many years This method has the advantage of being simple to use as well as being able to closely approximate a range of other give way models such as Tanners Formula and gap acceptance methods The model can be used to model left turn slips at signal junctions opposed right turns within signal junctions as well as purely priority junctions For right turn Lanes the give way model is only one component of the LinSig right turn model The right turn model is described in more de
61. a Lane adjacent to the desired position of the new Lane From the Network Lanes Add Lane menu choose Add Long Lane to Left or Add Long Lane to Right as appropriate A new Long Lane with default settings will be created adjacent to the existing selected Lane Creating a New Short Lane Select the Long Lane which will feed traffic into the new Short Lane From the Network Lanes Add Lane menu choose Add Short Lane to Left or Add Short Lane to Right as appropriate A new Short Lane will be created attached to the adjacent selected Long Lane The Short Lane will have a default length which can be changed as described below Newly created Lanes are obviously not connected to any other Lanes yet and therefore do not show any directional arrows Converting a Long Lane to a Short Lane A Long Lane can be converted to a Short Lane as follows Select the Long Lane with the mouse Right click on the Lane Choose Convert to Short Lane with Lane on Left or Convert to Short Lane with Lane on Right as appropriate from the pop up menu If either menu option is unavailable it is because converting the Lane to a Short Lane would create an illegal Lane arrangement LinSig converts the Lane to a Short Lane moving Lane Connectors as necessary Edit the Lane to set the Short Lane length and any other settings which may be different for the Short Lane Converting a Short Lane to a Long Lane A
62. a similar manner to Example 5 above Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat Fow Data Advanced Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Non Blocking Storage Movement Give Way Data How when opposing traffic is stopped C Use Maximum Flow while Giving Way Value f Use Lane Saturation How Value Maxdmum How while Giving Way pcu Hr 1439 Use Custom Value pcuHr Use Data Specitied Below Allopposing To 6 1 Let Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 287 Storage in Front of Stop Line Tab Similarly the Storage in Front of Stop Line settings are entered the same as for Example 5 Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat Fow Data Advanced Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Non Blacking Storage This is a signal controlled Right Tum giving way to oncoming traffic If Does the lane have Right Tum Storage in front of the stopline Right Tum Storage in Front Of Se ee re ee Stopline PCL 3 00 Right Tum Move Up s 2 i Auto Cale Using Storage Max Right Tums In l T Intergreen PCL 2 0 Right Tum Factor 05 I Allow Edi Non Blocking Storage Tab LinSig automatically models the interaction between the Ahead and Right turn movements sharing a single lane based on the above settings However as discussed above the Right Turners may block the Ahead movement if they queue back out of the s
63. added to a Phase Sequence by dragging Phases from the Phase View Phases within the Phase Sequence can also be reordered by dragging with the mouse Alternatively and more quickly a numerical Phase Sequence can be entered into the sequence column of the Phase Sequence List e Add Network Control Plans Using the Network Control Plans View create Network Control Plans to specify the Phase Sequence running on each Controller Network Control Plans avoid the need to re specify each Controllers Phase Sequence for every Scenario Typically a Network Control Plan will be created for each different Network wide signal sequencing strategy e Define Modelling Scenarios A Scenario associates together a Traffic Flow Group Network Control Plan Cycle Time and signal timings providing LinSig with all the information it needs to calculate model results Providing there are no errors in the model LinSig will always display model results for the current Scenario which can be selected from the main toolbar or in the Scenario View LinSig will initially use Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 25 arbitrary Phase Lengths but these can easily be changed for the current Scenario either manually using the Signal Timings View as detailed below or automatically using the optimisation facilities LinSig will then recalculate the model results for the new Phase Lengths The Scenario View can also be used to optimise a number of Scenarios at
64. ahead left movement In LinSig 3 the Non Blocking Storage is always less than or equal to the right turn storage 4 3 6 4 Displaying Numerical Information on Lanes The Network Layout View can display numerical information relating to Lanes and Lane Connectors As LinSig uses far more input data and results than can be displayed at once different Text Display Formats are used to display different sets of information at different times LinSig provides a range of pre defined Text Display Formats but it is also possible to create any number of user defined Text Display Formats Each Lane can display up to three data or result items one at each end and one in the middle as illustrated below Each Text Display Format specifies which data or results appear in each position A single data item can also be displayed on Lane Connectors Where short Lanes are used some data and result items apply to the Lane Group consisting of the Short Lane and its adjacent Long Lane rather than individual Lanes These values are shown on the Lane Groups Long Lane in italics An example of a typical display is shown below Junction Arm amp Lane Number Flow Controlling Phases Jt 800 J1 1 2 300 Arm J1 1 London Road Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 92 View Reference Choosing the Text Display Format The Text Display Format can be selected using the drop down list of Text Display Formats in the toolbar Sequences
65. are e Automatically Recalculate Results for all Scenarios LinSig will immediately recalculate results for all Scenarios listed in the Scenarios View when model input data changes This should be the normal setting and should only be changed if a large number of Scenarios or a large modelled Network is causing unacceptably long recalculation times e Automatically Recalculate Results for Current and Marked Scenarios LinSig will immediately recalculate results for the current Scenario and any Scenarios with the Mark column in the Scenarios View ticked This allows recalculation of any Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 187 Superseded or redundant Scenarios to be avoided Obviously results will not be displayed in the Scenarios View for any non calculated Scenarios which will show a status of Not Calculated in the Status column Selecting a Scenario as the Current Scenario will immediately recalculate model results for that Scenario e Automatically Recalculate Results for Current Scenario only LinSig will immediately recalculate results for the Current Scenario All other Scenarios will be given the Status Not Calculated and will not show results in the Scenario View This setting provides the quickest recalculation time but each Scenario will only be recalculated if it is selected as the Current Scenario e Do not Automatically Recalculate Results This setting prevents LinSig from automatically carryi
66. at higher degrees of saturation Ticking the Ignore Random Delay box omits Random delay from the Lane which may lead to a more realistic estimation of queuing and delays Please note it is down to you as the engineer to make the judgement on whether a Lane has sufficiently non random Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 85 characteristics to make it justifiable to ignore Random Delay If in doubt it is more conservative to leave the box unticked e Queue De Sliver Threshold PCU A Sliver Queue is defined as a queue which contains a very small amount of traffic but wnose back of queue extends a long way back from the stop line Sliver queues are a side effect of the type of traffic model used in LinSig and often occur when the traffic flow feeding a Lane is similar to the Lane s Saturation flow During the green period nearly as much traffic is adding to the back of the queue as is leaving the front leading to a slowly decreasing number of PCU in the queue but a rapidly extending back of queue Where this is particularly severe as is for example common at signal roundabout circulatory stop lines the sliver queue may lead to reporting of unrealistically long mean max queues and over severe application of Optimiser Queue Constraints LinSig is in effect modelling vehicles driving up to the back of the queue at cruise speed joining the queue for a fraction of a second before moving off again In reality drivers would tou
67. at the current animation time e The Signal Timings View shows the current animation time within the cycle e The Flow Profile Graphs show the current animation time within the cycle The purpose of the animation is twofold e Provide an easy way for the engineer to visually check aspects of the model such as coordination e Provide a way of presenting a scheme to semi technical users Although the animation is obviously not as effective as some software packages capable of 3D photo realistic visualisation it does provide a resource free method of demonstrating exactly how schemes will work to semi technical colleagues 4 29 1 Controlling the Animation The Animation is controlled using the Animation Toolbar This is opened by choosing Animation Mode from the LinSig View menu Animation Control The different sections of the Animation Control Toolbar are e The Start Stop Pause buttons These respectively start the animation running stop the animation pause the animation and close the animation Control Toolbar e The Step Buttons These allow the animation to be stepped forwards and backwards one second at atime e The Time in Cycle Display The central section displays the Phase Sequence for each Controller and the animation s current time within the cycle The time in cycle slider can be used to manually change the current animation time Each Phase is Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 29 Animating LinSig V
68. been counted or at least estimated It is important when using matrix estimation that all Zone totals are specified If any Zones do not have both origin and destination totals specified the matrix estimation process will tend to add an excess of short trips to and from the Zone as this will allow other turning counts to be matched more closely This can result in unrealistic Zone totals and OD patterns This effect can occur regularly in large transportation models with many uncounted zones and is sometimes referred to as Zone Dumping 4 13 4 3 Count Consistency When preparing counts for use in LinSig or any other matrix estimation process it is very important to check for count consistency between counts If inconsistent counts are used large errors can be introduced into the estimated matrix Where counts are inconsistent LinSig will generally try to produce a matrix which will reproduce counts as well as possible when assigned to the network but by definition it will not be able to match all counts The following types of inconsistency can occur e Junction In Out Inconsistency The total of counted traffic entering a Junction is different from the counted traffic leaving a Junction Where only turning counts are entered this cannot occur in LinSig but where counts between Junctions are used Junction Inconsistency is possible e Inter Junction Inconsistency The total counted traffic entering a road between two Junctions is differen
69. created You may edit the names at this stage by double clicking on the New Scenario column e Click Finish to complete the import process The Import process carries out the following e Adds all the Junctions Arms Lanes and other Network Items from the imported Network to the existing model s Network o Junctions are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Junctions Zones are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Zones Pedestrian Zones are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Pedestrian Zones o Arms and Lanes belong to each Junction and do not need renumbering e Adds the Controllers and all the Controller items belonging to the Controllers to the existing Network o Controllers from each imported model are added in a new Controller Set o Controllers are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Controller List o Signal Groups Phases etc belong to each new Controller and therefore do not need renumbering or renaming e Creates merged Scenarios in the existing model based on matched Scenarios in the existing and imported models Any non matched Scenarios are deleted e Creates merged Network Control Plans in the existing model based on the matched Scenarios Any non matched Network Control Plans are deleted e Creates merged Traffic Flow Groups in the existing model Any Traffic Flow Groups not used by new merged Scenarios are still imported but are prefixed as Impor
70. cycle in the current Network Control Plan s Phase Sequence for this Controller e The Total Green Time This shows the total time this Signal Group is green each cycle The SGroup Data View is for display purposes only and is not used to edit Signal Groups All Signal Group Editing is carried out in the SGroup View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 218 View Reference 4 19 Phase Minimums View The Phase Minimums View provides a detailed analysis of the Phase Minimum times for all possible Phase orders on a Controller The Phase Minimums View can be opened by choosing Phase Minimums View from the Controllers menu The Controller for which the Phase Minimums View displays information can be selected using the Controller Selector drop down list on the View s title bar as described in the SGroup View section The Phase Minimums View has two main displays as shown below These are e The Phase Minimum Matrix This shows the Phase minimums for a Phase for all possible 3 Phase sequences of preceding and succeeding Phases e The Minimum Phase Minimums Summary This shows a summary of the Minimum possible Phase Minimum when considering all possible Phase orders et Phase Minimums sal 3 e ef Phase Minimums sa Lol m Phase Stream Stream 1 Select Phase Minimums Phase Stream Stream 1 Select Phase Phase A r 4 19 1 1 The Phase Minimum Matrix LinSig shows a Phase Minimum Matrix for each Phase in the Controller
71. documentation Please ensure any new Licence ID supplied is used as retaining the old Licence ID may lead to inadvertent copy protection issues in the future 4 LinSig will provide a new Installation ID This will be different from the Installation ID Originally used when activating LinSig for the first time Send the Installation ID to JCT as described above 6 JCT will supply a matching Activation Code by return When you receive the new Activation Code enter it in the space provided and click Continue 7 Check the updated licence details displayed are as expected A 4 2 3 Deactivating and or Moving LinSig to a different PC The Product Activation system used by LinSig ensures that the software can only be used on the number of PCs actually licensed If it is necessary to permanently remove LinSig from a PC the licence can easily be transferred to a new PC or parked with JCT Licence Parking If you wish to dispose of a PC containing a LinSig licence before a new replacement PC is available it is possible to Park the PC s licence with JCT until needed for the new PC If you wish to Park any LinSig licences please contact JCT Software Support who will be happy to guide you through the process You will require access to the PC being deactivated during the call Transferring a Licence Directly to a new PC If you have access to both the old PC and its replacement it is possible to directly transfer the LinSig licen
72. dragged with the mouse to change Phase lengths LinSig will ensure constraints such as Pedestrian Clearance and Signal Group minimums are not violated e Clearance Intervals Clearance Intervals between Phases are shaded grey e Late Starts Late Start intervals at the start of a Phase are shaded in blue Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 212 View Reference e Early Cut Off Green Early Cut Off Green intervals after the Phase termination point are shaded in blue e Phase Timings LinSig displays the Phase timings numerically in the area between Phase Change Point cursors The times are shown in the format Late Start Phase Length Early Cut Off Green Yellow All Red with Late Start and Early Cut Off Green omitted if not in use 4 15 3 1 Changing Phase Change Points amp Phase Lengths Phase Change Points and Phase Lengths can all be changed graphically by dragging the blue Phase Change Point Cursors with the mouse This will change the Phase Change Points in the current Scenario whilst keeping the Cycle Time the same 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 6 r Phase Change Points 4 15 3 2 Changing Controller Offsets A Controller s Offset can be changed by dragging a Phase Change Point whilst holding the SHIFT key down Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 16 4 16 Lane Timings View 213 Lane Timings View The Lane Timings View displays the period each Lane receives a green signal within the cycle It can be opened by choo
73. e Storage Area Uniform Delay PCUHr The Uniform Delay suffered by traffic in the Right Turn Storage Area in front of the stop line This is only applicable for right turn give way Lanes e Total Delay PCUHr The sum of Uniform Uniform Storage and Random amp Oversaturation Delay This is the total aggregate delay suffered by traffic using the modelled Network e Average Delay per PCU sec The Average Delay for each PCU on the Lane averaged over the modelled time period e Level Of Service The Level Of Service Indicator on a signalled lane based on the average delay per PCU e Uniform Stops Stops The Total Uniform Stops over the modelled time period e Average Stops Per PCU Stops PCU The Average number of Stops per PCU averaged over the modelled time period e Back of Uniform Queue at the end of Red PCU The extent of the Uniform Queue on a Lane at the time of the end of the Lane s controlling Signal Group s red period Traffic may continue to add to the back of the queue whilst the queue is clearing leading to a Maximum Back of Uniform Queue greater than the queue at the end of red The Back of Uniform Queue at the end of Red allows only for the variation of the queue within a typical cycle and does not include Random and Oversaturation queues e Maximum Back of Uniform Queue PCU The maximum extent of the Uniform Queue on a Lane taking into account the effect of traffic continuing to add to the back of the q
74. exist e Optimise Current Scenario When either of the optimise buttons on the Scenario View s toolbar are clicked LinSig will optimise the signal times for the currently selected Scenario only This is equivalent to choosing Optimise Current Scenario from the Optimiser menu Regardless of the above option chosen LinSig will give any optimised Scenario a status of either delay optimised or PRC Optimised indicating the results shown are optimal If any model data is changed which means one or more Scenarios may no longer be optimal LinSig will change their status to Calculated reflecting the fact they need to be re optimised Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 196 View Reference 4 13 Matrix Estimation View The Matrix Estimation View is used as an integral part of LinSig s procedure for estimating traffic Origin Destination matrices from traffic counts It can also be used for validating either a manual or automatic traffic flow assignment against traffic counts The View is opened by choosing Matrix Estimation View from the Traffic Flows menu Matrix Estimation View A ola Select the modelled Flow Group AM Peak Current Scenario v 2 Import counts Export counts lanes ts ain a Traffic Routes Bus Routes Lane based Zone Totals PCU Traffic Counts J1 Ped Crossing J1 Ped Crossing J1 3 gt J1 2 625 650 0 96 ae ae J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 4 513 500 1 03 25 1 J2 West
75. exist on the Source or Destination Lane LinSig will make an intelligent guess on the most likely way they should be used whilst adding additional flows Where these guesses are incorrect they can be overridden to specify the intended flow definition Assuming an upstream Lane contains a Total Flow of 200 PCU Lane Based Flows can be added to downstream Lane Conneciors and Lanes using the following procedure e Click on the 200 on Source Lane the traffic is leaving from e Drag with the mouse to the Destination Lane where traffic is moving to e Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane As a Flow Value was dragged LinSig knows more information about what is happening and attempts to speed up the process by offering a guess at what action is being attempted instead of displaying the Specify Lane Based Flow Details as happened in Case 1 above e The guessed action is displayed on a popup menu and if correct can be confirmed by selecting the guessed action in the menu If the guessed action is not correct the action can be edited by choosing Change Flow Details from the popup menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 113 O which displays the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box which allows settings to be customised as described above in Case 1 a Confirm Add all 200 PEU General Traffic to Lane J2 4 1 General Traffic Change flow details J3 EastJunct
76. formulae from TRRL report RR67 to calculate saturation flows from Lane Geometry Geometric parameters for the Lane and for each turning movement out of the Lane are required waa Edit Lane 1 1 General Geometric Calculated Lane Saturation Flow Arm 1 Lane 1 Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed m rr li I Fait Lm i B Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Calculated Turning Proportions are for Current Flow Group The Lane based geometric parameters are Lane Width m The Lane width Gradient The Lane s gradient Only uphill gradients have an effect on the saturation flow Downhill gradients do not adjust the saturation flow upwards Treat as Nearside Lane This setting reduces the saturation flow by 140 PCU hr due to the frictional effect of potential hazards such as gutters or pedestrians stepping Out in the near side Lane There is debate on whether this setting should be used for the right most lane of a multi laned stop line where it could be argued there is also a frictional effect on traffic RR67 gives some guidance on this but if in doubt it is conservative to apply the reduction by setting the Lane as a near side lane LinSig allows turning parameters to be defined for each Lane Turning Movement which are based on Lane Connectors exiting the Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 80 View Reference The Turn based geometric parameters are e Turning Proportion
77. has anticipated To add the remaining 100 PCU to the second Lane Connector drag the 400 from the Source Lane to the second Destination Lane LinSig will recognise that there are 100 PCU unallocated on the Source Lane and guess that all of these 100 PCU are to be allocated to this Lane Connector This action can be confirmed without having to edit any options in the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 115 Case 5 Multiple Flow Layers No existing Flows on Source and Destination Lanes Where multiple Lane Based Flow Layers are being used as described in Managing Lane Based Flow Layers above the drag and drop interface can also anticipate which Layers are being edited For a Lane with two Flow Layers General Traffic and Bus Traffic 200 PCU are to be added to the General Traffic Layer and 50 PCU to the Bus Layer e Before editing Lane Flows the Flow Layers must first be set up using the Edit Lane Flow Layers dialog box as described above in Managing Lane Based Flow Layers The default Layer is left unchanged as General Traffic and coloured black A new Layer is created coloured red and named Buses Edit Lane Based Flow layers 1 BilGeneral Traffic 2 WlBuses e In a similar manner to Case 1 above drag from the Source Lane to the Destination Lane As there are now multiple Layers LinSig cannot predict which Layer you are using and disp
78. information in the greatest level of detail but requires an OD Matrix to be defined for the entire Network which may be onerous to build and lead to longer signal optimisation run times for larger Networks This was the only option available prior to LinSig 3 1 e Lane Based Network A Lane Based Network uses Lane Based Flows throughout to specify traffic flows A Lane Based Flows Network does not use and OD Matrix and only requires Zones and Routes to be defined if journey times on Routes are required e Lane Based Traffic Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows are an alternative simpler way of defining traffic flows compared with Matrix Based Flows which use an OD Matrix and Routes Flows are defined as a total traffic flow for each Lane together with incoming and outgoing turning flows Other than the immediate previous and next Lanes for each Lane Lane Based Flows contain no information on how traffic routes over the wider Network e Flow Group A Flow Group represents a set of Flows for a particular period of time for example a Morning Peak hour Each Flow Group can contain one or more set of three different flow types An Origin Destination OD traffic flow matrix which defines traffic flows for Matrix Based Network regions a set of Lane Based Traffic Flows which defines traffic flows for Lane Based regions and a Pedestrian OD Matrix e Origin Destination Matrix Traffic Flows through a Matrix Based Network or Matrix Based regions of a Networ
79. mG mG mn co The SGroup Data View shows information on all of the Signal Groups on a single Controller Which Controller is displayed is selected using the Controller Selector drop down list on the View s title bar as described in the SGroup View section The SGroup Data View shows the following information for each Signal Group e The Signal Group Number e The Signal Group Description This is automatically generated by LinSig using information from the Lanes controlled by this Signal Group e The Signal Group Type The different Signal Group Types are explained in the SGroup View section e The Signal Group Minimum Green This shows the Minimum Green value for this Signal Group e Ped Protection Type For Signal Groups that offer pedestrian protection this shows the type of protection e Ped Protection Time For Signal Groups that offer timed pedestrian protection this shows the duration of timed protection e Ped Walk For Green For pedestrian Signal Groups this indicates if the Signal Group is configured as Walk For Green e Ped Walk Time For pedestrian Signal Groups the Walk Time e Ped Clearance 1 For pedestrian Signal Groups the Clearance 1 duration e Ped Clearance 2 For pedestrian Signal Groups the Clearance 2 duration e The Degree of Saturation The Degree of Saturation of the worst Lane controlled by the Signal Group e The Number of Runs This shows the number of times this Signal Group runs each
80. matrix and the Desired Flows OD matrix This should be checked and remedied either by reassigning the OD matrix or by manually editing Route flows Multiple Routes can have their permitted or locked status changed at once as follows e Select several Routes whilst holding down the Shift or Ctrl key e Click Allow Disallow Policy Selected Routes button to set the status of the selected Routes e Click Lock Unlock Selected Route Flows to lock or unlock the selected Routes e Click OK to save the permitted and locked status for the Routes The Route Filter The Route Filter allows the Route List to be filtered to show only Routes matching a filter criterion defined in the Route Filter This is useful with larger Networks which contain many Routes As well as showing only filtered Routes in the Route List the Network Layout View also highlights the currently filtered Routes Route List View Route Filter Reset Origin zone T Arm 13 2 Lane Al Contains Junc All Arm All Lane All Destination zone A Arm 31 4 Lane All im Traffic Mode A Pedestrian Mode All Junction Options for Journey Times and Delays Show Journey arier All Traffic id Show Non Permitted Routes Edit Permitted Routes Kii Route t Ong e Route 1 Joume Delay Total Total fone ane Fi ocked Route CU f JPEU f s DelayipcuHr Joumey pcuHr A 32 1 Ji 4 1 23 104 14 44 14 A B 2 J1 4 1 24 104 09 54 09 A Rou
81. number of Stops up and a value of less than 100 will factor the number of Stops down o Optimiser Delay Degree of Saturation Weighting This weight allows the Delay or Degree of Saturation calculated by the traffic model for this Lane to be factored up or down when used by the optimiser Delay is used when optimising for minimum delay and degree of saturation is used when optimising for maximum PRC A value of 100 will have no effect a value greater than 100 will factor the Delay or Degree of Saturation up and a value of less than 100 will factor the Delay or Degree of Saturation down o Degree of Saturation Limit The Degree of Saturation Limit prevents the optimiser from finding signal timings which produce a degree of saturation on a Lane which exceeds this limit This can be useful in prioritising the main road on an arterial corridor study Whether to include the effects of Stops in the optimiser and the valuation of Stops relative to delay are set in the Optimisation Settings dialog box e Random Delay On some Lanes the assumptions used on the level of Random Delay used by LinSig may be unrealistic for the particular conditions on the Lane The most common example is a signal roundabout circulatory Lane As the distance between an entry and circulatory stop line is often only a short length traffic platoons arriving at the circulatory stop line are often very regular and non random leading to an overestimation of Random Delay
82. of saturation on a Lane controlled by the Controller and is a measure of how much additional traffic could pass through a junction controlled by the Controller whilst maintaining a maximum degree of saturation of 90 on all Lanes Total Delay PCUHr This shows the total aggregate delay on all Lanes controlled by each Controller The following information is shown for the whole Network Total Delay for all Lanes PCUHTr This is the total delay for all Lanes in the Network including Exit Lanes This may differ from the sum of the total delay for each Controller if the Exit Lane s saturation flow is set too low and leads to delay on the Exit Lanes Practical Reserve Capacity PRC over All Lanes This is the PRC calculated from the Lane with the worst Degree of Saturation in the entire Network Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 21 Travel Time Delay Matrix View 225 4 21 Travel Time Delay Matrix View The Travel Time Delay Matrix View displays a matrix of average travel time between Zones in the model The View can be opened by choosing Travel Time Delay Matrix View from the Modelling menu Travel Time Delay Matrices A fo es Matrix Display Traffic Flows f Average Journey Time s Show Journey Time Delay Average Undelayed Time s incurred by Average Delay per PCU s All Traffic Copy To Clipboard The Travel Time Matrix shows journey times between Zones based on one of the following critera e Overa
83. once as a batch e Changing Signal Times using the Signal Timings View and Timing Dials The initial results displayed by LinSig will be calculated using an initial arbitrary set of Phase Lengths for each Controller The current Phase times being used can be displayed using the Signal Timings View which also shows the duration of Signal Groups and the structure of the Phase Running Intervals and Clearance Intervals Phase Lengths can easily be changed by dragging Phase Change Points with the mouse LinSig dynamically updates model results for the new Phase lengths as the times are changed Alternatively Timing Dials can be used to manipulate Phase Length directly from the Network Layout View e Checking for Errors using the Error View If Errors or Warnings exist in the Model an indicator on the Status Bar at the bottom of the LinSig main Window will indicate so The Error View can be opened by double clicking on the Error Indicator This View lists all Errors and Warnings and wherever possible indicates their location Errors prevent the model from calculating results Warnings allow results to be calculated but indicate that LinSig thinks some data or setting may be dubious and needs checking Information Warnings are LinSig bringing your attention to something you need to be aware of e Signal Optimisation Signal Optimisation can be carried out to optimise signal timings for each Controller individually or to optimise the network as a whole Lin
84. or more straightforward as the delay based assignment considers the delay to ahead traffic in both Lanes and places just enough ahead traffic in the right Lane to give equal ahead delays in both Lanes Arm 1 London Road 4 Lane Allocation Assigned traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 289 7 1 8 Example 8 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple Flared Lanes In this example the right turning traffic has an exclusive right turn lane but this lane is a short lane This has been difficult to model in many signal design packages for some time including earlier versions of LinSig LinSig Version 3 allows the situation show below to be modelled more intuitively and with significantly better accuracy than previously possible EHE HE HEH HEH HE E EE Ahead EE Right Turn Mixed Ahead and Right Traffic in Multiple Lanes with flare The Lane structure used to model the above is a Arm 1 London Road i Some important points to note include e The left lane is assumed to be unaffected by the right turn and is therefore modelled as a separate Lane e The right turn Lane is modelled as a Short Lane This is different from LinSig 2 where this situation was modelled using a right turn bay with non blocking storage greater than the storage in front of the stop line e The right turn lane is modelled using the same settings as Example 7 but is created as a Short Lane
85. other cycles leaving a residual queue As the degree of saturation increases a higher proportion of cycles will result in a residual queue which will gradually accumulate over the modelled period As LinSig only models a single typical cycle it is unable to directly model this random effect LinSig therefore indirectly allows for this Random queuing using a standard formula to estimate the level of Random queuing on each Lane assuming random arrivals This is then added to the Uniform and Oversaturated Queues to give the Lane s Total Queue Although this technique allows the Lane to be modelled using a single typical cycle reducing the modelling load it can lead to inaccuracies in some cases for example when a Lane is in the middle of a dense network of closely spaced signal junctions arrivals will often be very tightly platooned and non random leading to an overestimate of Random Queuing This is especially apparent on Short Lanes which although highly saturated are completely coordinated with upstream Lanes for example a circulatory Lane on a signal roundabout Although the tight coordination allows all traffic through in the green time with no queuing the random delay predicts a queue even though the non random behaviour of traffic in this case means no Random Queuing would occur in practice LinSig therefore allows the Random Delay Queue calculation to be switched off on selected Lanes This should only be used in cases where it can be easily just
86. regions as well This dramatically reduces the number of Routes without necessarily reducing accuracy e f merging an existing LinSig 2 model it is recommended to first convert the existing model to LinSig 3 Although this is not absolutely necessary it simplifies the merging process by avoiding having to convert the model from LinSig 2 to LinSig 3 and merge all in the same step Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 244 View Reference e Where Networks being merged contain different Scenario s it is recommended that before importing each Network is first set up so that any Scenarios required in the merged model are present in all imported files and are given the same name e If a number of Matrix Based component Networks are being merged together by merging Zones as described below it is useful for all models to contain Turning Counts prior to merging This allows matrix estimation to be run on the combined model to estimate an improved matrix for the whole merged model If any component Networks do not include Turning Counts these can be calculated from Route Flows in the component model as detailed below in Re Estimating a Combined Matrix for Merged Matrix Based Networks 4 27 2 Importing a LinSig Network into an existing Model The process of importing a LinSig Network adds the new Network to the old Network as an isolated piece of Network It does not join the two Networks together This is carried separately as described below Network La
87. signal timings to achieve a specific result For example using the Timing Dials and graphs it is easy to manually coordinate Lanes to achieve front end or back end coordination and to monitor limit queues on specific Lanes Signal Offsets for a Controller can be changed as follows e Click on any Timing Dial phase change point handle and whilst holding the Shift key down drag with the mouse The Offset of the Controller relative to other Controllers will be changed without changing any Phase Lengths LinSig will update the other views with the new signal times Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 141 4 3 16 Displaying Lane Bandwidths on the Network Layout View Lane Bandwidths display the Tratfic Flows passing through a Network by using variable width bands on each Lane and Lane Connector where the width of the band is proportional to the traffic flow on the Lane or Connector Although useful in any size of Network the Bandwidths are particularly useful for larger networks with more complex flow patterns 3 Network Layout View A Lo es fo Sle eles aaaea OLS WAL SSS Shes elel AAE BIZ 2 SLES e blr S pod Find uncio gt Find Arm z mja as 23 2S f Es rr A A N a N ge nt fy sae eee ret 2 a o ____________ N N BA Arh J1 1 Main Road EB at Ped X S Arm J1 3 Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound ESSAI r 7 x a a T H Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Mai
88. so far within this optimisation Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 195 e Run Time Estimate LinSig provides an estimate of how long the optimisation will take to complete LinSig reviews this estimate as the optimisation runs so the remaining time estimate can go up or down during the optimisation e Keep Views Updated This setting causes LinSig Views to be updated during the optimisation process This provides feedback on what the optimiser is doing but will substantially slow down the optimiser e Abort with No Changes to this Scenario Clicking this button aborts the optimisation process with no changes to the Scenario s signal settings e Abort Keeping Progress so far Clicking this button aborts the optimisation process and sets the Scenario s signal settings to the best signal settings found so far during the optimisation process This option is useful if you feel the optimiser has achieved sufficient accuracy for your purposes and you don t wish it to run to completion 4 12 3 6 Controlling Batch Signal Time Optimisation in the Scenario View The Scenario View can be used to optimise signal times for a number of Scenarios at once This avoids having to optimise each Scenario individually by selecting each Scenario in turn before clicking the Optimise button on the main toolbar If desired each Scenario can still be optimised individually using Optimise Current Scenario for Delay PRC on the Optimiser
89. start and excessive number of OD movements in the Zone 4 13 5 Estimating an Origin Destination Matrix 4 13 5 1 Matrix Estimation Prerequisites LinSig can only estimate an origin destination matrix when the following prerequisites have been satisfied e A Traffic Flow Group has been created which will hold the new estimated matrix It will be necessary to create a Flow Group for each period for which a matrix is to be estimated For example the AM and PM Peak periods e Traffic Turning Counts have been entered in each Traffic Flow Group to be estimated for preferably all Junctions in the Network If any Junctions are omitted LinSig may be unable to estimate some movements in the matrix Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 203 Zone origin and destination totals have been specified for ALL Zones using the Matrix Estimation View A Scenario has been created based on the Traffic Flow Group containing the counts and a Network Control Plan which contains Signal Sequences for each Junction which are as near as possible to the Signal Sequences running when counts were made This can be difficult as signal information is not often recorded at the time of a count but a best estimate should be made Signal timings in the Scenario should be set to typical phase lengths and offsets at the time the Counts were carried out Again this information is not usually available so a best guess should be made The signal timings are
90. stop lines e Add Entry Arm Lanes On each Junction Entry Arm create additional long and Short Lanes to represent the Arm s Lane structure Remember that it is important to model the Lane structure as traffic uses road space which may not necessarily be the same as lane markings Newly created Lanes will not show Lane arrows at this point as no Lane Connectors have been added yet e Add Exit Arms Add Junction Exit Arms at the points where traffic leaves the Junction e Add Exit Arm Lanes On each Junction Exit Arm add any additional Lanes required Remember that Junction Exit Lanes are always Long Lanes and are used to structure the Network not to model capacity issues such as merges immediately after a Junction e Add Lane Connectors Lane Connectors define which traffic movements are allowed between Lanes on different Arms If the recommended Arm structure discussed later is used Lane Connectors within a Junction define which turning movements can take place from an Entry Lane to an Exit Lane at the same Junction Lane Connectors between Junctions specify which Lane changes can take place between junctions Lane Connectors are added in the Network Layout View by dragging with the mouse from one Lane to another Lane e Set Cruise Speeds Times on Lane Connectors For each Lane Connector set a cruise time or speed Where multiple Lane Connectors between Arms all have the same cruise time or speed they can be edited in one step by selecting a
91. stopped Use Maximum Aow while Giving Way Value f Use Lane Saturation Flow Value Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 11439 C Use Custom Value pcu Hr Opposing Lanes Al opposing To 6 1 Left Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 283 Points to note on the Movement tab include In this case there is only a single movement tab as all the traffic on the Lane turns right There is therefore only a single movement the right turn leaving the Lane The give way settings used are 1439 for the Maximum Flow when giving way sometimes known as the intercept and 1 09 for the Coefficient for each opposing movement These values are chosen to give a similar right turn give way capacity relationship as used in the Webster amp Cobbe method in LinSig V1 The Flow When Opposing Traffic is stopped section is set to Use Lane Saturation Flow Value This reflects the fact that in this case when the opposing traffic is clearly stopped for example when a right turn arrow is running traffic on the right turn will run at a much higher saturation flow equal to the Lane s main Saturation Flow specified on the Saturation Flow Data tab This is due to right turning traffic not needing to pause and check for oncoming traffic Clear Conflict times of 2 seconds have been entered for each of the Opposing Lanes As this Lane includes Storage in front of the sto
92. te er Show All Layers My for Flow Grou up 440 Showing Route Flows as well as Lane Based Flows As each Flow Group can potentially define both Lane Based Flows and Matrix Based Flows the Network Layout View can display Route Flows as well as Lane Based Flows when in Lane Based Flow Mode The Route Flows can be displayed by e Right clicking on the Network Layout View and choosing Show Route Flows in Lane Based Flow Entry Mode from the pop up menu e Choosing the Show Route Flows button from the Network Layout View s toolbar Route Flows are displayed prefix by R to distinguish them from Lane Based Flows As Route Flows are defined for a Scenario not a Flow Group Route Flows are only available if the selected Flow Group is used by the currently selected Scenario This ensures that only compatible Lane Based and Route Flows are displayed at any one time Displaying both Lane Based Flows and Route Based Flows is particularly useful when joining too different Network regions which define flows in different ways 4 3 9 4 Managing Lane Based Flows using Graphical Drag and Drop Lane Based Flows are edited graphically using Lane Based Flow Mode on the Network Layout View Lane Based Flow Mode can be entered by one of the following methods e Choosing the Lane Based Flow button from the Network Layout View s toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 110 View Reference aA fe ALAIZA AK AE Lane 6 Show A
93. the Actual Flows for all Scenarios e Actual Flow An Actual Flow is an origin destination flow that is aggregated from all Route Flows between two Zones Actual Flows may be different for each Scenario using the Flow Group due to differences in routing patterns in each Scenario e Difference Flows The Difference Flows are calculated as the difference between the Desired and Actual origin destination flows They provide a check on whether the Desired Flows Matrix has been correctly assigned to the Network with no missing or excess traffic due to Route Flow errors e Turning Count The traffic flow counted on a turning movement at a junction These are used to estimate a origin destination traffic matrix for the model e Controller A Controller represents a traffic signal controller A LinSig Network can contain several controllers with each controller controlling one or more junctions e Controller Set A group of Controllers all running at a common cycle time LinSig models full coordination between junctions controlled by Controllers in the same Controller Set e Signal Group A Signal Group in LinSig is the same definition as a traffic signal controller Signal Group which is a group of Signal heads all showing the same aspects to traffic or pedestrians e Phase A Phase in LinSig is the definition of a Phase that is a group of Signal Groups running together Although the Phases are numbered they do not have to be run in numerical
94. the Phase Change e To This indicates whether the Signal Group is running in the To Phase involved in the Phase Change e Overlap This indicates whether the Signal Group is set to overlap in the Clearance Period of the Phase Change This can be changed by clicking with the mouse and selecting either Yes No or Default from the drop list The default behaviour is for the Signal Group to overlap only if it runs in both Phases of the Phase Change Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 18 SGroup Data View 217 4 18 SGroup Data View The SGroup Data View shows information for each Signal Group on a single LinSig Controller in a tabular format The View can be opened by choosing SGroup Data View from the Controllers menu SGroup Data View H boa LO O I ie ae ee a a Name Description Type Time For Green Time Clearance 1 Clearance 2 Saturation Green London Road Ahead Right Traffic None 97 6 High Street Ahead Left Traffic None 214 3 2 Park Street Left Traffic None 0 33 3 59 Park Street Right Traffic Oo None 66 7 London Road Right Non UK Arrow Non UK Arrow Pedestrians across London Road Pedestrian Pedestrians across Park Street Left Turn Pedestrian Pedestrians across Park Street Right Turn Pedestrian Pedestrians across Park Street East side Pedestrian 51 7 None 4 0 0 1 O 0 0 4 0 0 1 2 3 4 3 6 7 8 9 10 0 0 CoMuMuUw wont Ss Ss O won wo Camm mM ss tt pa
95. the Phase Sequence View 4 3 13 5 Deleting a Phase Diagram A Phase Diagram can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Phase Diagram from the Phase Diagram pop out on the Network Menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 136 View Reference 4 3 14 Annotating the Network Layout View The Network Layout View can be annotated using Notes and Labels These are used as follows e Notes are used to place paragraphs of formatted text on the Network Layout View They can be formatted in any font size or colour and justification and are displayed in a coloured background rectangle They can be thought of as similar to Post It notes Notes can also be used on the SGroup View As well as static text Notes can contain dynamic fields which show current data from the model updating as the model changes e Labels are used to position single lines of text on the View at any angle They can also be displayed with any font size and colour This View Shows the Network Layout Note Showing Centered Text anor One Label Shown A Selected ae 4 3 14 1 Working with Notes on the Network Layout View and SGroup View Notes can be used anywhere on the Network Layout View or SGroup View as described below Adding Notes to the Junction Layout and SGroup View A Note is added to the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Note from the Notes pop out on the Network Menu e Click anywhere on the
96. the same geometry e Slope or Coefficient The Slope relates to the effect the opposing flow has on the capacity of the give way Lane If a give way Lanes capacity drops rapidly as its opposing flow increases the slope will be higher e Minimum Flow The minimum flow represents a minimum value that will be able to discharge regardless of the level of opposing flow This should only be used if it is felt that LinSig is underestimating the amount of traffic able to discharge under high levels of opposing flow LinSig uses the above relationship together with the flow on the opposing Lane in each time slice to model the capacity of the give way Lane in each time slice 3 3 1 1 Typical Values of Give Way Parameters Typical values of Slope and Intercept for common situations include Right turn at Signals Equivalent to Webster amp Cobbe 1439 1 09 The values for the right turn as signals are designed to give as close as possible correspondence with the Webster amp Cobbe give way model used in earlier versions of LinSig and generally accepted in the UK for many years 3 3 2 The LinSig Right Turn Model The majority of signal controlled junctions allow right turning traffic to turn in gaps across oncoming traffic when the signals are green However there are a number of additional issues to consider compared with a simple give way described above 3 3 2 1 Right Turn Capacity Components The capacity of a right turning traffic s
97. the upstream Junction to the downstream stop line e Custom Lane Length m By default a Lane Connector will use the Lane Length of its downstream Lane If necessary this setting can be used to override the Lane Length for this connector only This will most often be necessary for Lane Connectors within Junctions e Delay based Assignment Cruise Time Weighting s When using Delay Based Assignment the average journey time is compared for different routes This setting allows you to alter the cruise time on the connector in order that the Delay Based Assignment will consider routes through the connector as being quicker or slower than in actuality Enter a positive value to increase the cruise time by that number of seconds or a negative value to reduce the cruise time Note that this setting only affects the cruise time used during the Delay Based Assignment process and the modelled cruise time elsewhere will unaffected e Bus Modelling When modelling buses LinSig uses two settings instead of just a Cruise Time or Speed These are the mean time buses are stopped whilst using the Lane Connector and the Bus Cruise Speed on this Lane Connector e Platoon Dispersion Tick the Platoon Dispersion box to model platoon dispersion on the Lane Connector A Platoon Dispersion Coefficient can also be entered but should be left at its default of 35 unless detailed site data suggests otherwise For very Short Lanes such as occur on a signal roundabout
98. tick columns in the Select Columns dialog box as appropriate e Select a column and click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of columns e Click OK to finish customising the columns After the columns have been customised the set of columns can be saved as described above so they can be quickly redisplayed if any changes are made to columns If necessary columns can be reset to default selection and order by right clicking on the column headers and choosing Reset to Default Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 222 View Reference Show Full or Abbreviated Columns Heading LinSig can show either full or abbreviated headings for each column show in the Results List The full headings provide a clearer explanation of what each column shows but take up a lot of space The abbreviated headings are much more concise but can also be a little cryptic for new users It is suggested that abbreviated headings are used most of the time switching to full headings if you aren t sure what a column is To switch between full and abbreviated headings Right Click on the Results List column headings and choose Show Full Headings or Show Abbreviated Headings from the pop up menu Available Data Columns in the Network Results View The Data Columns available are Item The number or name of the Lane or other ltem for which results are being shown Item Description A longer name or description of the Item Lane Type The T
99. unrealistic rests as it should do with the engineer and care should be taken not to use the De Sliver Mechanism to unjustifiably fiddle queue lengths If a Lane has had a De Sliver Threshold value set it will be shown in the Network Layout View with a blue indicator at the front of the Lane Arm J2 1 Main Roa De Sliver Indicator Entry Profiles The Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting is used when joining two Network regions The boundary between two Matrix Based Network regions is shown below Similar principles apply when joining a Matrix Based region to a Lane Based region Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane set on these Lanes A FE Traffic Starts or ends in Fones at H each side of boundBry l d x X gt S 650 tS S NS ha These Lane Connectors do not 1 carry traffic between A Inherit Cyclic Profile from Network regions G Upstream Exit Lane set on these Lanes Network Region 2 Network Region 1 At the boundary of two Network regions where either region is Matrix Based Zones model traffic starting or terminating at the region boundary when in reality the traffic is crossing the region boundary Zones at each side of the boundary exist only to support the splitting of the model into regions This allows routes within each region to be modelled while avoiding having to model routes between regions Normally traffic entering a Lane from a
100. used when optimising for Practical Reserve Capacity PRC LinSig will increase the degree of saturation of the Lane as seen by the optimiser when a Lane s queue exceeds the Excess Queue Limit on the Lane When this occurs LinSig biases the optimiser to attempt to reduce the real degree of saturation on the Lane more than it otherwise would This has the effect of reducing the queue on the Lane LinSig increases the degree of saturation by the Degree of Saturation Weighting multiplied by the average queuing exceeding the Excess Queue Limit A higher value will cause the optimiser to be more aggressive in reducing the queue Too high a value however may prevent the optimiser from finding optimal signal settings It is recommended to experiment with different values for each model o Delay Weighting pcuHr The delay weighting serves the same purpose as the Degree of Saturation Weighting but is used when optimising for minimum delay Again a higher value will cause the optimiser to reduce queues more aggressively e Optimiser Weightings The Optimiser weightings allow aspects of a Lane s importance to be increased or decreased causing the optimiser to find different timings The two weights available include o Optimiser Stops Weighting This weight allows the Stops calculated by the traffic model for this Lane to be factored up or down when used by the optimiser A value of 100 will have no effect a value greater than 100 will factor the
101. used by LinSig to display an aerial view of the Network s area using Google Maps 4 3 3 1 Displaying the Junction in Google Maps If you have access to Google Maps from your computer LinSig can display Maps and or aerial photography of the area around the Network by choosing Google Maps from the Network menu This will open Google Maps in your default browser and jump to the location specified in the Network Information dialog box Please note that JCT are not responsible for the availability of this service and Google in no way endorses LinSig Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 62 View Reference 4 3 4 Working with Junctions A LinSig Junction is a grouping of Arms Lanes and other items which are associated with a real junction It is used to graphically manipulate these items as a group and to structure and display results and other junction related information Network Layout View sa o E m w sB allal B42 2 218 siel HE SRS S S Ele lala Find Junction Find Arm m g Layer Filter ne ____ rO Arm amp Arm 4 4 H Ul _ _ 2Sas i m ee e Arm 1 London Road a f A a Arm 2 High Street A e m I i x High St London Rd Park St PRC 56 7 Total Traffic Delay 133 6 pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 77 2 s Ped Level Of Semice F SCATS Site Num 1032 I DJ U rat o T Junction Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All Lane Al Contai
102. whether each Lane would be better modelled with more specific settings e Separate Streams to new Controllers LinSig 2 could only model a single Controller To model multi junction Networks in LinSig 2 multiple Phase Streams were often used as a compromise alternative to multi Controllers As LinSig 3 fully supports multi Controllers Phase Streams should be moved from the LinSig 2 multi Stream single Controller to new Controllers in LinSig 3 to reflect how the Network is signalled in reality e Reassign Flows to Network When any Network modifications are complete the Origin Destination Matrix should be assigned to the Network to produce Route and Lane flows e Check Route Flows Use the Route List View to review the Route Flows e Check Lane Flows Use the Network Layout View to review the Lane Flows calculated from the Route Flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 14 LinSig Basics Save the File in LinSig Version 3 format 2 2 5 Importing and Merging LinSig Files As well as allowing Networks to be built from scratch LinSig 3 allows Networks to be built up by merging together existing LinSig files into one larger Network model This process is carried out in several stages These are Create a base model file Import an existing LinSig file containing a Network region to be added to the base Network into the base model This will be imported as a separate Network region Join Network regions together either by merging Zones
103. which LinSig thinks is the best place to fix the error As some errors have complex causes LinSig can not always work out the best location to fix the error for all errors but can usually do so for the most common ones 4 26 1 2 Hiding Warnings and Information Entries In a larger model a number of warnings and Information Entries may accumulate which after investigation are determined to be irrelevant or inconsequential to a model These warnings can be hidden to keep the Error List tidy and avoid missing other more important errors Full Errors always indicate that something serious is wrong and cannot be hidden Hiding an Individual Warning An individual Warning or Information Entry can be hidden by selecting the Warning in the Error List and clicking the Hide this Item in the Error View s toolbar If desired a comment can be added to the Warning to record why the warning was hidden Hiding all Warnings of a Type All Warnings of a particular type can be hidden by selecting a Warning of the type to be hidden in the Error List and clicking the Hide this type of Warning button on the Error View s toolbar Showing Hidden Warnings Warnings which have been previously hidden can be shown by clicking on the Show Suppressed Warnings button in the Error View s toolbar Un Hiding a Previously Hidden Warning A Warning which has previously hidden can be unhidden by displaying hidden warnings in the Error List selecting t
104. whole Modelling a Network with multiple regions using different flows types requires a good understanding on modelling techniques such as traffic assignment matrix estimation routing etc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 30 LinSig Basics Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 31 3 Essential Background This section looks at some aspects of the modelling in LinSig in more detail and provides background in a number of areas 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model LinSig uses Cyclic Flow Profiles CFP to model traffic moving through the Network This section explains the theory underlying Cyclic Flow Profiles and how they are used to calculate queues and delays The concept of using Cyclic Flow profiles to model traffic behaviour is often misunderstood and assumed to be far more complex than it actually is Although the model incorporates many details which allows it to model more complex situations with greater accuracy the underlying concept is relatively straightforward 3 1 1 1 Model Structure A fundamental feature of the model is to represent traffic flowing along a section of road as a Lane or Lane Group Each Lane represents a single independent stream of traffic travelling between two junctions A Lane Group represents a Long and Short Lane which interact and potentially block each other and is modelled as a group of interacting Lane Segments For a basic Lane traffic enters at its upstream end from other Lane
105. with each Print Zone corresponding to a Printed Page 6 1 1 1 Creating Print Zones All creation and editing of Print Zones is carried out with the View in Print Layout Mode This special mode allows Print Zones to be created and edited but does not allow changes to be made to the Network e To switch a View into Print Layout Mode choose Print Layout from the File menu and choose Print Layout Mode from the pop out menu Print Layout Mode can be switched off at any point by choosing Print Layout Mode again Alternatively the Print Layout button on the View s toolbar can be used A new Print Zone Printable Page can be created as follows e On the File menu pop out the Print Layout menu and choose Create a new Print Page from the pop out menu e The Print Page Settings dialog box will appear This allows settings relating to scaling and layout of the print page to be changed These can be changed at any point so for now click OK to accept the defaults e A light grey rectangle is displayed indicating the current extents of the Print Zone corresponding to the new page The Print Zone can be repositioned and resized using the mouse 6 1 1 2 Editing Print Zones Print Zone Settings are edited using the Print Page Layout dialog box This can be opened by selecting a Print Zone and choosing Edit Print Zone from the Print Layout pop out menu The settings for each page are independent of the settings for oth
106. 0 85 90 Time in cycle sec The Signal Timings Panel shows the following e Signal Group Bars Each traffic signal Group is represented as a bar showing the times when the Signal Group is running Signal Group Bars are displayed as follows o Coloured by Signal Group Type using the same colours as the SGroup View o Displayed in red if abnormally the Signal Group Minimum is being violated LinSig will normally prevent this but some obscure uncommon scenarios can cause a Signal Group Minimum to be violated LinSig will also include an error message in the Error View and tratfic model results will not be available o Shaded by intensity of Outflow controlled by the Signal Group Right Click on the Signal Timings Panel and choose Show Out Flow to select this Signal Group bar display mode LinSig will shade the Signal Group bar in proportion to the level of traffic flow crossing the stop line If the most saturated Lane controlled by the Signal Group is at Saturation the Signal Group bar will be 100 shaded If however no flow is crossing the stop line the Signal Group bar will be shown transparent This display allows a rapid assessment to be made of the efficiency of green time use e Phases Each Traffic Signal Phase is displayed using a blue cursor above the main Signal Group Bars area to show each Phase Change point The exact time of the Phase Change Point is shown above the Phase Change Point Cursor Phase Change points can be
107. 1 Managing Counts using the Matrix Estimation View Count List The Count List can be used to enter and delete counts for the Current Scenario s Traffic Flow Group Movements for which no Count is defined are still shown in the Count list but obviously have no count value A value of zero should not be used for non existent Counts as this would imply the Count has been observed to have zero PCU rather than not observed at all Entering or Editing a Count A Count can be edited in the Count List by clicking on the Count s value and entering a new value in PCUs Deleting a Count A Count s value can be deleted by right clicking with the mouse and choosing Delete Count Any implied Zone totals which are no longer fully specified will be removed from the Zone totals panel If new Counts which are to be added will not re specify the Zone total a Zone total should be manually entered as detailed below Importing and exporting Count values Counts can be Imported and Exported to a CSV file This allows the Count values to be manipulated outside of LinSig and then subsequently imported into LinSig CSV files can be edited using a simple text editor or alternatively can be edited using spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel The format of the CSV file is straightforward Each line in the CSV file corresponds to a single Count value The first value in the line is the value of the Count in PCUs The Subsequent values in the line are t
108. 1 Selecting the Current Controller LinSig will use the Current Controller in a number of Views to determine which Controller to display information for The Current Controller can be selected in either of the following ways e Select the Current Controller from the Controller drop down list in the main LinSig toolbar e Select the Current Controller by clicking on a Controller in the Controller List View e Right clicking on a Junction in the Network Layout View and choosing Make this Junctions Controller the Current Controller 4 6 3 2 Creating New Controllers A new LinSig Network always includes an initial single Controller in the default Controller set Additional Controllers can be created as follows e Right Click the Controller Set where the new Controller is to be added and choose Add New Controller to this Controller Set from the pop up menu e Anew Controller will be created and the Edit Controller dialog box opens allowing the Controllers initial settings to be made Edit Controller Controller Number Type Name oh 1 SCATS Based West Controller SGroup minimum type Allow multiple Phase Streams Allow non standard UK Filter Arrows Notes Controller Set Default Controller Set SCATS Daisy Chain Offset Master None e Controller Settings which can be changed are Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 O Controller Number The Controller Number is LinSig s reference number for the
109. 1 0 2 1 Main Road Westbound Left U Ci 63 120 1800 768 156 12 Fo D 43 Jl Ped Crossing 49 0 0 0 01 1 1 Main Road EB at Ped X Ahead U 87 1800 1800 48 0 0 11 0 0 1 2 Main Road EB at Ped X Ahead U 43 1800 1800 24 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 1 Main Road Westbound Ahead U 89 1800 1800 49 0 0 11 0 0 Ped Link P1 Ped1 0 70 20000 0 2 Inf Inf Inf C1 West Controller PRC for Signalled Lanes 107 4 Total Delay for Signalled Lanes pcuHr 5 08 150 C2 East Controller PRC for Signalled Lanes 88 3 Total Delay for Signalled Lanes pcuHr 5 78 150 PRC Over All Lanes 88 3 Total Delay Over All Lanes pcuHr 11 05 Cycle Time s The Network Results View is divided into three main areas These are e Display Settings This allows settings to be made governing the way the Network Results View displays the results e The Results List This lists each Item for which data can be displayed showing a range of relevant data columns for each Item The list is a hierarchal list allowing which Items are to be displayed and the level of detail to show to be easily controlled The following Items can be shown in the list Network Aggregate performance statistics for the entire Network Junctions Aggregate Performance statistics for each Junction Lanes Performance statistics for individual signal or give way controlled traffic Lanes Short Lanes are shown grouped with their assoc
110. 1 5 cars Compared with an ordinary signal group such as a fully signalled right turn there is an additional capacity of 1 5 PCUs per cycle which is half the number of right turners waiting in front of the stop line corresponding to the default value of the right turn factor of 0 5 Bonus Capacity Junction Storage x Right Turn Factor In extreme cases it is possible that no movement across the stop line can take place at all during the green arrow period If the right turn storage for example is 5 cars and a minimum arrow time of 4 seconds is in operation then the end of green will have occurred before the fifth car moves off from its waiting position just in front of the stop line In such cases there may be little point in providing a right turn arrow With LinSig it is easy to try out sequences with or without a green arrow and to examine the effect of re locating the stop line so as to alter the number of right turners able to wait in front of it When using other computer or manual methods of calculation the above effect is not normally recognised and the situation is treated as if no right turners were allowed to wait in front of the stop line LinSig will therefore calculate shorter green arrow times than other methods The validity of this can easily be confirmed by observations of traffic behaviour at existing signals in your area The default value of Right Turn Factor is 0 5 It is unusual to have to change this value but if a change i
111. 1 cisi Trafic Det postr a lier 7 2 Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All yv Lane All vf Contains Junc All Arm All v Lane All w Destination Zone All Arm All v Lane e The Lane Connectors are coloured red or green depending on whether a movement is allowed at the current point in the cycle e Any graphs appearing on the Network Layout View display a time cursor at the current point in the cycle e Queues at the current point of the cycle are shown as a bar overlaid on the Lanes The length of the bar is scaled in one of two ways o The queue is scaled so that when the queue is 100 of the Lanes true length it is shown as 100 of the Lane s graphical length o The queue is scaled so that queues on all Lanes are scaled the same but queue length shown does correspond to the Lanes graphical length Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 258 View Reference 4 29 3 Viewing Animation in the SGroup View The SGroup View displays the Signal Groups configured in the Controller When animation is active the Signal Groups are shown as red or green depending on whether they are running or not at the current point in the cycle shown on the Animation Control Toolbar 4 29 4 Viewing Animation in the Phase Sequence View The Phasing Plan View highlights the Phase running for each Controller at the current animation time displayed in the Animation Control Toolbar lf the current animation time falls in the cle
112. 13 4 28 SCATS Flow Data Import 251 4 28 SCATS Flow Data Import The SCATS Traffic Reporter software is able to provide data files containing recorded traffic volumes for the intersections within a region The LinSig SCATS Flow Data Import functionality allows traffic volume data from these data files to be imported into Lane Based stop line flows in a LinSig model The process of importing SCATS Flow Data into LinSig is as follows e Prepare LinSig model This involves specifying SCATS detector numbers and intersection numbers for the lanes and junctions into which flows will be imported e Run the SCATS Flow Data Import Wizard This allows you to specify which data files to use and which Junctions and Flow Groups to import flow data into It then imports the data as Lane Based stop line flows e Specify turning proportions Traffic volumes are only imported into Lane Based stop line flows and no Connector flows will have been imported It is necessary to manually enter the turning proportions either as PCU value or as percentages 4 28 1 Input Data Files The SCATS Traffic Reporter software is able to provide data in various formats In order to be imported the data must be in a dump file format that contains traffic volume data for a whole region over a one day period The following snippet from the start of one of these files shows what the format looks like Tratfic Flow filename Reqgion 20111206 t
113. 150 both incoming and outgoing for this layer Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to edit flows on the layers for this lane Uniform Flow 9 Total entering downstream flow 150 Tin Hiren tes ar Lara Galion allows you to move the flow data on this Apparent flow loss 0 Flow from this lane leaving network 0 SERE HEP ROY E Normally the graphical method will be used to enter the majority of traffic flow information with the Edit Lane dialog box being used to drill down and adjust detail where necessary Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 106 View Reference 4 3 9 2 Using Lane Based Flow Layers Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to separate out different traffic tyoes or movements in a Network or region of Network defined using Lane Based Flows For example bus traffic or traffic between two points in the Network can be separated out LinSig models each Layer separately whilst allowing for interaction between traffic in each Layer If multiple Layers are used Traffic Flows are entered separated into Layers Bus Layer General Traffic Layer 20 150 40 150 a Arm J1 3 Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound x SS a Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Each of the above entry methods support Lane Based Flow Layers If it is not required to disaggregate Lane Based traffic flows in any way it is unnecessary to use multiple Lane Based Flow Layers and the default General Traffic Layer provided can be used
114. 2 1 1 Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Groupi AM Peak Lane Based Flows LL 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode To This Lane When enabled this allows LEa E jo m viewing and direct editing of ee lane flows using drag and drop Incoming Flows Outgoing Flaws in the Network Layout View BE Flows General Traffic se going BE Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead 31 3 1 Ahead J2 4 1 Ahead Totalincaming 0 Total outgoing 100 Consistency Check This page displays the total Lane Based Total Flow 100 Total incomin o Flows for all layers Each layer on this lane can be edited individually by selecting the Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 Sail Seas ae TE A by Tl i el i i i Apparent fow loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network 0 rae sony ea RE Lame L iiidh lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Summary Information displayed on this tab but not available for editing includes e Total Flow PCU The Total Flow is the total flow of traffic across the downstream stop line of this Lane summed over all Flow Layers on the Lane e Uniform Flow PCU The Uniform Flow displays the total Uniform Flow summed over all Flow Layers on the Lane e Incoming Flows PCU The Incoming Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors entering the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector summed over all Flow Layers e Outgoing Flows P
115. 31 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LINSIQ cccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 39 3 2 1 Background and Version Differences cccccccseecceeeceeeeseeesaeeeseeeeaeeeseueeseeeeaes 39 3 2 2 FIOW Definition Methods niesiona a a gavels 39 3 2 3 Using both Matrix Based and Lane Based Methods in the same Model 42 Io GIVE WV AY Lane So IWIN S Oarra cera s a a tien Gach dee latategae 44 3 3 1 The LinSig Give Way Model cccccsecccecesecesseecceeecceeessaesceeesaeeecsaeseeeesaeeeees 44 320 2 TNE LINSIG Right Tum MOOG sist2 csxcerss sec nissd sec dend a a ara 45 4 View Reference Qu ccceceecececeecececeeeeceeeseecuenseeeueuseesueuseeeususaueesuenseesueaees 49 AA General View Features ana E T a N 51 A Ng AWAY SOU TOD se 51 41 2 Zoom and Fanes a n a a a 51 4 1 3 Defaults Colours and Visual Settings ccccceeccssseeesseeeseseeenseeeseseesnseseseeeeess 52 4 2 Using Internationa OPIONS criin Sie ndcisiestiel cists iets 53 4 2 1 Using Drive on the Right for Graphical Views cccccseeecsseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeess 53 4 2 2 Using SCATS Based TerminOlogy ccccsscccsecceeeeceeeeneeeceueesseeeseeesaueeneeesees 53 4 3 Network Layout VIEW sperei oats iadaunetaaamcdsia bans e eahab era stia bees evhas ea ea baat eva eunls 57 4 3 1 Network Building OVervieW cccccccseccssceceeeeceeeceeseueeceueeseeceusessueeseessueeseeesees 57 43 2 LINGIG
116. 34 View Reference 4 25 3 Flow Profile Graphs The Flow Profile Graphs show the traffic flow into and out of a Lane over a typical signal cycle As LinSig assumes all traffic queues vertically at the stop line rather than spread out along the Lane all flows relate to traffic crossing the stop line as opposed to joining or leaving the queue somewhere along the Lane Flow Profile Graphs can be shown for the following items Long Lane A Flow Profile Graph for a simple Long Lane with no associated Short Lane shows traffic entering and leaving the Lane over the stop line Combined Lane Group When a Long Lane has an associated Short Lane the two Lanes are modelled as a combined pair to allow all the blocking and interaction between the two Lanes to be modelled The Combined Lane Group graph shows the inflow and outflow of traffic over the stop line for the combined pair of Lanes If necessary individual OD movements can be shown as described below Long Lane within a Long Lane Short Lane Group This graph shows the traffic entering and leaving the Long Lane of a Lane Group in front of the point where traffic Splits into the Short Lane This graph takes into account whether traffic queuing in the Short Lane prevents traffic from entering the section of the Long Lane in front of the split point Short Lane This graph shows the traffic entering and leaving the Short Lane in a Lane Group Similar to above this graph takes into account whether traff
117. 4 36 48 60 f2 84 12 Lane 1 2 Flows ggg 600 300 0 0 12 24 36 46 60 72 484 Ht fo e e Lane 1 1 Queue HAATATHNNTUATTTNAL 24 36 48 F Lane 1 2 Storage In Front 4 25 1 Creating Graphs and Controlling their Layout The Flow Profile View allows graphs to be laid out in a rectangular grid This creates flexibility in setting graphs out in sequence horizontally or vertically for example to follow a Route or corridor Creating Flow Profile Graphs Flow Profile Graphs can be added to the Flow Profile View as follows e Right click on the Flow Profile View with the mouse e Choose Add Graph for Lane from the pop up menu and select the Lane to be graphed and the Graph Type as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 25 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 233 e The new graph will be added to the Cyclic Flow Profiles View and can be repositioned as desired as described below e Alternatively choosing Add Graphs for Route from the pop up menu adds a series of graphs in sequence for the Lanes along a LinSig Route Selecting a Graph A graph can be selected by clicking it with the mouse The graph will be highlighted with a red border indicating it is selected Repositioning Graphs A graph can be repositioned in the Flow Profile View by selecting it with the mouse and dragging it into a new position A solid red line will indicate the new position where the graph will be move to
118. 48 View Reference Merging Zones with manual specification of Lane Connectors By default the Zone Merge Wizard will automatically create new Lane Connectors to replace the merged Zones Where the Arms have multiple lanes it may be preferable to be able to manually specify how the lanes move from Arm to Arm and whether any weaving is required This can be achieved by adding the Lane Connectors prior to starting the Zone Merge Wizard The Zone Merge Wizard will only add new Lane Connectors to Lanes that do not already have a Lane Connector added Re Estimating a Combined Matrix for Merged Matrix Based Networks After importing and merging Networks an improved matrix can sometimes be obtained by using matrix estimation to re estimate a combined matrix for the whole of the merged Network lf the imported Networks all contain Turning Counts this is relatively easy to carry out If however the original component Networks were all simple possibly just single Junctions they may not contain Turning Counts This would require Turning Counts to be entered for all Junctions in the merged Network before matrix estimation could be carried out LinSig 3 1 and above avoids having to enter Turning Counts by providing a method to create Turning Counts from an existing Scenario s traffic flows These Turning Counts can then be used to re estimate the matrix for the merged model For each of the component Networks prior to importing into the merged model c
119. 8 799 45 77 J3 33 2 J25 97 96 01 70 01 1 89 2 59 32 40 1 80 4 25 4 Uniform Queue Graphs Uniform Queue Graphs show the Uniform Queue on a Lane over a typical signal cycle It is important to understand that the graphs show only the Uniform Queue and do not include the random and oversaturated queue components which are calculated separately not by the flow profiles More information on the different queues and delays types is given in the modelling section Uniform Queue Graphs can be shown for the following items e Long Lane A Uniform Queue Graph for a simple Long Lane with no associated Short Lane shows how traffic queues on the Lane e Combined Lane Group When a Long Lane has an associated Short Lane the two Lanes are modelled as a combined pair to allow all the blocking and interaction between the two Lanes to be modelled The Combined Lane Group Uniform Queue graph shows how traffic queues on the combined Lane Group as a whole Uniform Queue Graphs cannot be shown for Short Lanes or Long Lanes within a Lane Group Storage Graphs as described below serve a similar purpose Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 25 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 239 Uniform queue graphs show the following information Link 8 1 Queue clears as front of queue catches up back of i queue 4 A 4 Back of queue building at arrival rate Flow Front of queue 1 discharging at 1 saturation flow rate 0 12 24 36 8 w 60 T2 84 T
120. Activation Code provided from the old PC Click Continue LinSig should now report that the new PC has been successfully activated and provide details of the activated licence Check that the licence details are as expected LinSig is now correctly licensed on the new PC A 4 3 Product Activation for Unlimited Networked PC Licences For users with Unlimited Networked PC Licences UNPCL it is not necessary to activate each PC individually instead workstations obtain a licence from a central licence server which authorises them to run LinSig This benefits users by removing the need to handle large lists of Installation IDs and Activation codes and also avoids the security risk of JCT handing out a potentially unlimited number of individual PC activations for LinSig which may inadvertently migrate away from the licensed site A 4 3 1 Installing LinSig on Workstations LinSig is installed on each workstation the same way as for non networked installations as detailed above in Installing LinSig However Product Activation does NOT need to be carried out on each Workstation If desired the LinSig CD may be copied to a networked server and LinSig installed over the network however setup must be run on each Workstation whether locally or using a remote installation system such as SMS A 4 3 2 Installing and Activating the Licence Server The Licence Server installation files are located in the LicServer folder on the LinSi
121. Allocate option is selected in the Traffic Flows View LinSig will attempt to automatically assign the OD Matrix to Routes as they are entered Check Route Flows Use the Route List View to review the Route Flows Check Lane Flows Use the Network Layout View to review the Lane Flows calculated from the Route Flows Save the File in LinSig Version 3 format 2 2 4 2 Loading and Converting a LinSig 2 file to LinSig 3 format LinSig 3 can load amp convert an existing LinSig 2 file simply by opening the file within LinSig 3 LinSig will detect that the file is a LinSig 2 file and use the information in the old file Essential new information which LinSig 2 files do not contain includes Junctions Junctions were called Arm Groups and were optional in LinSig 2 LinSig 3 will use Arm Groups if available attaching all previously unattached Arms to a new Single Junction Lane based Control Information Controlling traffic signal Signal Groups were set by Link in LinSig 2 Lane by Lane Connectors LinSig uses a Lane Connector for each Lane LinSig 2 multi lane Links will require new Lane Connectors creating for each Lane in LinSig 3 The above information must be added to a LinSig 2 file after loading into LinSig 3 before results can be obtained It is suggested the following sequence is followed after opening a LinSig 2 file Further details on how to carry out each step are available from the Views Reference section Check Loaded Lin
122. CU The Outgoing Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors leaving the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector summed over all Flow Layers Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 120 View Reference Consistency Check The consistency check table provides various totals of flows entering and leaving the Lane providing a quick check for flow consistency The Flow Consistency Mode of the Network Layout View provides a much more comprehensive graphical check of flow consistency The settings available on this tab are Selected Flow Group The Selected Flow Group sets which Traffic Flow Group is displayed in the Lane Edit dialog boxes Lane Based Flow tabs This setting is the same as the Selected Flow Group Setting on the Network Layout View s toolbar It is provided here for convenience as it allows Flow Groups to be changed without closing the dialog box Manage Layers Available to This Lane This setting opens a dialog box which can be used to select which Lane Based Flow Layers are used on the Lane E Manage lane layers If 1 BilGeneral Traffic I 2 B Buses Select the layers to use on this lane and un select those layers that you no longer wish to use on this lane Cancel The dialog lists all available Flow Layers showing the Layers available ticked Layers can be ticked or unticked to make them available or remove them from the Lane If a Layer is removed from a Lane all Lane Based Flows on that Layer are deleted When editing f
123. Control Plans View click on the Phase Sequence name for any Controller e Click on the edit button which appears to the right of the Phase Sequence name This drops down a Phase Sequence List which lists all available Phase Sequences for this Controller Network Control Plans View No Network Control Plan Network Control Plan All Stages at all Junctions 1 All Stages at all Junctions Controller Sequence Name 2 With Ped All Reds at all Junctions y _ West Controller All Stages 1 1 2 3 S2 1 2 C2 East Controller All Stages 1 2 3 4 All Stages 1 1 2 3 52 1 2 Edit Stage Sequence for Controller in Network Control Plan e Select a Phase Sequence from the drop down list This is the Phase Sequence which LinSig will run for this Controller when this Network Control Plan is used in a Scenario Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 183 4 12 Scenario View The Scenario View allows Traffic Flow Groups and Network Control Plans to be associated together to define particular modelling scenarios Each Scenario brings together all the information needed for a single LinSig run This includes e Traffic Flow Group Specifies the traffic wishing to pass through the Network during the modelled period e Network Control Plan Specifies the signal phase order for each Controller in the Network e Cycle Times Specifies the cycle times at which Controllers will run Cycle times are managed using Controller Set
124. F SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE B 2 Info Zip http www info zip org LinSig uses an altered version of Info Zip s Zip Copyright c 1990 2009 Info ZIP All rights reserved For the purposes of this copyright and license Info ZIP is defined as the following set of individuals Mark Adler John Bush Karl Davis Harald Denker Jean Michel Dubois Jean loup Gailly Hunter Goatley Ed Gordon lan Gorman Chris Herborth Dirk Haase Greg Hartwig Robert Heath Jonathan Hudson Paul Kienitz David Kirschbaum Johnny Lee Onno van der Linden Igor Mandrichenko Steve P Miller Sergio Monesi Keith Owens George Petrov Greg Roelofs Kai Uwe Rommel Steve Salisbury Dave Smith Steven M Schweda Christian Spieler Cosmin Truta Antoine Verheijen Paul von Behren Rich Wales Mike White This software is provided as is without warranty of any kind express or implied In no event shall Info ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 302 Examples Permission is granted to anyone to use this soft
125. Hide Back To Top liae Arm Right turn storage in front of Max turners in intergreen Non blocking storage Right Turn Move Right Turn Name stopline PCU PCU PCU p s Factor 1 2 London 2 0 2 0 4 0 5 x The Model Audit View displays e A toolbar which allows options to be set for the View e The main section showing Model input data and results tables for a single LinSig Scenario A Contents List at the top of the Model Audit lists all of the tables displayed Clicking on a table title in the Contents List jumps to the relevant table in the Model Audit View 4 22 1 1 Creating a Model Audit To create a standard Model Audit of the currently open LinSig model e Ensure Audit Current Scenario is selected in the Model Audit View s toolbar e Select the Scenario which you wish to Audit in the main LinSig toolbar e The Model Audit View will display auditing information for the selected Scenario 4 22 1 2 Refreshing the Model Audit View If the LinSig model is changed in any way the Model Audit View will be out of date The Audit View is not automatically updated each time the model changes but can be refreshed at any Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 22 Model Audit View 227 point by clicking Refresh on the Model Audit View toolbar A warning will be displayed in the Audit View toolbar whenever the View requires refreshing 4 22 1 3 Comparing Two Scenarios The Model Audit View can compare two LinSig Scenarios hig
126. If a User Name has been entered in Network Information on the Network menu it will be used as a default e Entered On The date and time the log entry was made This is automatically set from the system time when the log entry is made e Read Only After the file has been saved Audit History Log Items are read only and cannot be deleted or changed Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 230 View Reference 4 24 Cycle Time Optimisation View The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays a graph of Practical Reserve Capacity and Delay against the Network s cycle time This allows the effect of cycle time on the Network to be assessed and an appropriate cycle time chosen r ish Cycletime Optimisation Maximum Cycletime 120 Cydetime Label Interval 10 PRC Label Interval 10 Start v Allow selection of cycle time and signal timings from graph Only allow selection of cycle times V for which optimised timings have been calculated Cycle Time sec 4 24 1 1 Using the Cycle time Optimisation View The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays a graph of Practical Reserve Capacity PRC and Network Delay for the current Scenario with optimal Phase Lengths over a range of cycle times LinSig deliberately does not pick and suggest an optimal cycle time as it is far more appropriate for the engineer to decide the cycle time taking into account issues such as pedestrian safety and adjacent junctions as well as the cy
127. If the Signal Group controls any Lanes the signal group type cannot be altered LinSig shows the controlled Lanes which must be disconnected from this Signal Group before the Signal Group Type can be altered e Minimum Green Enter the Signal Group Minimum value This is typically used for Signal Groups that offer Pedestrian Protection and thus may start later in a Phase The Minimum Green value ensures that a Phase will not be allowed to terminate until the Signal Group has run its minimum e Walk for Green This is only valid for Pedestrian Signal Groups Select this tick box if the Pedestrian Signal Group operates as Walk for Green e Walk Time This is only valid for Pedestrian Signal Groups This specifies the length of Walk Time for a Pedestrian Signal Group e Clearance 1 This is only valid for Pedestrian Signal Groups This specifies the duration of the Clearance 1 period during which a Phase cannot terminate e Clearance 2 This is only valid for Pedestrian Signal Groups This specifies the duration of the Clearance 2 period during which the next Phase cannot start e Pedestrian Protection Type This specifies the level of Pedestrian Protection that this Signal Group offers to another Pedestrian Signal Group e Timed Protection For Pedestrian Protection types that require a timer value this specifies the timer value e Protected Pedestrian SGroup This specifies the Pedestrian Signal Group that will be protected by this Signal G
128. Junction J2 1 gt J2 5 152 150 1 01 T433 2 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J2 5 220 220 1 00 0 0 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt 1 3 447 450 0 99 CE eae Sa J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J2 4 367 250 1 47 319 11 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J1 3 220 200 1 10 91 J2 West Junction J2 4 gt J3 1 740 750 0 99 14 EW J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 5 424 450 0 94 tae EA J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 6 300 300 1 00 0 0 __J3 EastJunction ___ S sdd32 gt 34 3N 30 i 00 0 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 6 150 150 1 00 0 0 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 4 297 300 0 99 Dr J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 5 200 200 1 00 0 0 J3 East Junction J3 4 gt J2 2 670 670 1 00 0 0 For single Junctions and very simple Networks it will often be unnecessary to use matrix estimation as it will usually be possible to work out and enter an OD matrix by taking values directly from Junction Turning Counts This becomes increasingly complex for larger networks and is unfeasible for networks with 4 or more Junctions 4 13 1 Obtaining an Origin Destination Matrix The Origin Destination Matrix specified in each Traffic Flow Group when using Matrix Based Flows is a Critical part of a Matrix Based LinSig model or Matrix Based region of a larger model LinSig uses the detailed information contained in an OD matrix to model queues delays and capacities with significantly more accuracy than is possible with just Lane or turning flows The use of an OD matr
129. Lane Based Flow regions if Routes are required for calculating journey times e Use the Lane Based Flow Drag and Drop editing and the Edit Lane dialog box to define Lane Based Flows on all Lanes in the region Boundaries between Network Regions At a boundary between two regions where either of the regions is Matrix Based use the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting in the Edit Lane dialog s Advanced tab on Lanes being fed by Zones at the region boundary to ensure traffic crossing the region boundary is correctly profiled It is important to ensure that Lane Based Flow regions and Matrix Based regions only overlap if this is being deliberately modelled Where a Lane defines both Lane Based Flows and Matrix Based Flows LinSig will add these together to give a total Lane Flow This is sometimes useful in advanced situations but can be confusing and is best avoided Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 44 Essential Background 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig LinSig models two main types of Give Way Lane These are e Anun signalised Give Way Lane such as at a priority junction or a left slip e A Right Turn Lane which gives way to opposing traffic for part of its green period LinSig uses its give way model to model the first scenario and uses the give way model plus other Right Turn Model components to model the second scenario 3 3 1 The LinSig Give Way Model e The capacity of an un signalised Give Way Lane is mod
130. Lane Flow is clicked LinSig adds the 100 PCU to the Source Lane s Total Flow to give a new Total Flow of 300 PCU and adds 100 PCU to the Lane Connector and the Destination Lane s Total Flow Case 4 Single Flow Layer Splitting Existing Flows on Source Lane between Multiple Outgoing Lane Connectors Where a Source Lane has an existing Total Flow and multiple outgoing Connectors LinSig will assist with splitting the Source Lane s Total Flow between the outgoing Lane Connectors For a Lane with an existing Total Flow of 400 PCU it is desired to split this flow between two outgoing Lane Connectors with 300 on the first Lane Connector and 100 on the second Click on the 400 on Source Lane the traffic is leaving from Drag with the mouse to one of the Destination Lanes where traffic is moving to Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane LinSig does not know how much of the flow is to be allocated to the first Lane Connector so guesses that all of the 400 PCU will be used This is wrong in this case so instead of confirming the action Change Flow Details is chosen to open the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box In the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box change the flow from 400 PCU to the 300 PCU which is to be allocated to this Lane Connector As we are allocating flow rather than adding flow the option to add the flow to the Source Lane s Total Flow is not required as LinSig
131. Lanes This is normally sufficiently accurate however in Some more unusual situations or in cases where site conditions indicate this assumption is not correct it is possible to specify custom occupancies for each Short Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 77 In LinSig 2 it was possible to specify Expected Usage for a Short Lane This allowed situations such as short left turn only Lanes to be modelled more accurately by restricting the average expected usage of the Short Lane to a lower value than its physical length This was necessary in some case to reflect the fact that traffic in the Long Lane may prevent turning traffic from filling up the flare leading to partial flow starvation The external free tool LINSAT was often used to estimate the expected usage in many common situations LinSig 3 s new traffic model automatically takes into account many of the issues which previously required Expected Usages to be set however some flare modelling situations may still arise in which it is useful to be able to override the amount of traffic using the Short Lane LinSig 3 therefore allows custom occupancies to be set Where a custom occupancy is specified for a Lane it will be used instead of the Lane s physical length in all modelling Remember custom occupancy is NOT the same as Expected Usage in LinSig 2 The Lane s Default Short Lane Occupancy is used for all Flow Groups unless a custom value if specified for a part
132. MZID tinsctuetnau sats E bapraeed png dot bawroaaabuae Oa 301 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 1 1 What is LinSig 1 1 Introduction Welcome to the LinSig Version 3 User Guide This User Guide aims to provide you with detailed information on learning and using the software The User Guide is structured as follows 1 Introduction Provides an overview of the software improvements in the latest version and information on training and software support 2 LinSig Basics Provides preliminary information on a range of LinSig issues including important definitions a suggested sequence of working and a summary of the user interface It is suggested that as a minimum new users read this section before using LinSig For those users upgrading from earlier versions of LinSig this section is recommended as a concise introduction to the features that are new to LinSig Version 3 3 Essential Background Provides more in depth background on some of the most important LinSig modelling concepts 4 LinSig Views Reference Provides detailed information on each LinSig View and how to use it This section should be used both to gain detailed knowledge of LinSig and for quick reference to specific facts and details 5 Detailed Controller Background Provides further detail and background on some characteristics of traffic signal controllers relevant to LinSig 6 Reporting and Printing Describes how to produce reports and printed output from LinSig
133. NGIAGSGIOUD VIEW sarisin et eat aig eaten aiete edie A 166 4 7 3 Creating New Signal Groups cccccccssecceeeceeceeeeceeecceeeceuseseeeeeeeesseeeseeessaeess 166 A 1A COMING SION Al GlOUDS reas SEE 167 4 7 5 Using a Signal Group to Control Lanes ccccceccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeesaaees 168 4 7 6 Deleting Signal GiOUPS tivei sahevecesi erneiere i e 169 4 62 SOGOU CONCE Matix VIEW 4 024 5 225 35teio2 izes ai ied tila detielaeducislan ds iiel edaeisie tial 170 4 8 1 Selecting which Controller to View cccccceececeececeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeesaaess 170 4 8 2 Managing Signal Group Conflicts cc ccccccecceceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeesaaees 171 4 9 PRASE VOW oner farn ip E eA E EERE E EE T 172 4 9 1 Selecting which Controller to View cccccceecccseeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeseaes 172 4 9 2 NaASe VIEW AV OUN esisiini R 172 4 9 3 Selecting Phases and the Current Phaser ai da 173 4 9 4 Creating a New Phase cccccccceeecceeeceeeceseeceeceeeeceueeseeseuseseeeeeeesneesseessaeess 173 4 9 5 Changing the Phase Name ccccscccsececseeceeeceeseceeeeseeeceusesseeeeeeessueeseeessaeess 173 A960 INSCHING APNA S a sen teah tear vesstvas Saabs tnmabtvia seas a 174 4 9 7a Movi VASO ceci ee E E E 174 4 98 Deleng a PNA E ar a MereeeT reer Perr erre acrent Te rr errr acre etre ere ere 174 4 9 9 Running or Removing a Signal Group from a Phase c
134. Network Layout View to drop the new empty Note e Edit the Note s text as described below in Editing a Note Editing a Note The text of a Note can be edited as follows e Double click on a Note to open the Note Editor The Note Editor displays the Note s text if any and formatting options for the Note Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 137 Note Editor e Enter the Note s text e Click OK to save the Note s text Inserting a Dynamic Field in a Note A dynamic field can be inserted in a Note as follows e Open the Note for editing as described above e Click on the Add Field toolbar button This opens the Add Field dialog box as shown below Add Field e Select the data type and Lane for the field Currently only Lane based data can be shown Also results for a combined long and Short Lane Group are shown on the Long Lane e Click OK This will insert a field code into the Note e Continue editing the Note or click OK to save the Note e LinSig will replace the field code with the appropriate data e f desired field codes can be typed directly into the Note Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 138 View Reference Formatting a Note The Note Editor allows the font colour and size of text to be set for individual paragraphs words and characters as well as the Note as a whole To change the formatting of all or part of the Note e Select the text you wish to change the for
135. Next gt gt Cancel Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 82 View Reference The MultiLane tab has two independent sections e The Number of Lanes This section simply allows the number of Lanes the MultiLane represents to be entered A saturation flow consistent with the number of lanes represented should be entered on the Saturation Flow tab as described above e Additional Short Lanes This section allows additional short lanes to be modelled using a stepped saturation flow profile similar to how short lanes were modelled in LinSig 2 MultiLane with Short Lane Arm 1 London Road The following information is required to define the additional short lanes within the MultiLane o A Saturation Flow for each additional short lane o Each additional short lane s expected usage in each Flow Group Ty Edit Lane 1 1 Multiple Lane Representation General Lane Details lf Enable Flared Saturation Flows Add Flare Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Number Of Lanes 2 Flare Saturation Flows PCU Hr Sat flow data Enter the number of lanes that this Flare 1 Advanced represents on the street Saturation Flow 1800 Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead A multijane represents a group of lanes that behave and will be modelled in an identical manner Flare Expected Usage pcu You must also ensure that the Saturation Scenario Flow and any give way parameters are 2006 AM Peak values that represent all lanes 2006 AM Peak No IGA
136. Offset Optimiser Groups Controllers can be managed into Offset Optimiser Groups as follows Controllers can be added to Offset Optimiser Groups by selecting the Controller in the Ungrouped Controllers Streams list and clicking the right arrow to move the Controller across to the right Groups list New Offset Optimiser Groups can be created by clicking Create Group This will create a new empty Offset Optimiser Group Controllers can be moved between Groups by clicking Up One Group or Down One Group as appropriate Controllers can be removed from a Group by selecting the Controller in the right Groups List and clicking the left arrow 4 12 3 5 Monitoring the Optimisers Progress For a small model the Optimiser runs almost instantaneously but for a larger or more complex model the optimiser may take from several seconds up to several tens of seconds to run with very large models taking up to a few minutes The progress of the optimiser can be monitored using the Optimiser Progress dialog box E Optimiser Progress scenario 1 Approx PRC 7 1 Approx Delay 356 7pcuHr Estimated 495 remaining Elapsed 22s Keep views updated during optimisation slower Abort with no changes to this scenario Abort keeping progress so far The Optimiser Progress dialog shows the following The Scenario Being Optimised The Best Results So Far The PRC and Network Delay for the best signal timings found
137. On Diagram Display Results Block on Diagram Display PCUs and Capacity Per Cycle 7 Display DeSliver on Lanes Display Lane Based Layer Key on Diagram Manage Lane Text Display Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 142 View Reference 4 3 16 2 Bandwidth Options A number of options are available to control the display of Bandwidths These include e Show Bandwidths Only Hide Decorations Choosing Show Bandwidths Only from the View Menu or ticking Hide Decorations on the Network Layout View s toolbar hides the display of Lanes in Bandwidth Mode This sometimes useful in displaying a cleaner less cluttered view e Scale Bandwidths to All Flow Groups If Scale Bandwidths to All Flow Groups is selected on the Network Menu LinSig will scale all Bandwidths so as to ensure Bandwidth scales for different Flow Groups are comparable If this option is set the Bandwidth scale is set so the highest Lane flow in all Flow Groups will sensibly fit on the Bandwidth diagram If this option is not set the diagram will be scaled to the highest flow in the current Scenario s Flow Group e Manual Scale If the Manual Scale option is selected on the Network Layout View Toolbar the Bandwidth scale can be set manually This scale will apply to all Flow Groups 4 3 16 3 Scenario Comparison As well as illustrating the absolute level of flow on each Lane the bandwidths can be used to compare two Scenarios The bandwidths displayed represent t
138. RC Delay and Level of Service are shown for the Scenario These are based on the Scenarios current signal times and traffic routing e The Scenario Status Displays the status for the Scenario This includes whether model results have been calculated since the last change to the model and whether the Scenarios green times have been optimised e Mark Allows a Scenario to be selected as requiring calculation or optimising when the Scenario View is set to only calculate or optimise selected Scenarios 4 12 1 1 Creating a New Scenario To create a new Scenario choose New Scenario from the Scenarios pop out on the Modelling menu or click the New Scenario button in the Scenario View s toolbar This creates a new Scenario with a default name a default Flow Group and Network Control Plan arbitrary signal times and flows unassigned to Routes The Scenario Name Flow Group or Network Control Plan can be changed by clicking on the item you wish to change in the Scenario View and entering a new name or choosing a new setting from the resulting drop down list Scenarios can also be created by copying an existing Scenario To copy an existing Scenario select it in the Scenario View and choose Copy this Scenario from the Scenarios pop out on the Modelling menu 4 12 1 2 Selecting a Scenario for Editing A Scenario can be selected for editing either by e Clicking on the Scenario in the Scenario View The selected Scenario will be show
139. Routes based on calculated delays Different Route Flows are stored for each Scenario reflecting the fact that the same OD Matrix can be assigned to the Network in many ways depending on signal timings and other scenario specific issues Using Matrix Based methods LinSig can obtain a fully disaggregated breakdown of traffic passing through each Lane which is used to refine the modelling of queues delays and capacities on each Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 40 Essential Background Lane Based Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows are an alternative simpler way of defining traffic flows compared with an OD Matrix and Routes The following information is used to determine traffic flow on Lanes o Total Lane Stop Line Traffic Flow The total stop line flow for the lane is specified in PCU This is obtained externally from LinSig using traffic counts a strategic traffic model or any alternative manual method o Incoming Turning Movements Turning movements entering a Lane from other Lanes This will also be an Outgoing Turning Movement from an upstream Lane o Outgoing Turning Movements Turning movements leaving the Lane to other Lanes This will also be an incoming Turning Movement from a downstream Lane Lane Based Traffic Flows contain no information on how traffic routes through the Network other than the immediate upstream and downstream Lanes feeding and being fed by a Lane If necessary Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to disaggr
140. Settings gt amp Settings for this model W Optimise pedestrian and non traffic Stages to min If Stops Valuation for Delay sec per stop pcu Optimiser Bus Delay Weighting 1000 Grouping of Controllers Streams when optimising offsets Use Offset Optimiser Groups W Display these Optimiser Settings each time you optimise cancel The Optimiser Settings dialog box by default opens every time the optimiser is run This can easily be switched off if optimiser settings are only being used infrequently Alternatively the optimiser settings dialog can be displayed by choosing Optimiser Settings from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu The Optimiser Settings available include Optimise Pedestrian and non traffic Phases to minimum Setting this option tells LinSig s optimiser to assume all Pedestrian and non iraffic Signal Groups always run to minimum and should therefore always be locked at their minimums throughout the optimisation process This option is provided for compatibility with future facilities and should currently always be selected Stops Valuation for Delay Ticking Stops Valuation for Delay includes the effects of vehicle stops within the optimisation process This will have the effect of producing signal times which trade off small increases in overall traffic delay for larger decreases in the number of PCUs having to stop at signals The stops valuation for delay specifies an assumed c
141. Sig can optimise the whole Network for either best PRC or minimum delay Whenever an optimisation is carried out the signal times are optimised for the currently modelled Scenario e View Network Results The Network Results View displays a detailed table of performance results for each Lane or Lane Group and also for each Junction and the Network as a whole The table can be sorted by clicking on any column header and columns can be added removed and resized by right clicking on a column header The amount of information shown in the Network Results View can be controlled by expanding and collapsing different Junctions using the plus and minus buttons next to each Junction in the Network Results View e Check Lane Flow Profile Graphs As part of the Traffic Model Calculations LinSig calculates detailed traffic flow profiles of platoons passing through each Lane The flow profiles can be displayed either using the Cyclic Flow Profiles View or embedded on the Network Layout View The Lane Graphs are extremely useful in studying how traffic is using a Lane and can assist with identifying any areas of the model where traffic isn t being modelled correctly 2 5 2 Modelling Sequence using Matrix Based Flows Further details of each of the steps below are available in the View Reference section of this Use Guide e Network Information Using the Network Information dialog box Network gt Network Information enter Project and user details for the Mode
142. Sig 2 Model LinSig will indicate any LinSig 2 multi Lane Links which require splitting into Lanes and highlights them in red or orange This indicates o Red LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting but is unable to split the Link automatically Resolve any issues with ambiguous Link structures as described below When the issues are resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as below o Orange LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting and is able to do so automatically without any additional information Right click on each Link with the mouse and choose Accept Lane Structure to split the Link into Lanes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 2 Working with LinSig Files 13 e Correct Illegal Lane Structures If the Link is highlighted in red LinSig cannot interpret how to split the Link without further help The two most likely reasons for this are o It is ambiguous which Long Lane a Short Lane should be associated with This can be clarified by right clicking on the Short Lane and choosing Feeder Lane on Left or Feeder Lane on Right as appropriate o LinSig 2 could model Links containing several Short Lanes but had the restriction that all Lanes had to have the same green times and turning movements LinSig 3 s more sophisticated Short Lane blocking model can model independent control and turning movements on each Lane but currently can only model a single Short Lane attached to a si
143. The Traffic Route List is displayed by clicking on Traffic Mode in the Route List View s toolbar The Route List View displays the following information for each Traffic Route e Route Number Each Route is given a unique Index number which identifies it e Origin Zone The Zone the Route starts from e Destination Zone The Zone where the Route ends e Origin Lane The Lane the Route starts from in the format Junction Arm Lane e Destination Lane The Lane where the Route Ends in the format Junction Arm Lane e Route Flow The traffic flow on the Route in PCU e Flow Locked Whether the Route Flow can be modified by the automatic flow assignment e Bus Route Indicates that the Route is a Bus Route e Journey Time sec The average time it takes traffic to travel from Zone to Zone along this Route This value is used extensively in the delay based assignment algorithm e Delay sec PCU The average delay per PCU to traffic on the Route caused by queuing Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 155 Total Delay PCUHr The aggregate delay to all traffic on the Route caused by queuing Total Journey Time PCUHTr The aggregate time taken by traffic travelling on this Route The List can be sorted by any of the above criteria by clicking on a column header 4 5 1 2 Pedestrian Route List The Pedestrian Route List is displayed by clicking on Pedestrian Mode in the Route List View s toolbar The Ro
144. These different periods are identified below Arrivals during the Green Queued Traffic Discharging on the Green Arrivals during the Red 1200 800 400 Start Displacement End Displacement 3 1 1 3 Interactions between Lanes The flow profiles for each Lane are calculated based on the traffic arriving from one or more upstream Lanes It is important to fully understand how traffic moving between Lanes is modelled Vehicles arrive at Then discharge at Vehicles assumed down stream stop saturation flow to to queue vertically line with dispersed next junction at at stop line profile Cruise speed Queuing and Dispersion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 35 The above diagram illustrates a number of key points These are e Vehicles queuing on a Lane are assumed to queue vertically at the Lane stop line This assumption means that every vehicle travelling along a Lane takes the same cruise time to reach the stop line regardless of the length of the queue on the Lane It also means that the modelled number of vehicles queuing at the stop line may be greater than the maximum number of vehicles that could be accommodated on the Lane e The profile of vehicles leaving a Lane the Leave Profile is used to calculate the Arrival profile at a downstream Lane s stop line The first assumption above could allow this process to be carried out simply by assuming the Arrive Profile of a Lane is the
145. Totals PCU Zone Org Tot Dest Tot J1 Ped Crossing Ji 1 gt J2 1 630 625 J1 Ped Crossing J1 3 gt J1 2 625 650 0 96 B 587 372 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 4 513 500 1 03 C 520 624 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 5 152 150 1 01 D 497 450 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J2 5 220 220 1 00 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J1 3 447 450 0 99 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J2 4 367 250 1 47 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J1 3 220 200 1 10 J2 West Junction J2 4 gt J3 1 740 750 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 5 424 450 0 94 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 6 300 300 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 4 370 370 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 6 150 150 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 4 297 300 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 5 200 200 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 4 gt J2 2 670 670 1 00 Turning Zone Counts List Totals List Controlling the Traffic Counts Displayed The Matrix Estimation View displays traffic count information for a single Traffic Flow Group at any time The Traffic Flow Group used can be selected in the Matrix Estimation View s toolbar The toolbar also allows the graphical Turning Counts View to be opened The Turning Count List The Turning Count List is located on the left side of the Matrix Estimation View and lists Turning Counts for the selected Traffic Flow Group The List also displays statistics comparing the goodness of fit between the counts and the assigned flows in the Current scenario The Turning Count
146. Traffic Total Layer 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode Sse When enabled this allows Move to another To This Lane suas ptr 2 Uniform Flow 0 Mal viewing and direct editing of ae lane flaws using drag and drop BE Flows General Traffic eee es Dn ne BE Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Wia ineaminatian BE 2 4 1 Ahead General Traffic Add Total incoming o Add Total outgoing 100 Consistency Check This page displays the Lane Based Flows Total Flow 100 Total incomin o both incoming and outgoing for this layer a Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to oe Berries E EN i edit flows on the layers for this lane Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 Te eee bes Ss so i aE Apparent fow loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D Tea a eS Bee oe lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel I _ L wee Lane Based Flows can be added using the Edit Lane dialog box as follows e Double Click a Lane which requires flows to be added This will open the Edit Lane dialog box for this Lane e As multiple Flow Layers exist within the model LinSig does not know which ones are used by this Lane so the Manage Layers Available to this Lane button must be used to specify which Layers are used A new Lane Based Flow Layer tab will be created for each Layer e Select the Flow Layer tab for the Flow Layer on which traffic is to be added e Ente
147. Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 290 Examples 7 1 9 Example 9 Mixed Ahead and Turning Traffic in a single lane with differing control for the Turning Traffic In this example a single lane contains mixed ahead and left turning traffic The left turning traffic offers protection to the pedestrians on the side road while ahead traffic has a green signal The left turners will receive a red arrow signal while the pedestrians are protected If a left turning vehicle is stopped at the stop line waiting to turn any ahead vehicles will be forced to wait until the left turning vehicle has moved on before they can proceed even though they have a green signal The likelihood of this situation occurring depends on the relative turning flows and if the junction is modelled within a network it may also depend on the order of arrivals from the upstream junction LinSig currently does not permit different movements on the same lane to be subject to different types of control so in order to model this situation requires the addition of a dummy short lane 171 d 112 2 Arm 1 Main Road The length of the dummy short lane should be such that any more than one left turning vehicle at the stop line will block ahead traffic from proceeding A typical value is 1 0 PCU although this can be made smaller if it is felt that the blocking effect of left turners needs to be more severe 7 1 9 1 Signal Groups with Pedestrian Protection Al
148. Where only a proportion of the total vehicles using the Lane are using a Turn LinSig combines the saturation flows for traffic on each Turn to produce a combined saturation flow for the Lane As the turning proportion varies according to the Traffic Flow Group used in LinSig LinSig will automatically estimate the turning proportion for each Lane from the current Traffic Flow Group e Turning Radius m The minimum radius of curvature of a turning vehicles path This should be measured very carefully for a left turn as the often small radius can have a large effect on the estimated saturation flow For more detail on the above methodology and parameters see the RR67 report This can be obtained from TRL Limited Specifying Unconstrained Unsignalled Lanes An unsignalled Lane in LinSig can be modelled in two ways e Constrained A Constrained Unsignalled Lane has a Saturation flow to model a Capacity constrained Lane or bottleneck e Unconstrained with an infinite saturation flow This is used when it is unnecessary or unadvisable to model the capacity of the Lane and it is being used ourely to organise good Network structure All Lanes are initially created as unconstrained If it desired to model a Lane as constrained either the Geometric or Manual Saturation Flow option should be selected as described above isk Edit Lane 5 1 0 Geometric Calculated Lane Saturation Flow Arm 5Lane 1 Directly Entered Lane Saturation Flow Arm 5 Lane 1
149. a Network Control Plan Network Control Plan All Stages at all Junctions 1 All Stages at all Junctions Controller Sequence Name 2 With Ped All Reds at all Junctions C1 West Controller All Stages 51 1 2 3 52 1 2 C East Controller All Stages 1 2 3 4 The Network Control Plan View allows Network Control Plans to be viewed and edited The View consists of the following panels e The Network Control Plans List The Network Control Plans List is located to the left of the Network Control Plans View and lists all the Network Control Plans defined in the LinSig model e The Network Control Plan Phase Sequence Selection List This section is located in the right panel of the Network Control Plans View and for the Network Control Plan selected in the Control Plans List allows a Phase Sequence to be selected for each Controller For each Controller the following information is displayed o Controller Name The name of a traffic signal Controller in the LinSig model o Sequence The Phase Sequence selected for this Controller in this Network Control Plan The Phase Sequences are created and edited in the Phase Sequence View 4 11 1 Managing Network Control Plans Network Control Plans can be created selected and deleted using the Network Control Plans List 4 11 1 1 Creating a New Network Control Plan A Network Control Plan can be created as follows e Right click in the Network Control Plans List and choose Create New Netwo
150. adjusted to allow for the time to travel between stop lines and for the dispersion of the platoon whilst travelling along the Lane 2400 2000 1600 1200 HOO 400 T 14 2 20 35 42 49 56 Arrive Profile Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 33 Accept Profile The Accept Profile shown below represents the discharge profile of a Lane controlled by traffic signals During the period the tratfic signals are on green the Lane can discharge traffic at a maximum rate equal to the Lane s saturation flow During the red period no traffic can leave the Lane 2400 2000 1600 1200 500 400 T 14 2 20 35 42 49 56 Accept Profile Leave Profile The Leave Profile shown below is calculated from the Arrive and Accept Profiles 2400 2000 1600 1200 e010 400 T 14 2 20 35 42 49 56 Leave Profile The initial peak of traffic at the beginning of the green period represents the queue formed during the red period leaving the Lane at the saturation flow rate After the queue has discharged a short gap occurs when there is no traffic on the Lane to discharge before the next platoon of vehicles arrive and immediately leave the Lane as it is still on green At the end of the green period the amount of leaving traffic falls to zero as the signals are now red and further traffic arriving is forced to queue and wait for the next green period Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 34 Essential Background
151. ads which aren t important to model explicitly Traffic is fed uniformly across allowed Lanes and uniformly over the modelled time period Internal Zones should be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 102 View Reference used sparingly where they are required Overuse of unnecessary internal Zones in Networks which are wholly Matrix Based or contain large Matrix Based regions will lead to a much slower model o To represent the boundary between two Matrix Based Network regions or one side of the boundary between a Matrix Based region and a Lane Based Flow region LinSig models traffic on Routes in the Matrix Based region which finish at the boundary Zone In reality this traffic is continuing across the boundary to an adjacent Network region Normally the cyclic flow profile shape of traffic terminating at a Zone is lost when traffic enters the Zone In this case however the profile shape can be passed across the region boundary to an origin Zone or Lane Based Flow if the Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting is set for Lanes immediately downstream of the region boundary This setting can be found on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box Internal J Zone JzA 307 CZA CZE J12 448 A J24 605 S J242 150 _ af 304 Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound 219 J22 e Bus Zones Bus Zones are new in LinSig 3 1 and allo
152. ame Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the SGroups View s title bar is set to Current Selection the SGroup View will display the Signal Groups for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Signal Groups for several controllers at the same time To allow this each SGroup View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a SGroup View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the SGroup Views title bar and choose which Controller to lock the SGroup View too 4 9 2 Phase View Layout The Phase View displays the Phases defined for the Controller currently being viewed in the Phase View Each Phase shows which Signal Groups run in that Phase FH Phases View Ba babaka Eaa So B42 edee x Nin gt 7 8 Signal Group Display Signal Groups are colour coded to indicate which are running and also to indicate any Signal Groups which cannot be run for any reason The layout of Signal Groups in each Phase is Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 9 Phase View 173 provided by the SGroup View so the position of Signal
153. an Internal Zone when it is unnecessary or undesirable to explicitly model the traffic entry point as a new Junction The Internal Zone will provide a new source and sink for traffic entering or leaving the Network between two Junctions Internal Zones should not be used unnecessarily just to mop up minor differences in counts as this will lead to significantly longer run times The first method is self explanatory and is the preferred option where flow inconsistencies are minor The second method is carried out using standard Network modelling techniques The third method using an Internal Zone is used as followed e Add an Internal Zone with the previous Junction s Exit Arm as the Zone s Arm Exiting Network and the Arm at the downstream Junction as the Zone s Arm Entering Network Internal P Zone J2 4 1 605 e y J3 1 1 307 C2 A CZE J2 4 2 150 A J3 1 2 448 C2 A _3 Ar oe o m J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound lt A LS Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound o_O oe ___________ ________ _ A 8 c1B 450 J2 2 2 328 J342 2 OD CIB 219 2 2 1 341 J3 4 1 e Enter Zone origin and destination totals in the Matrix Estimation View These should be estimated from the counted loss or gain of traffic between Junctions This step is very important as if not carried out the matrix estimation process will tend to terminate or
154. an Links e When the Pedestrian Link is dropped the Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box is displayed This allows the Pedestrian Link s settings to be entered Edit Pedestrian Link Pedestrian Link Name Peds across London Road Pedestrian Link Number 1 Assodated Junction High St London Rd Park St Controlling SGroup 6 Crossing Time 10 Seconds Crossing Type Unspecified e The following settings are available for an Pedestrian Link o Pedestrian Link Number The Pedestrian Link Number will default to one more than the maximum Pedestrian Link Number of the existing Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links can be numbered in any order but all Pedestrian Link Numbers must be used with no gaps in the sequence If the new Pedestrian Link is allocated the same number as an existing Pedestrian Link the new Pedestrian Link will be inserted into the Pedestrian Link numbering sequence and higher numbered Pedestrian Links renumbered o Pedestrian Link Name The Pedestrian Link Name is a simple text name to describe the Pedestrian Link Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 128 View Reference o Associated Junction The Junction the Pedestrian Link belongs to All Pedestrian Links must belong to a Junction o Controlling Signal Group The Signal Group controlling the Pedestrian Link Only Pedestrian Signal Groups on the Controllers attached to the Pedestrian Link s Junction are available o Crossing Time The time it takes an average pedestrian to cro
155. and lt 10 would be unacceptable in a small network but may be acceptable in a larger network if carefully checked and the difference explained o A GEH gt 10 would rarely be acceptable and indicates something is wrong somewhere The most likely cause is poorly matching and inconsistent counts The criteria usually used for the overall acceptability of larger network validation are 85 of Counts being matched with GEH lt 5 It should be easier to meet this criterion with smaller more densely counted Networks and a more rigid criterion may be justified in many cases Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 206 View Reference 4 13 6 2 Validating Counts using the Junction Turning Counts Matrix As described in the Network Layout View section the Junction Turning Counts Matrix can be used to validate Counts and modelled flows at a Junction as well as enter Turning Counts The Junction Turning Counts Dialog displays the following matrices e Desired Counts Matrix The Desired Counts Matrix displays and allows editing of Turning Counts at a Junction This is described in more detail in The Network Layout View section e Actual Flows Matrix The Actual Flows Matrix shows the modelled flows for the Current Scenario corresponding to each Count These are calculated from Route flows through each Count position e Difference Matrix The Difference Matrix shows the difference between the Desired Counts Matrix and Actual Flows Matrix Only the absolute dif
156. and Pedestrian Links for the Text Display Format being edited Creating a New Text Display Format To create a new Text Display Format click the Add New button to the right of the Available Formats list A new Display Format initially called name will be created This should be given a proper name by changing its name in the Name box The Text Display Format can be then be defined as described below in Editing a Text Display Format Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 93 Copying an Existing Text Display Format An existing Text Display Format can be copied by selecting it in the Available Text Display Formats list and clicking Copy A new Text Display Format called copy of copied Format Name will be created Deleting a Text Display Format A Text Display Format can be deleted by selecting it in the Available Text Display Formats list and clicking Delete Editing a Text Display Format A Text Display Format can be edited by selecting it in the Available Text Display Formats list and using the drop down lists to set the desired data or results items for each position on Lanes Lane Connectors and Pedestrian Links Lanes and Pedestrian Links can display up to three data or result items one at each end and one in the middle Lane Connectors can only show a single item in the middle of the connector Any position can be left blank if desired 4 3 7 Joining L
157. and reflects the fact that the Phase Sequence is not valid until it is complete All of the traffic model calculations in LinSig depend on the Phase Sequence associated with the Current Scenario s Network Control Plan containing a valid Phase Sequence If a valid Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 10 Phase Sequence View 179 Phase Sequence is not defined many of the results views will be unable to show any results In this case error messages are shown indicating the possible cause of the problem As soon as a Scenario with a valid Phase Sequence is selected or the current Scenario s associated Phase Sequence is changed to define a valid Phase Sequence the result Views will be automatically refreshed with results for the new or corrected Phase Sequence 4 10 4 Defining a Phase Sequence s Phase Order A Phase Sequences Phase order is defined by adding inserting and removing Phases into and from the Phase Sequence Quick Phase Sequence Creation The Phase Sequence can be edited graphically as described below or can be created quickly by typing a sequence of Phase names into the Phase Sequence column of the Phase Sequence List To enter or edit the sequence for a Phase Sequence double click the Phase Sequence s Sequence column in the Phase Sequence List A new sequence can be entered as a series of Phase names for example ABC or AB1CD The Phase names can also be separated by commas Phase Sequence View Za r
158. anes with Lane Connectors Lane Connectors are used in LinSig to define the traffic movements which can take place between Lanes Lane Connectors also specify the travel time or speed between stop lines and the amount of platoon dispersion present on a movement This allows different values for travel time and platoon dispersion to be used for each movement XF Network Layout View 4 ole es w SIR gt Ale ealedela E mime S IKNIN Al SAA KR Sag B Find Junction e nds YC la Si Lane Give Way Lane Connector Connector JEE eee w 10 300 Q p TEA w Arm 5 Se Naa Arm 1 London Road D P Arm 2 High Street 2 o 100 i f 200 a Hay 3 High StLondon Rd Park St Opposing Selected Lane w It 1g Ask aa reg a U ofj 2 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Bin jo wo s s z o xt o Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All wv Lane All Contains Junc All Arm f Al Lane All v Destination Zone All Arm f All v Lane All Ed The diagram above shows Lane Connectors joining Lanes to other Lanes Lane Connectors representing traffic movements which give way to other Lanes are shown dashed If a give way Lane or give way Lane Connector is selected with the mouse its opposing Lane Connectors are shown highlighted Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 94 View Reference 4 3 7 1 Creating Lane Connectors Lane Connectors can either be created between two exi
159. another As each Route is comprised of a sequence of individual Lanes and Lane Connectors a number of different Routes can exist between any two Zones Each of the Routes represents a different choice of Lanes for drivers travelling between two Zones Routes are used both to define how traffic flow routes through Matrix Based Network regions and also to calculate journey times in both Matrix and Lane Based Network regions e Pedestrian Link Pedestrian Links represent fixed time signal controlled pedestrian crossings Currently non signalled crossings cannot be modelled in LinSig e Pedestrian Link Connector Pedestrian Link Connectors represent pedestrian movements between crossings at the same junction Typically a pedestrian island would be represented by one or more Pedesirian Link Connectors defining the possible movements between crossings using the island e Pedestrian Zone Pedestrian Zones represent origins or destinations for Pedestrians Each Pedestrian Zone corresponds to a point where pedestrians step off the kerb to start walking through the junction e Pedestrian Route A Pedesirian Route consists of a sequence of Pedestrian Links and Link Connectors and represents the path a pedestrian would take through the Junction between two Pedestrian Zones e Matrix Based Network A Matrix Based Network is a LinSig Network in which all traffic flows are defined using an Origin Destination Matrix assigned to Routes This defines traffic flow
160. arance interval between two Phases both phases will be highlighted 4 29 5 Viewing Animation in the Signal Timings View The Signal Timings View shows the current animation time within the cycle This makes tt very easy to see where in the cycle the animation is which Phase or Clearance Interval is running and which Signal Groups are about to start or terminate Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 5 1 SCATS Phase Structure in LinSig 259 5 Detailed Controller Background This section provides additional information on the operation of the SCATS Controller type in LinSig It is intended to assist with understanding controller issues affecting LinSig modelling and is not intended to replace a thorough knowledge of controllers and their configuration 5 1 SCATS Phase Structure in LinSig LinSig allows you to define Phases consisting of Signal Groups that run in those Phases Each Phase has a value for its Minimum Green Yellow and All Red durations as well as defining any signal groups that make use of Late Start or Early Cut off Green values LinSig models the basic Phase structure as indicated in the following diagram Termination Point Running Interval Clearance Interval Late Minimum Variable Green Duration Early cut Yellow All Start Green off Green Red ECO Yellow SCATS Phase Structure 5 2 SCATS Pedestrian operation in LinSig LinSig allows you to model Pedestrian Signal Groups either in Isolated Operation m
161. arry out the following e Right click on the Scenario in the Scenario View and choose Copy this Scenario into Turning Counts e LinSig will produce a copy of the Scenario and a copy of the Flow Group used by the Scenario The new copy Scenario will also be set to use the copy Flow Group e The new copy flow Group will contain Turning Counts calculated from the Route Flows in the original Scenario e Choose whether tidy up the model by deleting any of the old Scenarios and or Flow Groups e When the models are combined together by importing and Zone merging the component networks as described above the new combined Network will contain a full set of Turning Counts e Matrix estimation can be run on the combined network to produce an improved combined matrix Connecting Two Matrix Based Regions without Merging Zones Two Matrix Based Network regions can also be joined without merging the Zones at the region boundary This has advantages and disadvantages as discussed above The two regions can be joined as follows e Create Lane Connectors joining Lanes immediately upstream and downstream of the region boundary e By default the Lanes immediately downstream of the Network region boundary are fed with traffic from the Zone immediately downstream of the boundary using a flat cyclic flow profile This is because instead of traffic crossing the boundary on the Lane Connectors just created traffic will have exited the Network at the Zo
162. ary 2013 300 Examples A 5 Obtaining and Installing Updates to LinSig Users with current software support have free access to LinSig updates via the software Support section of our web site www jctconsultancy co uk Updates will generally include bug fixes minor requested enhancements and documentation updates To download updates please access our software support section of our web site www jctconsultancy co uk where full instructions are provided for downloading and installing LinSig updates In the vast majority of cases updates will not require the LinSig licence to be reactivated A 5 1 1 Automatic Update Notification If desired LinSig can automatically notify you when updates to the software are available to download from the JCT Consultancy Web Site In order to respect any concerns for privacy LinSig installs with automatic update notification switched off and asks whether you would like to enable this when LinSig is run for the first time Updates can easily be switched on at any time using the Program Settings and Defaults dialog box accessed from the LinSig File menu LinSig transmits no personal information to JCT Consultancy when checking for updates Automatic Update Technical Note The automatic update notification uses your computers Internet connection and should operate correctly provided your computer or company s firewall allows access to http over port 80 Please contact us if automatic update doe
163. assigned a traffic flow for each Scenario These Route Flows are then used to calculate Lane Flows and other detailed flow information required for modelling A Scenario s OD Matrix can be assigned to the Scenario s Routes by choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on Current Scenario from the Traffic Flows menu This will assign the OD matrix to the Routes for this Scenario replacing existing Route Flows e If necessary Fine Tune the Route Flow Distribution In cases where LinSig s estimate of Route Flows is not accurate enough Route Flows can be manually changed to reflect uneven distribution of traffic between Routes Route Flows can be edited by double clicking a Route in the Route List View The Actual and Difference Flow Matrices in the Traffic Flow View should be used to monitor the total Route Flows between Zones for the Scenario to ensure the total amount of traffic on Routes is the same as that specified in the Desired Flows Matrix After editing Route Flows can be locked to prevent subsequent automatic assignments changing them e Signal Optimisation Signal Optimisation can be carried out to optimise signal timings for each Controller individually or to optimise the network as a whole LinSig can optimise the whole Network for either best PRC or minimum delay Whenever an optimisation is carried out the signal times are optimised for the currently modelled Scenario e Investigate Reassignment After optimising signal timings
164. associated together to define particular modelling scenarios Each scenario brings together all the information needed for a single LinSig run including cycle time signal timings and Route Flows The Scenario View can be used to Create edit and delete Scenarios Assign Route Flows for a Scenario Control how model results are updated for each Scenario Control batch signal optimisation of several Scenarios at once O O O oO e Network Results View The Network Results View displays a table showing detailed model results at different levels of aggregation The Network Results View can be used to Show aggregate model results for the whole Network Show model results aggregated by Junction Show detailed model results for each Lane or Lane Group Rows can be sorted by clicking on the header above each row Columns can be added and removed by right clicking on the column headers This menu can also be used to abbreviate column headers to save space o Tables showing a lot of Lanes can be filtered to display just a subset of Lanes O O O O 36 e Travel Time Delay Matrix View The Travel Time Delay Matrix View displays a matrix of average travel times between Zones It can o Show average overall travel time between Zones o Show excess delay over cruise time between Zones o For Lane Based Networks display travel times or delays or each Lane based Flow Layer e The Report Builder The Report Builder allows Report Templates to be b
165. at the block for If necessary a Report Fragment can be nested within two or more Repeat Select Blocks to repeat the fragment for combinations of two different criteria For example the Phase Timings fragment needs to know both which Controller and which Scenario to use and would therefore be enclosed in two Repeat Select Blocks one repeating for Controller and one for Scenario Report Fragment Repeat Select Criteria some Fragments which are based around a particular Flow Group Controller or Scenario must be located in a Repeat Select Block so that the Report Builder knows which Flow Group etc to base the Fragment on Fragments which are required to be within a Repeat Select block within the report definition indicate this by showing an icon to the left of the Fragment in the Available Fragments list The icons have the following meanings The Fragment must normally be within a Repeat Select Block using Scenario as its Repeat criterion The Fragment must normally be within a Repeat Select Block using Flow Group as its Repeat criterion The Fragment must normally be within a Repeat Select Block using Controller as its Repeat criterion The Fragment must normally be within two nested Repeat Select Blocks one using Scenarios and the other Controllers as their Repeat criteria When a LinSig model contains only a single Flow Group Controller or Scenario a Repeat Select Block is NOT strictly required for that criterion as th
166. ata Multi Lane Physical Lane Length PCU 50 0 Advanced Meters 345 0 Flow Group Custom Occu Default B Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Network Settings specify 1PCU 5 75m lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel Setting the Lane s Length As discussed above in Working with Lanes a Lane can be regarded as either e A Long Lane if it extends back to the previous junction or is long enough that it will not empty during the longest expected green period In this case the Physical Lane Length setting is the length back to the previous Junction If you are using Exit Arms at the previous Junction remember to allow for the length of the Lanes on the Exit Arm Generally it is recommended that Exit Arm Lanes are given a very short nominal length with most of the length being allocated to the Junction Entry Arm e A Short Lane or Flare if it will empty during the green period and will therefore no longer run at full saturation flow The Physical Length setting in this case is the number of PCU s able to use the Lane if it is fully occupied In both cases the Lane s Length can be specified in PCUs or meters If a Lane Length is specified in meters the PCU Length specified in Network Settings on the Network menu will be used to calculate the Lane s Length in PCU Setting Custom Lane Occupancies Normally LinSig will always attempt to make full use of a Short Lane subject to blocking by other adjacent
167. ate the Report Definition and return to the Report Builder e The new Report Definition is listed in the Report Definitions List in the Report Builder Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 270 Reporting and Printing Deleting a Report Definition A Report Definition can be deleted at any time by selecting the Report Definition in the Report Definitions List and clicking Delete current Report Definition This will only delete the Report Definition from the current LinSig file and will not affect any template files from which the Report Definition may have been created Saving a Report Definition as a Template A Report Definition can be saved as a LinSig Report Template at any point This Template can then be used to add the Report Definition to any other LinSig file To save a Report as a Template e Click Save this Definition as a Template in the Report Builder e Specify a description for the Template e The Template is saved as a RPX file which can be saved in any location but it is recommended to save most Report Templates in the Custom Report Templates Folder so LinSig can easily find them 6 3 3 2 Editing a Basic Report Definition Any Report Definition can be edited at any point to add or remove Report Fragments to control how repeating fragments operate and to set display options for each fragment Adding Fragments to a Report Definition A Fragment can be added to a Report Definition as follows e Select the Report De
168. atest level of detail using Matrix Based Traffic Flows can be modelled up to around 20 junctions Networks using Lane Based Traffic Flows or split into several Matrix Based regions can model much larger networks The Network uses Junctions Arms Lanes and Pedestrian Links to describe the network being modelled Junction A LinSig Junction is a grouping of Arms Lanes and other items which represent a real junction It is used to graphically manipulate these items as a group and to structure and display results and other Junction related information Junctions are also used to specify subsections of Network on which to carry out actions such as signal optimisation Arms Each Arm represents a one way section of road forming part of the Network Each Arm contains a number of Lanes which are used to represent how traffic uses the Arm Arms are not themselves involved in traffic model calculations but are used purely to group and organise Lanes Lanes Lanes are perhaps the most important item for modelling road space in LinSig and are used to define how traffic moves queues and interacts on an Arm Users of earlier versions of LinSig should note that Lanes now replace and simplify Links and Lanes from earlier versions Lane Connectors Lane Conneciors join each Lane to Lanes on other Arms that can provide or receive traffic to or from the Lane The Lane Connectors represent how road markings dictate the way traffic should flow between Lanes When mo
169. atures This section also describes how to change other visual settings how to print the SGroup View and how to export its layout to other graphics software The SGroup View shows the following Each Signal Group is displayed as an arrow indicating the traffic movements controlled by the Signal Group Signal Groups are colour coded depending on Signal Group type Signal Groups can be rotated lengthened shortened by dragging the circular handles at each end of a Signal Group The whole signal group can also be relocated by selecting it and dragging Directional arrows are shown on the Signal Group only after one or more Lanes have been defined as being controlled by the Signal Group It should be remembered that Signal Groups may control several Lanes and that Lanes may be controlled by more than one Signal Group so that there will not always be a one to one correspondence between the arrows shown on Signal Groups and Lanes For example Signal Group 1 in the diagram above is a Three Aspect Signal Group controlling both ahead and right turn Lanes hence it shows both ahead and right turn arrows Signal Group 5 is a Non UK Arrow controlling just the right turn and shows only the right turn arrow 4 7 3 Creating New Signal Groups A new Signal Group can be created as follows Choose Add SGroup from the SGroups pop out menu on the Controllers menu or right click in the SGroup View with the mouse and choose Add SGroup f
170. ave If Auto Assign is not enabled the Desired Flows will not be assigned to Routes until the Assign OD Flows To Routes menu option is selected Traffic OD movements are specified using a single OD matrix for the entire network however it is less meaningful to model pedestrians over such a large area therefore pedestrian OD matrices are specified using one OD matrix for each LinSig Junction This makes the specification of pedestrian flows simpler 4 4 4 1 Traffic Origin Destination Matrices Each Traffic Flow Group OD matrix shows traffic flows in PCU between Traffic Zones for the duration of the Flow Group s modelled time period For example a Flow Group of duration 15 minutes would have 15 minutes flows entered The Traffic OD Matrices are displayed in the Traffic Flows View as follows e Click the Traffic Mode button on the Traffic Flow View s toolbar to ensure Traffic Flows are being shown e Choose either Desired Flows Actual Flows or Difference to display one of the three OD matrices described below e Only the Desired Flows Matrix can be edited the Actual Flows and difference matrices are for error checking output only The three types of LinSig Matrices are e Desired Flows Matrix This matrix displays and allows editing of the desired Zone to Zone traffic flows for the entire network As is customary with origin destination OD matrices Origin Zones are shown to the left of the matri
171. ble by choosing About LinSig from the Help menu Please remember that LinSig is a sophisticated technical product and we aim to provide a quality support service to reflect this Please do not hesitate to ask us if you have questions or problems In particular we are happy to help new or inexperienced users with any questions you may be unsure about Please remember though that software support isn t a substitute for a proper training course 1 5 2 International Software Support As LinSig is becoming more popular overseas particularly in Australasia we get an increasing number of software support queries from around the world If you are submitting a software support query from a location with a significant time difference to the UK the following will help us give you a rapid response e Always email us a copy of your model with your query e Explain your problem clearly to avoid us having to come back to you with simple questions which may have been overlooked Remember that when you have been concentrating on a problem for some time it is easy to miss out basic facts which may be important for someone coming to the problem for the first time e f you are asking questions about how to model a particular traffic situation please provide a basic description of the behaviour particularly if it is custom to your location e lf relevant please provide us with a Google Maps link to a intersection you are asking questions about as alth
172. c and Bus Traffic 200 PCU Total Flow already exists on the General Traffic Layer and 50 PCU exists on the Bus Layer e Drag the black 200 PCU from the Source Lane to the Destination Lane e As traffic on the General Traffic Layer is being dragged LinSig guesses that it will be allocated to the General Traffic Layer on the Lane Connector and the Destination Lane This allows it to make a guess at the action being carried out which can be confirmed from the pop up menu avoiding the need to enter information in the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box e Drag the red 50 PCU from the Source Lane to the Destination Lane e Again LinSig can guess successfully that the 50 PCU is being added to the red Bus Layer on the Destination Lane 5b 200 a 1 a a e f Arm J21 Main Road Eastbound SSE 7 Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Case 7 Single Flow Layer Existing Flow on Source Lane with Multiple Outgoing Lane Connectors Flows specified as Percentage values When using Lane Based flows LinSig allows you to specify the flow leaving a lane as a turning proportion of the flow on that lane rather than as a fixed PCU value If the flow on the lane is subsequently increased or decreased the modelled flow leaving the lane will automatically be recalculated according to the turning proportion specified Furthermore there is an additional option whereby the stop line flow of the downstream lane will also be au
173. c model exist 3 2 2 2 Lane Based Flow Layers Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to separate out different traffic tyoes or movements in a Network or region of Network defined using Lane Based Flows For example bus traffic or traffic between two points in the Network can be separated out LinSig models each Layer separately whilst allowing for interaction between traffic in each Layer Matrix Based Network regions use a similar method to separately model flows on different Routes through the Network With Matrix Based regions all of the Layers are automatically created invisibly in the background from Routes and do not require any manual data entry or configuration Lane Based Flow Layers allow selective disaggregation of important movements or important traffic types eg Buses They should not be used to model a Network which requires extensive separation of traffic movements such as a signal roundabout as if this level of detail is required it can be achieved much more efficiently using Matrix Based Methods Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 42 Essential Background For simple Networks where it is not important to separate out different traffic types it will be sufficient to use a single Layer for the whole Network 3 2 3 Using both Matrix Based and Lane Based Methods in the same Model LinSig 3 1 allows Matrix Based and Lane Based Flow definition methods to be mixed in the same model This has the advantage of allowing important areas o
174. ce from the old PC to the new PC without needing to contact JCT To carry out this transfer please follow the procedure below This will deactivate the licence on the old PC and provide an Activation Code to activate the new PC You must have access to both the old and new PCs to carry out this procedure On the new PC 1 Install LinSig as normal 2 Follow the instructions in Activating LinSig for the first time up to the point where LinSig provides an installation ID This Installation ID would normally be sent to JCT Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 298 Examples who would supply an Activation Code Do not send this code to JCT the old PC being deactivated will use the new PCs Installation ID to provide the Activation Code for the new PC 3 Make a careful note of this Installation ID for use in the next step On the Old PC 1 Choose About LinSig from the Help menu 2 Click the Transfer Licence button 3 Enter the Installation ID from the new PC as provided above 4 An activation code for the new PC is provided Make a note of this activation code LinSig on the old PC has now been deactivated and can only be used as demonstration software On the New PC 1 Either take up where you left off the new PC above or if LinSig has been closed follow the activation procedure as described above in Activating LinSig for the first time up to the point where an activation code is required Enter the
175. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 4 9 10 Editing Phase Timing Parameters ccccccceccceeeceeeseeeseeeseeseeeneeeseeeneeeneeenes 175 AAO lt PNASC SCQUEMCE VIEW uie aae a a 176 4 10 1 Selecting which Controller to View cccccecceceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeueesseeeseaees 176 4 10 2 The Phase Sequence Listonin e e 177 4 10 3 The Phase Sequence Display ccisicciedeeiccici ieee EA 177 4 10 4 Defining a Phase Sequence s Phase Order c ccccecceeeceeceeeceeseeceeeaeesaes 179 4 11 Network Control Plan VIEW ccccccccccceececeeeeceeeesseeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseesessaeeesensesseeeees 181 4 11 1 Managing Network Control Plans cccccccccceeceseeeeeseeeeteeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeesaaees 181 4 11 2 Editing Network Control Plans ccccccccccsecceseeeseeeeseeceseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaaees 182 412 SCOMAMO WICW sisisbetieced eect detente tie dal Mentbvicleetunhuelahesensers eiselwhelages resilient 183 A121 Working with SCCM ANOS ciccco 6 cos cens once ee te ed ead ed ended ade 183 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 2 Traffic Assignment USING Scenarios cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeeesaees 187 4 12 3 Signal Optimisation USING Scenarios cccccceeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeessaees 191 4 13 M trix Estimation VICW cnc2 tscnzecsenshagenasanasienannasanbsunebahsinanewsabsuslshansinadeuaabsunebansoateuanniens 196 4 13 1 Obtaining an Origin Destination Matrix
176. ch their brakes to avoid having to stop and join the queue This leads to a situation where the model is correct in a mathematical sense but leads to a overestimate of the practical position of the back of queue Link 2 4 10 10 G a G 6 4 4 2 2 0 0 The de sliver mechanism detects a sliver queue which is unrealistic and prevents unrealistic back of queue values being reported Exactly what is regarded as unrealistic is governed by the De Sliver Threshold The value of the De Sliver Threshold is used by LinSig to decide when the number of PCU in the queue is unrealistically small For example if the De Sliver Threshold is set to 0 5 PCU LinSig will regard a potential sliver queue containing less than 0 5 PCU as unrealistic and allow traffic to exit the Lane without adding to the queue The exact value for the De Sliver Threshold is best determined by experimenting with its value whilst observing the Lane s Uniform Queue Graph and selecting a value which produces an intuitively sensible queue profile If the value is set too low a sliver queue may form giving unrealistically high mean max queues If the value is set too high the real mean max queue may be smoothed too much leading to an unrealistically high value of mean max queue Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 86 View Reference The De Sliver mechanism is intended to allow obviously unintuitive unrealistically long queues to be corrected but the decision whether the queue profile is
177. ched to a single Long Lane This caters for the majority of common cases other cases involving multiple flares attached to a Long Lane can be modelled by making simplifying assumptions as was the case in LinSig 1 amp 2 When any issues have been resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as described above Add Exit Arms in the Network Layout View Add Lane Connectors Join Lanes with Lane Connectors in the Network Layout View For a single junction from a LinSig 1 file the Lane Connectors will usually be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 12 LinSig Basics used just to connect Entry Lanes to Exit Lanes This will also create Lane turn arrows Review Signalling on Lanes Any LinSig 3 Lanes created by splitting LinSig 1 multi Lane Links will have the same signal control on each Lane LinSig 3 allows different control on each Lane providing opportunities for improving the model Check Geometric Saturation Flow Settings Enter the geometric saturation flow turn radii on Lanes where appropriate Add Zones Add Zones in the Network Layout View at each point traffic enters and leaves the Network Each Zone caters for an Entry and an Exit LinSig will create Routes between Zones automatically as Zones are created Enter Traffic Flows as OD Matrix LinSig has created an empty Flow Group for each Flow Group existing in the LinSig 1 file Enter origin destination flows into the OD Matrix for each Flow Group If the Auto
178. cified in which case the detector counts from each detector will be summed This is typically of use for MultiLanes where a single MultiLane is representing multiple lanes on the street 4 28 2 2 Entering SCATS intersection numbers SCATS detector numbers are only unique within each intersection and so intersection numbers must be entered for each Junction using the Edit Junction dialog box 4 28 3 Using the SCATS Flow Data Import Wizard The SCATS Flow Data Import Wizard allows you to specify which data files to use and which Junctions and Flow Groups to import flow data into 4 28 3 1 Adding data files for import Each dump file from the SCATS Traffic Reporter contains data for a single 24 hour period LinSig allows you to use several input data files for example one for each day of the week and it will use an average of the data across those files impot SCATS How Data Wizard Add SCATS region dump file s Add the SCATS region dump file s that you wish to import from Lin Sig will import flows based on an average File name Date of counts FDA_TF_ 20120402 tt Monday 02 Aprl 2012 FDA_TF_ 20120403 td Tuesday 03 April 2012 FDA_TF_ 20140404 bet Wednesday 04 April 2012 Add Files Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 28 SCATS Flow Data Import 253 4 28 3 2 Selection of Junctions to import flow data into It is not necessary to import flow data into all Junctions in a LinSig model even i
179. cle time graph in the Cycle Time Optimisation View LinSig 3 only builds the cycle time graph when the Start button is clicked This is because the more sophisticated traffic model the more thorough signal optimiser and the larger potential model size means that LinSig takes longer to build the cycle time curves The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays the following e The Graph Settings The Graph Settings are shown in the left panel and allow the maximum cycle time to be graphed and the axis labelling to be set The maximum cycle time should be selected carefully as having too long a cycle time can slow LinSig s calculations down significantly e The Cycle time Range The range of cycle times is shown on the bottom axis This range extends from the minimum cycle time for the current Phasing Plan to a user defined maximum cycle time e The Practical Reserve Capacity Range The range of Practical Reserve Capacity PRC is shown on the left hand axis This range is automatically adjusted to show the full range of PRCs for the junction over the cycle time range e The PRC Curve The red curve shows the PRC for each cycle time within the cycle time range Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 24 Cycle Time Optimisation View 231 e The Total Delay Curve The blue curve shows the Total Delay for each cycle time in the cycle time range The curve is shown without units as only the shape of the curve is significant in this view not the abso
180. consuming computing resources Unfeasible routes can be suppressed as follows e Click the Advanced Route Building Options button in the Route List View Route Building Options Route Building Options W Do not build obviously unfeasible routes Route length ratio threshold L5 Always retain existing Route if fow is greater than PCL 2 Assumed Connector cruise time if not yet specified 5 a Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 157 e Select the Don t Build Obviously Unfeasible Routes option e The Route Length Ratio Threshold setting controls how severely LinSig will suppress unfeasible Routes This can be increased to make LinSig build more routes or decreased to suppress further Routes from being built e If an existing Route has a flow greater than the Always retain existing Route is Flow is greater than setting LinSig will never suppress this Route even if it meets the criterion for Suppression due to changes in Network data or the suppression criteria Setting Non Permitted Traffic Routes Even if LinSig is set to suppress unfeasible routes as described above some Routes are deemed feasible are undesirable and wouldn t in practice be used by traffic LinSig allows Routes to be defined as non permitted meaning that LinSig will never allow any traffic to be assigned to the Route Setting non permitted Routes currently applies to Traffic Routes only Routes can be specifie
181. cting Signal Groups should now be entered using the SGroup Conflict Matrix View e Add Phases to each Controller Signal Groups can now be grouped into Phases using the Phase View Phases created in the Phase View represent Phases configured in the Controller and do not need to be in the order actually run Signal Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 28 LinSig Basics Groups can be added or removed from a Phase by double clicking LinSig will prevent Signal Groups from being added to a Phase if doing so would create a conflict between Signal Groups For each Phase the Phase Timing data can be entered using the Edit Phase Details dialog box This includes durations of the Late Start Minimum Green Early Cut off Green and Yellow All Red periods as well as specifying which Signal Groups make use of the Late Start or Early Cut off Green e Edit the Phase Overlap behaviour By default a Signal Group will be set to overlap between two Phases if and only if it runs in both those Phases Any Signal Groups and Phase Changes for which this default behaviour is not required can be edited using the Phase Overlap View e Create Phase Sequences for each Controller A Phase Sequence represents an order of Phases to run on a Controller Several alternative Phase Sequences can be created for each Controller with the one being used for modelling being selected in the Network Control Plan Phases can be added to a Phase Sequence by dragging Phases from the Phase Vi
182. ctions or Controllers It would be equally valid to complete all steps for each Junction in turn if this is preferred LinSig 3 1 introduces a new way of defining traffic flows using Lane Based Flows For models which only use Lane Based Flows this allows a significantly simpler modelling sequence to be used 2 5 1 Modelling Sequence using Lane Based Flows Further details of each of the steps below are available in the View Reference section of this Use Guide e Network Information Using the Network Information dialog box Network gt Network Information enter Project and user details for the Model e Add Controllers Add the traffic signal Controllers to the model using the Controller List View Controllers gt Controller List View Set the Controller type and naming information e Add Junctions Using the Network Layout View add a LinSig Junction for each junction within the modelled network The choice of how Junctions are used will usually be obvious but sometimes it makes sense to create a Junction for network features which are not strictly junctions such as mid block pedestrian crossings Give Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 23 each Junction a name and specify which Controller s if any are involved in the Junction s control e Add Entry Arms Using the Network Layout View add Junction Entry Arms to each Junction The Junction Entry Arms will contain the Lanes approaching the Junction s
183. ctivation Code it should be entered into the Activation Code section of the Activation dialog Clicking the Continue button will then activate LinSig and display the relevant licence details which you should check to ensure they conform to your LinSig licence agreement Activation Successful Activation has completed successtully Licence ID LJICT11 Activation Level Fully featured Licence Size Single PC Roaming Activation Date 13 Map 2010 OK 6 You will now be able to use LinSig with no restrictions on your PC 7 If your licence allows further PCs can be activated using the above procedure Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 297 A 4 2 2 Updating the LinSig Licence Once activated LinSig can be updated with minor updates without the need to reactivate after each update It may however be occasionally necessary to update the product activation details for example when software support is renewed it will be necessary to apply a new activation code to activate software support features such as the ability to download updates for a further year To update Product Activation 1 Choose About LinSig from the Help menu within LinSig 2 Click on Change Activation 3 If your Licence size is not changing confirm your Licence ID by clicking Continue If you are upgrading your licence size a new Licence ID will have been supplied with your upgrade
184. cts the journey time used for assignment purposes and does not affect any reported journey times or delays Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 61 4 3 3 Specifying Network Information Information regarding the Network being built can be entered using the Network Information dialog box This is opened by choosing Network Information from the Network menu E Network Information Network Details Project name LINSIG User Guide Example Title Example Model Notes This is an example of a typical single Junction LinSig model User Details User name Paul Moore Company organisation name ICT Consultancy Ltd Address LinSig House Deepdale Enterprise Park Netteham Lincol Network Location Location Lincoln Latitude Soh 2 L541 Y Longitude 0 517412 Zoom 19 settings Select an item to set its properties Reset to defaults The following information can be specified Project Name The name of the Project for which the Network is being built Title A title for the Network Notes Any general notes for example to provide information on modelling assumptions User Details The Users Name Company and Address This can be used in reporting etc if desired It is recommended to set defaults for these settings using the Defaults for new Files dialog box opened from the File menu Network Location The place name Latitude and Longitude of the Networks location can be specified This is then
185. d a Column Set 2 Use Save C Flat Vi Layers Routes y y xpan se Save iew Lne Ful Ar Tot Sat Flow Typ SG SG Gm pcu peu Hr pcu Sve pcu D 478 46 8 1 58 D Left UDES 41 44 1800 504 8 7 05 438 D 14 Right U C24 18 109 1800 228 478 23 BIME 47 Main Road Eastbound Ahead U C21 45 152 1800 552 27 5 1 4 322 6G 5 3 Main Road Eastbound Left U CZI G5 45 86 1800 552 15 6 0 6 28 C 3 0 Main Road Westbound Ahead U 122 1800 1800 68 0 0 11 0 0 Main Road Westbound Ahead U 64 1800 1800 3 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 Main Road Westbound Ahead U C22 68 23 1800 828 28 0 2 244 C 0 5 Main Road Westbound Ahead Right O C2 2 C2 6 68 108 1800 756 143 46 8 1 0 9 289 C oa Ped Link P1 PLG 4 7 10 165 1333 143 4 2 92 4 6 7 Ped Link P2 PLH C28 10 255 1333 173 6 6 93 2 10 5 Ped Link P3 PLI C29 10 145 1333 10 5 37 90 7 59 J2 West Junction 434 36 6 1 KI D 3 1 Left U Gs 51 23 1800 624 3 7 0 2 Ss D 07 3 2 Right U Git 28 151 1800 348 434 2 6 62 4 E 59 4 1 Main Road Eastbound Ahead U 15 1800 1800 84 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 Main Road Eastbound Ahead U Ci 8 amp 6 87 1800 1044 8 3 0 4 15 8 B 1 6 4 2 Main Road Eastbound Ahead U 87 1800 1800 48 0 0 l 0 0 1 2 Main Road Eastbound Right O CLI CIS 86 43 1800 765 5 6 36 6 1 0 2 201 C 08 2 2 Main Road Westbound Ahead U C1 2 63 66 1800 768 8 6 0 4 W7 E
186. d and each individual movement s box ticked if it opposes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 280 Examples 7 1 4 Example 4 Left Turn Give Way from a Short Lane This example is identical to Example 3 but the left turn Lane is short with the potential to block back into the ahead Lane The left turners must give way to two movements Lane 2 1 and Lane 3 1 Assuming an Intercept of 715 and coefficient of 0 22 the parameters are entered into the left turns Movement tab of the Lane 1 1 Edit Lane dialog box as shown below Clear Conflict SF Network Layout View Hw fo le e Sia alala Bl 2 o1 2 ell SS alre SSX AOS wl Find Junction ag Find Arm See Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All r Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 281 Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 4 1 Left Movement Give Way Data ee eee Fow when opposing traffic is stopped f Use Maximum Aow while Giving Way Value C Use Lane Saturation Aow Value Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 715 C Use Custom Value pcu H Opposing Lanes Use Data Specitied Below _ Lane Coefficient Cir Conflict Movements Movement 1 v Al opposing To 4 1 Ahead W Al opposing To 4 1 Right Points to note are e The Lane settings are identical to those for the long give way Lane above Only the fact that the give wa
187. d as non permitted in two ways e Manually by explicitly setting the Route as non permitted as described below e By Permitted Route Policy which allows Routes conforming to one of several polices such as U turning and spiral Routes to be automatically set to non permitted These policies will filter out many Routes avoiding the need to manually set large numbers of Routes to non permitted manually Policies can always be overridden The Edit Permitted Routes dialog box is used for both methods e Inthe Route List View click Edit Permitted Routes The Edit Permitted Routes dialog box opens This lists all Traffic Routes in the Network a copy of key Route identification information and the Route s permitted status E Edit Permitted Routes Fermitted Org Lane Lock Route Flow Use Policy Allow A Iti J2 5 1 150 Unlocked t Use Policy Allow A e Use Policy Allow A a Use Policy Allow B e Use Policy Allow B Disallow B e Use Policy Allow B i Disallow a Use Policy Allow Use Policy Allow Use Policy Allow E Disallow a Use Policy Allow fu Mine Dalia Alla Policy settings for permitted routes lf Make circular routes non permitted if Make U turn routes non permitted etmese re cne w Ji i 1 J3 5 2 297 Unlocked Ji 1 1 J3 6 1 03 Unlocked J2 3 1 Ji 2 1 Unlocked J2 3 2 33 5 2 Unlocked J2 3 2 J3 5 2 Unlocked J2 3 2 J3 6 1 5 Unlocked J2 3 2 J3 6 1 Unlocked J3 2 1 Ji 2ji Unl
188. delling a single junction Lane Connectors are only required to define permitted turning movements from a Lane by connecting an Entry Lane to an Exit Arm s Lanes Junction Exit Arms Junction Exit Arms are simply Arms carrying traffic away from a Junction and are used to graphically define the exit point of traffic from junctions In a Network containing several junctions Exit Arms are used to pass traffic on to the next downstream Junction using Lane Connectors to define possible lane changing or weaving movements between the two Junctions Although Exit Arms are not strictly necessary and may not be present in some models built in LinSig 2 they make network layout and manipulation of junctions within the network much easier and are strongly recommended LinSig internally models Exit Arms in a lightweight manner so adding Exit Arms does not necessarily increase model run times Zones A Zone represents an origin and or destination for traffic entering or leaving a Matrix Based Network region Zones may either be External Zones which represent Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 1 Definitions 7 traffic entering or leaving the Network at the end of an Arm Internal Zones which represent traffic entering or leaving the Network along an Arm for example from on street parking or Bus Zones which represent the starting and end points of Bus Routes through the Network e Routes A Route represents a unique path through the Network from one Zone to
189. different ways Lane Based Flows can be entered and edited once the decision to use them has been taken 4 3 9 1 Methods for Entering and Editing Lane Based Traffic Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows can be entered or edited in two different ways These are e Lane Based Flow Editing Mode on the Network Layout View This graphical drag and drop editing method is the easiest way of quickly entering Lane Based Flows stop Line l Lane Flow Outgoing Incoming Flow Flow Flow i 150 150 A 200 520 a Arm J1 3 Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound EN J Sa r Arm J2 4 Main Roa e Lane Based Flow Tabs of the Edit Lane Dialog Box The Edit Lane dialog box provides one or more tabs which allow detailed editing of Lane Based Flows on a Lane This method is simply an alternative non graphical method of entering the same data as the graphical method G ih Edit Lane J2 1 1 eon a Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Group 4M Peak Lane Based Flows st fc corel ms aimake Total Layer Flow 150 aa a resign ray nit h sro yee ustomrion pau fo en eee Lane Based Flows Summary Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows in the Network Layout View Flows General Traffic Ml Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Name EE 32 4 1 Ahead General Traffic EE J 1 1 1 Ahead General Traffic EA Ee Eee ee cS a ee Consistency Check This page displays the Lane Based Flove Total Flow 150 Total incoming
190. dows Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Microsoft Office Word Excel and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation WinZip is a registered trademark of WinZip International LLC SCOOT is a registered trademark of Siemens Pic TRL Limited and Peek Traffic Ltd SCATS is a trade mark of the Roads and Traffic Authority of New South Wales Australia Google is a trademark of Google Inc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 Contents Ve TOUR O CIC TOD occasion 1 ANNANS ENSO carne este etn sme ecg ae er ee ee eee 1 1 2 What s New in Version 3 Of LinSig cccccccseccecceeeceeceeeceeceecuesaeeceesaeeseeseesaesaeesaes 2 1 3 What s New in Version 3 1 Of LINSIG cccccceccsecceeeeeeceeecueceeceesaeeceesaeeceesaeeseeeaeesans 2 1 4 What s New in Version 3 2 Of LINSIG ccccecceccsecceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeseeeaeesaes 3 1 25 SOMWANS SUDDO etsien Ann E EE E R EAEE DERE 3 125 1 ACCESSING SONWALS SUDDO isr a Mads es 4 1 5 2 International Software SUPPOST cccccsecccceececeeeeceeeeseeeeeseucesseeeeseeeeseueesseeeesaaees 4 ROST UNIN Che cal ts aca arate acelin el me a ane aa decane ata taladet 4 E7 Model Adn peeemeperee ener oreetene eects ene ere PRie near eRe nent Rath tn ee tart Meee tee iene een eee eee Ree rere 5 es OMS USS Ob oct hit cee ett ace a a toa e oreioaactan der 5 2 LINSIG BASICS srr EAA 6 2 tM CMMIM OM Sst ce susie ttstete etait ce
191. drag and drop method of editing Lane Based Flows to be used Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 122 View Reference Adding Lane Based Flows when using a Single Flow Layer When using a single Flow Layer the Lane Based Flow Summary tab is not shown and a single Lane Based Flow Layer tab for the default Layer 1B Edit Lane J2 1 1 A Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Groupi AM Peak Lane Based Flows WB General Traffic Total Flow 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode Move to another To This Lane m when Shiai Fi pis F S Uniform Flow 0 m viewing and direct editing o Layer lane flaws using drag and drop Flows General Lcis Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows in the Network Layout View Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Wia ineaminatian BE 32 4 1 Ahead General Traffic Add Total incoming o Add Total outgoing 100 Consistency Check This page displays Lane Based Flows for Total Flow 100 Total incomin o this lane If you need to enter data for other layers as well click the Manage Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 ering a ee P Apparent flaw loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel iT ST Lane Based Flows can be added using the Edit Lane dialog box as follows e Double Click a Lane which requires flows to be added This will open the Edit Lane dialog box for this Lane e As only a
192. e 1 discharging at 1 saturation flow rate 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Time in Cycle t Queue clearance time Start of End of Traffic arriving after Red Red this time on green does not stop Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 38 Essential Background Oversaturated Queuing When a Lane is oversaturated a residual queue remains at the end of the modelled typical cycle The next cycle then adds to this residual queue by the same amount This leads to a constantly increasing residual queue throughout the modelled period For example assume a Lane s arrival flow is 400 PCU hr 10 PCU cycle for a 90s cycle and its capacity is 320 PCU hr 8 PCU cycle and the queue is zero at the start of the modelled hour The queue at the end of the modelled hour will be approximately 8600 90 x 10 8 80 PCU plus the maximum uniform queue The mean queue will be approximately half the queue at the end of the hour in this case 40 PCU Random Queuing When a Lane has a degree of saturation less than 80 the uniform queue will be a good estimate of queuing In cases where the degree of saturation is greater than around 110 the oversaturated case will also be fairly accurate albeit sensitive to small changes or inaccuracies in input data However in most cases in tratfic assessments the Lanes of most interest will be in the middle of these two zones in the 90 105 saturated range In these cases in real life the queue will randomly clear some cycles and not clear
193. e Connector This can be done either manually using the Route List View or by reassigning automatically by choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on current Scenario More information is given in the section on the Scenarios View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 100 View Reference Any Lane Based Flows passing through the Lane Connector The deleted traffic flow should be added back into the model onto a different Lane Connector to reflect how traffic will use Lanes after the Lane Connector has been deleted The Network Layout View s Flow Consistency Mode is useful for checking that all flows have been correctly added back Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 101 4 3 8 Defining Network Entry and Exit Points using Zones Zones are used in LinSig to define entry and exit points to and from Matrix Based regions of a LinSig Network Zones define the start and end point of traffic movements through the Network All Matrix Based traffic flows start from a Zone and end at a Zone Zones are also used in the Traffic Flows View to reference the start and end points of traffic movements entered in the Traffic Flow Views Origin Destination matrices Network Layout View leks w SB s Ble sl 2lalel oS e R fess elle Alelalal al Find Junction Find Arm Pe m g Layer Filter Do 800 1000 300 1 ar Arm 1 London Road ios ey Arm 2 High Stregt F Arm 4 i SS ood 600 1
194. e Desired Flows Matrix changes This will of course replace the flows on all affected Routes losing any custom Route Flows This option should only be used with a small model as reassigning a large model after every minor change to the matrix will be very slow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 151 Locking Matrix Cells for Matrix Estimation An OD matrix cell can be locked preventing matrix estimation from changing its value To lock a cell e Right click on the matrix cell and choose Lock this value during Matrix Estimation e Only cells in the Traffic Matrix can be locked H bee Traffic Ongin Destination Matris Auto Assign Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Copy Paste Destination P A BT C D T a eas aer ao est Origin E e o 153 o7 a a a a asa PD 203 _a7_ 200 o_ 00 Tot eso 370 650 450 2120 Locked If Auto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Flow Matrix will Matrix Cell automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flows you may have If Auto Assign is not enabled the Desired Flows will not be assigned to Routes until the Assign OD Flows To Routes menu option is selected 4 4 4 2 Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrices Pedestrian Origin Destination matrices are similar to Traffic OD matrices but are specified as a separate matrix for eac
195. e Edit Lane dialog is opened by selecting a Lane in the Network Layout View and choosing Edit Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network menu Alternatively double clicking a Lane with the mouse or right clicking on a Lane and choosing Edit Lane from the pop up menu will also open the Edit Lane dialog box As well as being used to edit Lane Based Flows the Edit Lane dialog box can be used to edit a wide range of other settings on a Lane Details of using the Edit Lane dialog box for editing other settings are provided in the Configuring Lane Settings section above Two of the tabs provided by the Lane Edit View can be used to edit Lane Based Flows These are e Lane Based Flow Summary The Lane Based Flow Summary tab is only present if Lane Based Flows are defined on a Lane with two or more Layers This tab summarises the Lane Based Flows across all Layers and allows Layers to be managed e Lane Based Flow Layers A separate tab is shown for each Lane Based Flow Layer using the Lane The tab allows the total flow and incoming and outgoing flows to be specified for the layer Lane Based Flow Summary The Lane based Flow Summary tab is only used where Lane Based Flows are being defined on a Lane and two or more Flow Layers are defined The tab shows a summary of the total flow incoming flows and outgoing flows across all Layers on a Lane and allows non layer specific settings to be altered iah Edit Lane J
196. e List View the Network Layout View and the Flow Profile View are all visible e Select a Route passing through the Lane in the Route List e The Route will be highlighted in the Network Layout View and the Route Layer will be highlighted in each of the Flow Profile Graphs Highlighting Route Layers is very useful when examining the effects of platooning and working out which movements queue and which get good green progression lal Flow Profiles View Diagram Size __ iS Route List View oles Route Filter Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All bd 1500 Destination Zone All v Arm All v Lane All v R em Traffic Mode A r a Bais Show All Routes Edit Permitted Routes Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route f O Zone D Zone O Lane D Lane Flow Locked Joumey Delay Total Total PCU s PCU s Delay pcuHr Joumey pcuHr 18 A B Ji 1 2 J2 5 1 150 48 65 23 65 0 99 2 03 12 A C fl J33 5 2 297 116 30 58 30 481 9 59 11 A D Ji 1 1 J3 6 1 203 90 04 45 04 2 54 5 08 13 B A J2 3 1 4A 200 54 66 32 66 1 81 3 04 1 B C J2 3 2 J3 5 2 153 87 66 58 66 2 49 3 73 in 3 B D J2 3 2 36 1 97 74 32 48 32 1 30 2 00 B PO 15 C A J3 2 2 Ji 4 1 124 104 09 54 09 1 86 3 59 oe ee oe a 14 C A 3 2 1 J41 123 104 14 44 14 1 51 3 56 C B 33 2 1 J254 123 55 82 28 82 0 98 1 91 E D J3 2 2 J3 6 1 150 48 70 44 70 1 86 2 03 D A B32 H4 23 1289
197. e Report Builder knows that only one item e g Flow Group is available to use with the Fragment It is however recommended to include a Repeat Select Block around the Fragment to avoid having to change the Reports if further items e g Flow Groups are added at a later time or the Report Definition is saved as a Template Each Fragment which is dependent on any Repeat Select options being specified indicates whether these requirements have been fulfilled using the Fragment Dependencies section at the top of each Fragment This is illustrated below for the Phase Timings Fragment Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 274 Reporting and Printing l Fragment Dependencies Phase Timings Report Fragment Tithe Fhase Timings q Use Default Phase Timings Reporting Uptions Portrait C Land cape D MUs SES ai new page W Show Report Fragment Title Table Options Maxiniurn number of pm H Phases per table L _ The dependency indicators show which dependencies apply to this fragment and which have currently been fulfilled In this case the Phase Timings Fragment requires a Scenario SN and a Controller CT to be specified The Controller has been satisfied by including the Fragment within a Controller Repeat Select Block or only a single Controller exists but the Scenario has not been satisfied indicating that a further Scenario Repeat Select Block is required before the Fragment will work correctly When a LinSig model contains only a single
198. e all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the SGroups View s title bar is set to Current Selection the SGroup View will display the Signal Groups for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Signal Groups for several controllers at the same time To allow this each SGroup View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a SGroup View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the SGroup Views title bar and choose which Controller to lock the SGroup View too Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 166 View Reference 4 7 2 Using the SGroup View The SGroup View shows the current layout of Signal Groups defined in the Controller Each Signal Group is colour coded to indicate its signal group type Signal Groups show directional arrows based on the Lanes they control and therefore arrows are only shown when a Signal Group controls one or more Lanes PE SGroups Al bala w SB lela FE lela ALLE aa The SGroup View can be zoomed and panned as described above in General View Fe
199. e as the Network Cycle Time set on the main toolbar or the Controller s parent Controller Set s cycle time where multiple Controller Sets are being used It may however be different from its parent Controller Set s cycle time when o Constraints such as the Controller s minimum Cycle Time would be violated if the Controller Set s Cycle Time was applied to the Controller o A Phase Sequence with a different Cycle Time to the Controller Set s Cycle Time has been created or imported into the Scenario Attempt to Maintain Cycle Time When Attempt to Maintain Cycle Time is ticked LinSig will attempt to maintain the Controllers Cycle Time equal to its parent Controller Set s Cycle time when making changes to traffic signal related data in LinSig For example if a Phase s Yellow All Red duration is changed which lengthens a Clearance Interval LinSig will if possible reduce one of the Phase lengths to maintain the Cycle Time Allow Edit Timings When Allow Edit Timings is un ticked LinSig does not allow Phase Timings to be changed in the Phase This is useful to prevent making inadvertent changes to signal timings Multi cycling The Multi Cycling setting provides a quick way of implementing simple equal length double and triple cycling It allows a Phase Sequence to be repeated twice or three times within the Controller s overall Cycle Time Each half or third cycle will be of equal length This option is not suitable for im
200. e being merged Also add same Flow to Source Lane Total Flow If this option is selected the flow being added is also added to the Source Lane s Total stop line flow for the Source Layer Also add same Flow to Destination Lane Total Flow If this option is selected the flow being added is also added to the Destination Lane s Total stop line flow for the Destination Layer This assumes that the traffic entering the Lane all reaches the downstream stop line Switch PCU Percent value LinSig allows you to enter Lane Based flows as relative percentage values This is explained in further detail in Case 7 below e Click Add Lane Flow to add the Lane Flow to the selected Flow Group e LinSig will add the following Flow items to Lanes O O Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 As the Also add same flow to Source Lane Total Flow setting was left selected 100 PCU flow crossing the stop line on the upstream Lane is added to the upstream Lane s Total Flow 100 PCU flow is added to the Lane Connector between the Source and Destination Lane As the Also add same flow to Destination Lane Total Flow setting was left selected 100 PCU flow is assumed to reach the stop line on the downstream Lane and is added to the downstream Lane s Total Flow 112 View Reference OO e These flow items are displayed on each of the Lanes and the Lane Connector Case 2 Single Flow Layer Existing Flows on Source Lane When existing flows
201. e not required the Edit Lane dialog box will simply show a single Lane Based Flow Layer tab which can be used to edit all flows on the Lane The settings available on the Lane Based Flow Layer tab are e Total Flow PCU The Total Flow is the total flow of traffic represented by this Flow Layer across the downstream stop line of this Lane e Uniform Flow PCU The Uniform Flow displays the total Uniform Flow on this Lane for this Flow Layer e Incoming Flows PCU The Incoming Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors entering the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector on this Flow Layer e Outgoing Flows PCU The Outgoing Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors leaving the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector on this Flow Layer e Consistency Check The consistency check table provides various totals of flows entering and leaving the Lane using this Flow Layer and provides a quick check for flow consistency The Flow Consistency Mode of the Network Layout View provides a much more comprehensive graphical check of flow consistency e Move to another Layer The Move to another Layer button allows the traffic Flows defined on this Layer to be moved onto a different Flow Layer e Manage Layers Available to This Lane This works the same way as on the Lane Based Flow Summary tab e Lane Based Flow Entry Mode his button switches the Network Layout View into Lane Based Flow Entry Mode This allows the Lane Based Flow
202. e or regional data this value can be changed Optimiser Queue Constraints The Optimiser Queue Constraints can be used to help with modelling queue blocking back from one Lane to an upstream Lane No input is required if excess queuing is not occurring The constraints allow the LinSig Phase length optimiser to be discouraged from producing phase lengths which lead to queues on Lanes exceeding the Queue Limit For example if a Lane between two junctions was a single lane of 100m this provides space for approximately 100 6 16 PCU Because the vertical queuing model used in LinSig more details are in the Modelling Background Section does not model blocking back from Lanes so depending on the other Lane data LinSig may model a queue of 20PCU which obviously extends beyond the end of the Lane Setting a queue optimiser constraint of 16 PCU encourages the optimiser to choose a longer green time reducing the queue on the Lane to below 16 PCU The individual parameters are o Excess Queue Limit PCU The queue length beyond which LinSig will try to reduce the queue This is normally set to approximately three quarters of the queuing space on the Lane but Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 84 View Reference can also be set to less to force the optimiser to be more aggressive in reducing the queue Beware of being too aggressive as this may prevent the optimiser from finding a meaningful answer o Degree of Saturation Weighting This value is only
203. e techniques As the format used is a scalable metafile the pasted diagram can be resized within the DTP software with no loss of quality Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 6 Examples 7 Examples 7 1 Arm Structure Examples This section provides a series of examples to illustrate how different junction geometries and traffic scenarios are coded into LinSig Arm Structures 7 1 1 Example 1 Flared Entry In the example below the Approach on Arm 1 is configured as having one long offside lane and one short nearside lane The inside lane can hold 5 PCUs this represents approximately 30 meters e The Short Lane is created by selecting the Long Lane right clicking and choosing Create Short Lane to Left from the pop up menu e The length of the Short Lane is set as 5 on the Lane Details tab of the Short Lane s Edit Lane dialog box Physical Flare length 5 PCU 100 gt D gt S 1800 S 1800 600 D ee Edit Lane 1 1 4 General Lane Details Sat Flow Data Advanced Movmt to 2 Lane Length Am 1 Lane 1 This is a short lane Physical Lane Length PCU 5 0 Arm 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 277 7 1 2 Example 2 Left Turn Bay The figure below shows an example where the inside Lane is flared and is designated as an exclusive left turn Lane The Short Lane is created by selecting the Long Lane right clicking and choosing Create Short Lane t
204. ed F1 2006 Friday AM Peak Change the Flow Group being edited by changing selected Flow Group Count Modelled Flow e Difference Origin Destination 4 5 6 Total 1 London Road 800 300 2 High Street 600 200 800 3 Park Street 400 200 600 Total 1000 1000 500 2500 For comparison with Counts the Modelled Flow does not include Lane Baged flow or Bus Flow mea A Junction s Turning Count Matrix can be edited as follows e Select a Junction with the mouse e Right click on the Junction and choose Edit the Junction s Turning Counts from the pop up menu The Edit Turning Counts dialog box will open e In the Edit Turning Counts dialog box ensure the Desired tab is selected This tab allows the desired Turning Counts measured on site to be specified in PCU e As many or as few counts as desired can be entered however more counts will provide better matrix estimates and more robust validations Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 65 The use of the Modelled Flow and Difference tabs to compare counts and assigned flows is described in more detail in the Matrix Estimation View section Inter Junction Traffic Counts The Junction Turning Count Matrix by default only shows Turning Counts between Arms belonging to the same Junction This is the normal recommended usage of Turning Counts where Junction Exit Arms have been specified For Networks imported from previous versions or tho
205. ed item will be shown in red Many menu commands require you to first select an item before choosing that command For example before choosing the command Edit Lane you must have selected a Lane Menu commands that cannot be carried out because an Item has not been selected are shown in grey and cannot be chosen In some instances more than one item can be selected at once by holding the control Ctrl key or shift key down whilst selecting the Items Multi select can also be carried out in the Network Layout View by dragging a multi select rectangle with the mouse whilst holding control Ctrl down All items in the rectangle will be selected Pop Up Context Sensitive Menus Clicking on a View with the right mouse button will display a pop up menu containing a choice of commands relevant to the item clicked on All commands displayed on pop up menus are also available on the LinSig main menu Not all Views will have a pop up menu Editing an Item by double clicking An Item can always be edited by selecting it and choosing to edit it from the main menu or pop up menu Alternatively for some items as a shortcut you can double click the item to edit it This does not apply where there may be more than one way to edit an item Using a wheel mouse If you have a wheel mouse LinSig will use the wheel for zooming graphical views and scrolling through lists The use of a wheel mouse is strongly recommended as they are inexpensive and make z
206. efine how road space is used on an Arm The number of Lanes on the Arm and whether they are Long Lanes or Short Lanes is used to specify how the Arm operates Lanes are shown in the Network Layout View as shown below Arm 1 London Road Each Lane is numbered with its number being shown in the coloured Lane number circle in front of the Lane Lanes are always numbered from nearside to offside that is left to right In the UK and other drive on the left regions It is usually best to refer to a Lane as a combination of its Arm and Lane for example Lane 1 2 refers to Lane 2 on Arm 1 Where the Network contains multiple Junctions it is necessary to also include the Junction to fully reference the Arm within the entire Network For example Junction 3 Arm 6 Lane 2 would be referred to as J3 6 2 Lane Type Each Lane s type is indicated by the colour of the Lane number circle The different possible Lane types are ____ A Lane showing a yellow Lane number circle is a standard signal E A controlled Lane which does not give way to other traffic A Lane showing a green Lane number circle is an unsignalled P er oes Lane which does not give way to other traffic They are typically used for through traffic on major roads at priority junctions and exit 1 1 Lanes This type of Lane is sometimes referred to as a bottleneck Unsignalled Lanes can either be unconstrained with effectively an infinite saturation flow or a sat
207. egate traffic flow on a Lane by traffic type eg buses by movement or any other criteria 3 2 2 1 Choosing Which Flow Definition Method to Use Each traffic flow definition method has advantages and disadvantages It is important to understand these when choosing how to structure a network The advantages of Matrix Based methods include LinSig has detailed information on how traffic routes through the Network This means that each Lane can be modelled with different traffic movements passing through the Lane being kept disaggregated throughout the modelling process This leads to more accurate modelling of cyclic flow profile shapes which are used in the optimisation process and to calculate model results This is particularly important on complex junctions such as signal roundabouts In smaller Networks where little route choice exists the amount of data entry using an OD Matrix and delay based assignment is much less than when using Lane Based Flows When changes are made to the Network possibly as part of scheme development LinSig can quickly reassign traffic to Routes on the changed Network based on modelled delays This process is very quick and allows rapid assessment of the consequences of traffic rerouting due to scheme changes In smaller Networks where the number of Routes is not too large very fine control over traffic routing is available by manual adjustment of Route Flows Disadvantages of Matrix Based Methods include
208. elled using an assumed relationship between the capacity of the movement giving way and the rate of flow on Lanes opposing the Give Way Lane LinSig assumes a linear relationship as shown in the graph below The linear relationship is specified using the following parameters e The Intercept Fo is the maximum flow when the Lane is potentially opposed but no opposing traffic is present e The Slope A is a coefficient which specifies by how much the capacity is reduced by flow on the opposing Lane e F is the Minimum Flow that is able to discharge regardless of Q4 LinSig allows for any number of opposing Lanes by allowing additional A parameters to be specified for each opposing Lane a Intercept Fo Slope A1 a Minimum Flow F Controlling Flow Q1 Capacity F F Fo Ai Q1 The above parameters can be interpreted in traffic terms as follows e Intercept or Max Flow The Intercept is the maximum flow rate that could exit the give way Lane if no opposing flow was passing the give way Lane It is important to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig 45 differentiate this value from Saturation flow Saturation flow values assume that the driver will not have to stop The Intercept value assumes the driver may have to stop and will have to slow down to check for opposing traffic even if none is present The Intercept value will usually be much lower than a saturation flow value for a Lane with
209. emand Flow F Pedestrian Crossing Saturation Flow ped Hr 36000 ped Hr PCU Length 5 75 meters Increase modelled time to find typical cycle F Default method for lane based inflow outfow entry As PCU values Default for aubomatent rf d ise separate capacities for long and short lanes e Traffic Flow Aesigrme Allow use of Weaving Connectors Experimental F Controller Default Phase minimum 7 seconds Default Phase minimum for Arrow Phases Warn if Phases don t terminate together in the interstage F settings Tick this box to make use of separate capacities and degrees of saturation for long and short lanes Reset to defaults Modelling Short Lanes using the LinSig 2 Method LinSig 3 1 reintroduced the ability to model short Lanes as a simple stepped saturation flow profile as was used for all short Lanes in LinSig 2 In nearly all cases the new LinSig 3 method will be superior however the old method has been included for completeness and compatibility with existing LinSig 2 models LinSig 2 style short Lanes are edited on the MultiLanes tab as detailed below All references to short Lanes in this User Guide refer to LinSig 3 type short Lanes unless explicitly stated otherwise Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 72 View Reference MultiLane Arm 1 London Road 4 3 6 2 Creating and Managing Lanes LinSig Lanes always belong to an Arm They can be created and managed as follows Creating a New Long Lane select
210. eport Builder consists of two main panels The Report Building Panel The left panel of the Report Builder provides tools to create new Report Definitions manage Report Definitions and to define the content of the current Report Definition The panel contains the following items O O O The Report Definitions List The Report Definitions List at the top of the panel lists the Reports defined in the current LinSig data file The list allows a current Report to be selected The current Report can then be run or edited using the rest of the Report Builder The Report Page Size The Page size the Report s layout will be designed for The Report Title The title of the current Report The Available Fragment List The Available Fragment List lists all the fragments which can be added to the current Report Definition Clicking on any Fragment in the list displays a description of the Fragment and its use in the yellow hint box immediately below the list Fragments which can be repeated using Repeat Select options are shown with an icon to their left describing the type of Repeat Select options available Any Fragments which cannot be added to the report for any reason are shown grey The Report Definition The Report Definition lists the Report Fragments contained in the current Report Definition The Fragment Options Panel The right panel of the Report Builder displays options for the Report Fragment currently selected in Report
211. er is located on the network This can be achieved either by manually configuring each Workstation or by using a Software Deployment System to pre configure the licence mode and Licence Server location in each Workstation s registry Manual Configuration of Workstations 1 When running LinSig for the first time the software will present a dialog box showing information relating to the activation status of the software on the Workstation This will show the activation status to be Not activated If the OK button is clicked the activation process will be cancelled and LinSig will run in demonstration mode It can still be activated later by choosing About LinSig from the Help Menu and proceeding as below 2 Clicking the Activate button will start the activation process by requesting the type of activation In this case choose Network Unlimited Licence 3 Click Discover IP Address of Licence Server LinSig will search the local network for a LinSig Licence Server If one is found its IP address is stored as the Workstations default Licence Server If the Licence Server has not yet been set up yet or cannot be discovered automatically the Licence Servers IP address can be entered manually If you do not know the correct IP address please consult your IT Department or the person responsible for installing and setting up the LinSig Licence Server 4 Click Connect to attempt to connect to the L
212. er pages Print Page Layout Print Page Number 1 kd Page Scaling f Scale To Fit Print Zone to Page f Choose Specific Scale 1 00 W Crop To Print one Page Onentation C Portrait f Landscape Title Block Position Right Page Title PO Indicate scale on tithe block Title Block width 600 Title Block Height 200 OF Cancel The main settings are Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 2 Printing Flow Profile Diagrams 265 e Page Number When more than one page is defined pages can be renumbered by choosing a new page number in the drop down list Other pages will be renumbered to create a gap in the numbering sequence if required e Page Scaling Each Page either can scale the section of the View within its Print Zone to fit onto the current printer s default paper size or can specify an absolute scale Absolute scales are less flexible than scale to fit but are useful in ensuring each page s text and detail sizes are identical e Page Orientation Allows each page s orientation to be set independently The shape of the Print Zone has no bearing on its page orientation e Title Block Optionally inserts a title block onto each page populating it with the project information defined in File Settings which can be found on the File Menu Each page can also have a separate Page Title defined 6 1 1 3 Printing the View Having defined the desired number of Print Zones the View can be printed as follo
213. eranaetnsauedacet a 217 4 19 Phase MINIMUMS VIEW 2 20 csstascnnastaaenavetusenaanadansoenssanslsadiewiasaunesenslsadlwumboudonensivaewanauions 218 A 20 NetWork Results VIEW ver wgoieciunincntnschonchncna kote a T EN 219 4 21 Travel Time Delay Matrix View cccccccseccseecceeeceeeeeececeueecseeceuseseueseeeessueeseeeseas 225 4 22 Model Adit VIEW sncns an ee diagene canst pen olinneen dts 226 A235 AUG HISTO VIGW icc cocctcecerant tudteahlecaden ne eda deaaten meats S 229 4 24 Cycle Time Optimisation View ccccccceccceececeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseusesseeeseneesseeeas 230 420 CVCIC FIOW PIONS VIEW icc goes deca a a deste t als deste te Mates 232 4 25 1 Creating Graphs and Controlling their Layout ccccccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeees 232 425 2 Graph Type S nee ee ee eee 233 420 02 FOW PIOTICGVADINS veccsastdeccntettcegencetandenstinnGancesyilac a a 234 4 25 4 Uniform QUEUGC Gla ONS siccu enren eR EENE 238 425 5 Strage Graphs asrau ieia a a aN e 240 A 2O EOF NIOW oiean a a iaisiedtaste 241 4 27 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks cccceeccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeesaeseseeeeaeeeseeeeseeeaes 243 4 27 1 Points to Consider before Merging Networks cccccccesseeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeees 243 4 27 2 Importing a LinSig Network into an existing Model ccccseeeseeeeseeeseeeees 244 4 27 3 Joining Imported Network ReGIONS cccceccssecssesensecseesesseeeeseesentenseeseneens 246
214. erts which you will be fully familiar with through being intimately involved in the process As well as having learnt how to apply LinSig to a particular scheme you will also have learnt skills which are focused to your particular use of LinSig but are also easily transferable to other schemes Consult Assist can be provided in your own offices or at JCT s offices and can be tuned to match your particular needs and budgets Please contact us if this service is of interest to yOu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 LinSig Basics 2 LinSig Basics This section provides preliminary information on a range of LinSig issues including important definitions a suggested sequence of working and a summary of the user interface It is suggested new users read this section before using LinSig It would also be useful for users upgrading from earlier versions of LinSig to review the section as it concisely introduces a number of topics new to LinSig 3 2 1 Definitions This section introduces a number of useful concepts and definitions with which it is helpful to become familiar with before starting to use LinSig LinSig Network The LinSig Network describes the road network being modelled in a single LinSig file The Network size is in theory unlimited but is practically constrained by the time taken for LinSig to recalculate the traffic model and to optimise the signal timings Depending on the complexity of the network Networks modelled with the gre
215. erved Warning This software is protected by copyright law Unauthorised copying is explicit prohibited Activation Details Activation Status Demo Mode Activate Operating System Windows Vista Service Pack 2 eae Display Technical Support Diagnostics Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 295 2 Clicking the Activate button will start the activation process by requesting the type of activation In this case select the first option labelled 1PC 4PC or 10PC Licence Activation for Unlimited Network Licences is covered later in this section Choose Activation Method f 1 PC 4PC or 10 PC licences In order to activate this product please enter your licence ID below then click Continue to proceed with the activation process Your licence ID will have been supplied to you as part of pour software package Licence ID Office Location Computer User Ret This should be something that can be used to reference this installation later for example a Computer Name or the User s Name or just an 3 internal reference number Continue f Network Unlimited Licence Activate Later 3 Find your LinSig Site Licence ID This is the six character code shown on both the order documentation accompanying LinSig and also on the LinSig CD An example of its format is LJCT14 If you do not know your Licence ID please contact JCT Consultancy at this point to obtain it Havi
216. es between estimated and true saturation flows can lead to potentially much more significant differences between modelled and surveyed queues It is not recommended to use RR6 for estimating saturation flows for signalled roundabout circulatory Lanes as the closely spaced entry and circulatory stop lines often affect each other s effective saturation flow Modelling an entry saturation flow that is higher than the immediate downstream circulatory saturation flow will often lead to inaccurate modelling of queuing on the circulatory lanes See Sliver Queues for more information Specifying Lane Saturation Flows Manually Lane Saturation Flows are entered manually by selecting Directly Entered Lane Saturation Flow in the Edit Lane dialog box and entering a default saturation flow rate in PCU Hr If desired a different saturation flow for each Traffic Flow Group can be specified by unticking Default in the Flow Group List below the Default Saturation Flow and specifying a custom Flow Group specific value Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 79 Directly Entered Lane Saturation How Am 1 Lane 1 Default Saturation Flow PCU Hr 1800 Howgroup 2006 Friday AM Peak Saturation Flows can also be edited using the Lane Grid Data View which is often faster to use when changing a number of saturation flows Calculating Lane Saturation Flows from Lane Geometry As discussed above LinSig uses an extended version of the
217. eset Origin Zone Al Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm all Lane Al Comm Pedestrian Links are displayed as follows Handles j Pedestrian Link l DNES fone Pedestrian Link Connector Attachment Point Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 127 Pedestrian Links together with Pedestrian Link Connectors form a Pedestrian Network for each LinSig Junction Pedestrian movements between junctions are not modelled Due to issues such as pedestrian dispersion crossing at places other than a controlled crossing and leaving the Network between Junctions modelling pedestrians over a wider area is complex and beyond what LinSig is intended to model LinSig uses each Junction s Pedestrian Network to model Pedestrian walk and delay times from one side of the Junction to another If this involves several crossings LinSig takes account of Pedestrian coordination when modelling delays 4 3 10 1 Creating New Pedestrian Links New Pedestrian Links can be created in the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Pedestrian Link from the Pedestrian Links pop out menu on the Network menu A new Pedestrian Link will be created which can be dragged into its desired position and dropped by clicking with the mouse If necessary the Pedestrian Link can be rotated and repositioned more accurately after it has been created as described below in Moving and Repositioning Pedestri
218. ets LinSig can display controller offset timings relative to a master controller for easy extraction into the SCATS system 4 2 1 Using Drive on the Right for Graphical Views LinSig can be set to display Graphical Views using Drive on the Right logic as follows e Choose Network Settings from the LinSig Network Menu This will open the Network Settings dialog box e Click the Graphical Settings tab of the Network Settings dialog box e Choose Right for the Drive Side Option This setting should be set before beginning to build a model as LinSig cannot convert a Drive on the left model to a Drive on the right model or vice versa 4 2 2 Using SCATS Based Terminology LinSig can be set to use traffic signals terminology compatible with a SCATS controller For example a Stage in UK terminology is referred to as a Phase in a SCATS controller and a UK Phase is referred to as a Signal Group LinSig can be set to use SCATS Based terminology as follows e Open the Program Settings dialog box by choosing Program Settings from the LinSig File menu e Tick the Setting Use SCATS Based terminology e Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog box LinSig will display a warning reminding you to restart LinSig before proceeding e Restart LinSig LinSig will now use SCATS Based terminology The Status bar confirms that SCATS Based mode is in use Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 54 Vie
219. eviation from Equilibrium This measures the closeness of the assignment to perfect user equilibrium route flows Generally a value of 1 is considered a good fit for a larger network however it is often possible to achieve 0 25 or lower for a smaller network e Alternatively the assignment can be run for a Scenario by clicking the Assign Flows button for a Scenario in the Scenario View Scenarios View telee CS D Automatically recalculate results for All Scenarios When pme LEL N ENG optimise for An Scenarios ga pa B f a Nabe Semone fon Gowe Nevotk Conie fons O Tme Cycle Time PRC Delay pcuHr __Status Mark 1 AM Peak AM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 14 0 26 76 Delay Optimised 2 PM Peak PM Peak All Stages aa f 16 30 17 30 90 443 20 16 Delay Optimised 3 AM Peak 2015 AM Peak 2015 All Stages 08 00 09 00 90 11 1 30 08 Delay Optimised PM Peak 2015 PM Peak 2015 All Stages T 16 30 17 30 90 33 6 22 79 Delay Optimised Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 190 View Reference 4 12 2 5 Traffic Flow Assignment Options The Traffic Flow Assignment Options dialog box is opened by selecting a Scenario and choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on Current Scenario Traffic Flow Assignment Options Delay Based Assignment Traffic Zones to Assign This will assign traffic to routes so that the journey ti
220. ew Phases within the Phase Sequence can also be reordered by dragging with the mouse Alternatively and more quickly a numerical Phase Sequence can be entered into the sequence column of the Phase Sequence List e Add Network Control Plans Using the Network Control Plans View create Network Control Plans to specify the Phase Sequence running on each Controller Network Control Plans avoid the need to re specify each Controllers Phase Sequence for every Scenario Typically a Network Control Plan will be created for each different Network wide signal sequencing strategy e Define Modelling Scenarios A Scenario associates together a Traffic Flow Group Network Control Plan Cycle Time Phase lengths and Route Flows providing LinSig with all the information it needs to calculate model results Providing there are no errors in the model LinSig will always display model results for the current Scenario which can be selected from the main toolbar or in the Scenario View LinSig will initially use arbitrary Phase Lengths but these can easily be changed for the current Scenario either manually using the Signal Timings View as detailed below or automatically using the optimisation facilities LinSig will then recalculate the model results for the new Phase Lengths The Scenario View can also be used to optimise a number of Scenarios at once as a batch and to assign OD matrices to the Scenario s Routes e Changing Signal Times using the Signal Timings V
221. ey implicitly assume traffic equally distributes between all Lanes in the MultiLane group This can reduce calibration effort when it is known that traffic behaves in this way as it avoids the need to calibrate separate independent Lanes to have an equal distribution of traffic e They make the transition from LinSig 2 to LinSig 3 more straightforward as they avoid the requirement to immediately restructure the model s Lane structure in LinSig 3 Obviously there will often be benefits in restructuring Lanes in LinSig 3 and this should be carried out for most models MultiLanes simply allow this step to be deferred An important point to remember is that if a MultiLane is incorrectly used in a situation where traffic does not split equally between Lanes the model will almost always predict a better performance than reality Wherever a MultiLane is used the above assumptions should be checked to ensure the validity of the model 28 Edit Lane 1 1 Multiple Lane Representation Enable Flared Saturation Flows Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Number Of Lanes 2 Sat flow data Enter the number of lanes that this represents on the street Sa B Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead A multijane represents a group of lanes l that behave and will be modelled in an identical manner You must also ensure that the Saturation Scenario Flow and any give way parameters are Not in use values that represent all lanes lt lt Previous
222. f the Network which require detailed modelling to be defined using Matrix Based methods whilst the rest of the Network is modelled using Lane Based Flows Lane Base Flows will usually be sufficiently accurate where flow patterns are simple for example an arterial road with little side road traffic relative to the main road but may not be sufficiently detailed for complex situations for example a signal roundabout Remember that the size of Network and other factors as discussed above may mean that it is sometimes simpler and more efficient to model the whole Network using either Matrix Based or Lane Based flow definition methods If it is easy to model the whole Network using a Matrix this will often be the best choice as full accuracy is maintained across the Network 3 2 3 1 Determining Regions which may Require more Detailed Modelling Generally Lane Based Flow Methods will be sufficiently accurate when the turning proportions of flow leaving a Lane or larger section of Network do not depend significantly on the where the flow has come from For example this would occur if all traffic turned 30 left 70 right from a Lane regardless of where it has come from lf the situation is more complex and traffic turning left INTO the Lane will exit 30 left 70 right but traffic turning right INTO the Lane will exit 80 left 20 right this indicates routing is important and should be considered This can be done using either Matrix Based methods if f
223. f the data files contain data for those Junctions You can specify to only import data into selected Junctions impot SCATS How Data Wizard Choose Junctions to import data into Tick the Junctions that you wish to import the SCATS How Data into Junctions with no Detectors specified whose Site number is not present in the data file s cannot be ticked for import Junction In Data File SCATS Site Detectors J1 Westem Junction Yes 2260 g J Fulham Rd Oxford Rd Yes 2213 9 J3 Queen Street Meadow Lane Yes 2 15 6 J4 Fulham Road Kings Bridge Yes 2279 f Import wt wt E iw 4 28 3 3 Selection of Flow Groups to import flow data into You can choose to import flow data into one or more Flow Groups at once For each Flow Group selected LinSig will import flow data corresponding to the time period specified in the Flow Group For example if a Flow Group is specified as being 08 00 09 00 only the flow data between 08 00 and 09 00 will be imported from the data files Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 254 View Reference Import SCATS How Data Wizard Choose How Groups to import data into Detector Alarms Tick the Flow that y ish to i the SCATS Flow Data i nrc e pheno ka Fiw interpolate the count for detector alarms Groups cannot be ticked for impart C Treat detector alarms as a count of zero Lane based Flow Layer To Import To General Traffic Import Fow Group en Duration Type If Fi AM Pea
224. fact that traffic on the opposing Lane will take a few seconds to clear before a Give Way Lane can start to discharge Its value will depend on the size of the junction and should be measured on site where possible The Clear Conflict Time is often ignored in some models and may be a cause of differences between model results The Clear Conflict Time can be specified separately for each opposing Lane o Opposing Movements Each Opposing Lane may itself have a number of Movements each of which may or may not oppose the Give Way Lane The Opposing Movements column allows which of the movements leaving the Opposing Lane actually oppose the Give Way Lane to be defined If all movements oppose the All Opposing box can be left ticked If one or more movements do not oppose the All Opposing box can be unticked and the boxes next to each individual opposing movement ticked or unticked as appropriate Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 90 View Reference Storage in Front of Stop Line Settings iSq Edit Lane 1 2 General Lane Details This is a signal controlled Right Turn giving way to oncoming traffic Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed lf Does the lane have Right Turn Storage in front of the stopline Sat flow da Multi Lane Advanced ta Right Turn Storage in Front Of Stopline FEU Max Right Turns In Intergreen PEU Right Turn Mave Up 5 2 M Auto Calc Using Storage Right Turn Factor 0 5 Allow Edit Storage in front of
225. ference between Counts and modelled flows is given 4 13 6 3 Resolving Validation Problems The following provides suggestions on how to improve a Networks Validation It is not intended to be exhaustive but provides some starting points to consider e Check cruise times are realistic as incorrect Route times will lead to LinSig assigning traffic to incorrect Routes Route travel times provide a good check on assignment routing decisions e Check Lane Connectors allow traffic Routes which exist in reality Missing Lane Connecters can lead to LinSig assigning traffic incorrectly e Check missing Counts haven t forced LinSig into estimating uncounted matrix cells as zero Although this won t lead to a direct validation problem as there is no Count to validate against it may lead to incorrect delays being calculated which distort the routing pattern in the Network e Check that capacities and delays are being correctly calculated especially where they affect route choice Incorrect saturation flows which imply incorrect capacity calculation can easily lead to quite large errors in delay which can distort Routing within the Network e Check that signal timings in the Scenario being validated are representative of the timings used for the time period being validated Incorrect signal timings may bias traffic onto different Routes than those used in reality when traffic was counted leading to poor validation Where signal timings are unknown it
226. finition you wish to add the Fragment to in the Report Definitions List e Select the Fragment to be added from the Available Fragments List e Select the position where the Fragment is to be inserted in the Report Definition by selecting the Fragment in the Report Definition immediately before the desired insertion position e Click Add Fragment to current Report Definition button or the button between the Available Fragment List and the Report Definition The Fragment will be inserted into the Report Definition e f the Fragment is shown in Red indicating the Fragment requires Repeat Select options to be set or the Fragment is inserted into the wrong place these problems can be corrected by moving the Fragment up or down the list as described below Removing a Fragment from a Report Definition A Fragment can be removed from a Report Definition as follows e Select the Fragment to be removed in the Report Definition e Click the button between the Available Fragment List and the Report Definition The Fragment will be removed from the Report Definition e Once the Fragment has been removed all custom options for that Fragment are lost and would need to be reset if the fragment was reinserted into the Report Definition Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 271 Changing the Order of Fragments in a Report Definition The Fragments in a Report Definition can be reordered to customise the layou
227. flows called Lane Based Flows and also allows LinSig Networks to be structured to use the existing Matrix Based traffic flow definition methods in areas where detail is required whilst using the simpler Lane Based Flow methods across the rest of the Network 3 2 2 Flow Definition Methods However traffic flows are defined the objective is to determine traffic flows on individual Lanes possibly disaggregated by traffic type traffic movements passing through the lane or some other criteria The traffic flow on each Lane can then be used by LinSig to calculate results The two available methods of defining traffic flows are e Matrix Based Flows Matrix Based Flows are similar to the method of defining traffic flows in LinSig prior to LinSig 3 1 The following information is used to determine traffic flows on Lanes o An Origin Destination Matrix Each Traffic Flow Group defines an Origin Destination OD Matrix which specifies the total traffic flow for this Flow group between pairs of Zones o Route Flows The OD Matrix only specifies the total traffic flow travelling between a pair of Zones not the route or routes taken When using Matrix Based Flows each LinSig Scenario defines a set of Route Flows which specify the Routes taken by traffic travelling between each Zone pair A Route Flow can either be entered manually or can be estimated by LinSig using a standard traffic assignment user equilibrium algorithm to distribute traffic between
228. for all traffic flows Managing Lane Based Flow Layers Lane Based Flow Layers are defined using the Edit Lane Based Flow Layers dialog which can be opened by choosing Edit Lane Based Flows from the Traffic Flows menu or from the Network Layout View s toolbar Edit Lane Based Flow layers 1 B ceneral Traffic 2 Euse Creating a New Flow Layer A new Flow Layer can be created by clicking Add layer in the Edit Flow Layers dialog box This creates a new Flow Layer and opens the Edit Layer dialog box which can be used to set its initial settings as described below in Editing Flow Layers Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 107 Editing a Flow Layer A Flow Layer is editing by selecting the Layer in the Edit Flow Layers dialog and clicking on Edit Layer This opens the Edit Flow Layer dialog box Edit Lane Based Layer Layer Number 2 Name Buses Colour E i This layer models buses OK Cancel The Edit Flow Layer dialog box allows the following settings to be edited e Flow Layer Number This allows a Flow Layers number to be changed reordering the list of Flow Layers e Flow Layer Name The Flow Layer Name describes the Flow Layer with a title such as Buses Traffic to Development or HCV Traffic e Layer Colour The Colour LinSig will use when displaying Flows on the Flow Layer on the Network Layout View e This Layer Models Buses This setting tells L
229. ftware We regret having to require activation however it has become increasingly necessary over the past few years due to a high number of often inadvertent but serious multiple breaches of licence conditions The Activation procedure in LinSig 3 is identical to that in LinSig Version 2 A 4 1 Definitions The following definitions are useful in understanding the activation process e Installation ID A 30 character code that is unique for an installation of LinSig on a particular PC The Installation ID is created by LinSig and is based on a number of physical characteristics of the PC e Activation Code A 36 character code provided by JCT Consultancy to unlock or activate the software on the PC The Activation Code is calculated to be a match for an Installation ID and is therefore unique for each PC Only if a copy of LinSig s Installation ID has a correctly matching Activation Code will LinSig run Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 294 Examples e Licence Server A separate program that hands out licences to LinSig Workstations This is only used on sites with Unlimited Network Licences and avoids IT Staff or users having to separately activate each PC on the network The Licence Server also verifies PCs are actually located on the licensed site It would normally be installed and run on a server or other PC that is switched on all or most of the time users wish to use LinSig e Workstation The users computer on which LinSig is
230. g installation CD The Licence Server can run on Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 2008 Windows XP and Windows 2000 To install the Licence Server run setup exe from the relevant subfolder and follow the on screen prompts Once the Licence Server has been installed it needs to be activated to give out LinSig licences to Workstations This process is carried out using the Licence Server Administration Utility that is located on the Windows Start menu under JCT Consultancy LinSig Licence Server on the Licence Server PC This utility allows an administrator to activate the Licence Server for LinSig using a similar procedure to that described above for activating an Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 299 individually licensed Workstation Once activated no further activation is required for the Licence Server or Workstations except for major product upgrades or software support renewals The PC on which the Licence Server is installed should be continuously available to Workstations over the network whenever they are in use however each Workstation will store a local copy of its licence for a number of days allowing server restarts and maintenance to take place without adversely affecting LinSig users A 4 3 3 Telling Workstations Where to Find a Licence Server As Workstations default to being individually licensed each Workstation must be told to use a Licence Server and also where the Licence Serv
231. g Zones A Zone can be repositioned by dragging it to its new position with the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 104 View Reference 4 3 8 3 Editing Zones Zones are edited as follows e Select the Zone with the mouse e Choose Edit Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu e The Edit Zone dialog box is displayed which is identical to the Create Zone dialog described in Creating Zones above Edit one fone Arm Entering Network Arm Exiting Network Bus Zone all routes will be Bus Routes Bus flows should stil be entered in PCUs Cancel e The Zones settings can be changed in the same way as described above in Creating Zones Disconnecting a Zone from its entry or exit Arm will delete all Routes starting from or ending at the Zone depending on which Arm is disconnected Any traffic flow allocated to Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and the Actual Flows Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Routes through the disconnected Zone Connector should be reallocated to the new Routes created when the Zone is reconnected possibly to a different Arm This can be done either manually using the Route List View or by reallocating all flows to Routes by choosing Allocate OD Flows to Routes from the Routes menu More information is given in the section on the Traffic Flows View 4 3 8 4 Deleting Zones A Zone can be dele
232. g and Lane Groups LinSig 3 allows Lane arrangements to be specified in much more detail then previous versions As described above many settings such as Controlling Signal Group which would previously have been specified for a group of Lanes via a Link can now be specified for individual Lanes However where Short Lanes are used the Short Lane and its adjacent Long Lane will interact as traffic in one Lane may block traffic in the other Lane For example the Mean Max Queue is a measure of how far the queue extends back from the stop line and may comprise of traffic using either the Long Lane the Short Lane or a mixture of traffic from both Lanes However it can t be split into separate values for the Long and Short Lanes and therefore LinSig will report a single value for the Lane Group comprised of the Short and Long Lanes Prior to LinSig version 3 2 10 0 LinSig will only report a single combined capacity value for a Lane Group comprised of a Long and Short Lane In LinSig version 3 2 10 0 onwards it is possible to further refine this value into separate capacity values for the Long and Short Lanes You can enable this feature for any model using the Network Settings Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 71 1af Network Settings Traffic Model Cruise Time if not specified Cruise Speed if not specified Bus Speed if not specified New Lane Saturation Flow PCU Hr 1800 pou Hr Calc Delay and Stops per pou based on D
233. g the pushpin will force the View to remain on top of other Views even if one of the other Views is the active View where data is being edited If two or more Views are set to Always on Top and overlap the most recently active View will be on top When using this option you should be careful not to lose smaller Views behind larger Views set to Always on Top 2 3 2 New User Interface Concepts in LinSig 3 to Watch Out for LinSig 3 makes a number of important additions and changes to the User Interface used in LinSig 2 Some of the most useful ones to watch out for include Lane Based Modelling In previous versions of LinSig groups of Lanes called Links were used extensively to define the Network structure In LinSig 3 data entry has been simplified and modelling capabilities have been extended by a move to Lane based modelling In LinSig 3 most data is entered Lane by Lane instead of some for Lanes and some for Links As well as making data entry more straightforward many settings such as controlling signal Signal Group can be specified for individual Lanes rather than the Link as a whole as was required in LinSig 2 This allows a number of situations to be modelled in more detail and with fewer simplifying assumptions than in LinSig 2 This is described in more detail later in the User Guide Multiple Traffic Signal Controllers LinSig 3 allows multiple traffic signal Controllers to be defined and edited Generally Controller based vie
234. gative Bonus Greens less green time e f more than one Bonus Green Type is added they are summed together to give the total Bonus Green EA Lane Ti mings View Number Junction Display 1 Ji West Junction a J2 East Junction 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 0 5 10 15 20 25 3 35 40 45 S055 60 65 70 7 80 85 90 Time in cycle gsec Negative Bonus Green Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 17 Phase Overlap View 215 4 17 Phase Overlap View The Phase Overlap View is used to specify how a Signal Group should behave in the Clearance Interval between two running Phases By default any Signal Group that runs in consecutive Phases will remain green overlap during the Clearance Interval between the two Phases There may be situations where this should not be allowed to occur for example if a pedestrian movement is to be introduced at the start of the next Phase There may also be situations where a Signal Group should display green during the Clearance Interval even though the Signal Group does not run in either the preceding or the succeeding Phase 4 17 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Phase Overlap Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Phase Overlap View shows the Phase Overlap details for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a
235. ged the Timing Dials will change to reflect the Phase lengths in the new current Scenario 4 3 15 2 Editing the Settings for a Timing Dial An existing Timing Dial s settings can be edited at any time by double clicking the Timing Dial This will open the Edit Timing Dial dialog box which can be used to change its settings as described above in Adding a Timing Dial to the Network Layout View 4 3 15 3 Deleting a Timing Dial To delete a Timing Dial select the Dial with the mouse and choose Delete Timing Dial from the Timing Dials pop out on the Network Menu Alternatively right click on the Dial and choose Delete Timing Dial from the pop up menu 4 3 15 4 Adjusting Signal Settings using a Timing Dial As well as displaying the Phase lengths for the current Scenario the Timing Dial can be used to adjust the Phase Lengths as follows e Click on any Timing Dial phase change point handle and drag with the mouse LinSig will update the other views with the new phase times Alternatively the arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to incrementally change a Phase Change Point e All minimums pedestrian clearances etc are complied with as part of the dragging process e f Flow Profile and Queue Graphs are also displayed on the Network Layout View they are dynamically updated as the phase change points are changed This makes the combination of Timing Dials and embedded graphs very powerful for manually adjusting
236. ger travel times to Routes with shorter travel times LinSig then recalculates Route travel times for the changed Route flows before repeating the process many times When no traffic can be moved to a Route with a shorter travel time the assignment has converged and is complete In practice for medium and large networks it is impractical to attempt to achieve perfect convergence as LinSig will soend substantial time shuffling small amounts of traffic between routes which in practical engineering terms will be inconsequential It is important to remember that LinSig or any other equilibrium based assignment model is assigning traffic on the assumption that delay is the main determinant of route choice In some networks this may not be true for example where traffic signs direct traffic to take illogical longer routes In these cases local knowledge of routing behaviour manual adjustment of Route flows and Route flow locking should be used to achieve a more appropriate assignment In addition you can positively or negatively weight routes that use a specific Lane Connector by setting the Delay Based Assignment Cruise Time Weighting on the Lane Connector 4 12 2 4 Carrying out a Traffic Assignment in the Scenario View Traffic flows can be assigned for any Scenario as follows e Select the Scenario you wish to use to assign flows to be the Current Scenario by clicking on it in the Scenario View The Current Scenario is shown outlined in red a
237. gnored especially if very short allowing more critical right turn issues to be accurately modelled Advice on how to model such situations is given later in this User Guide Even with the above rules LinSig 3 imposes significantly less restrictions and provides more intuitive model construction than previous Link based versions of LinSig Common situations which previously required simplifying assumptions but can now be modelled directly include e Short left Lanes running on a separate Signal Group or arrow Signal Group This common situation can now be modelled with separate signalling on the Short Lane and separate modelling of traffic on each Lane Issues such as queuing ahead traffic preventing left turners getting to the Short Lane even though its arrow Signal Group is running are automatically dealt with The new models in LinSig 3 also remove the need to use LINSAT e Short Opposed Right Turn Lanes Although LinSig 2 4 and above could model right turn bays and their effect on adjacent Lane capacity the facility was limited to a subset of special cases LinSig 3 allows short right turn Lanes either opposed or separately signalled unopposed to be modelled directly and intuitively simply by defining the appropriate Lanes and specifying signalling turning movements etc separately for the Short Lane If you require any advice on how to model a particular situation please do not hesitate to contact JCT Software Support Short Lane Modellin
238. h LinSig Junction Each Junction OD Matrix specifies Pedestrian movements from each Origin Pedestrian Zone to each Destination Pedestrian Zone in Pedestrians per modelled time period where the modelled time period is specified by the Flow Group The Pedestrian OD Matrices are displayed as follows e Click the Pedestrian Mode button on the Traffic Flow View s toolbar to ensure Pedestrian Flows are being shown e Select the Junction for which the Pedestrian OD matrices are to be displayed in the Junction drop down list on the Traffic Flow View s toolbar e Choose either Desired Flows Actual Flows or Difference to display one of the three OD matrices described below e Only the Desired Flows Matrix can be edited the Actual Flows and difference matrices are for error checking output only The basis of the Desired Flows Actual Flows and Difference Matrix are the same as described above but obviously applying to pedestrians rather than traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 152 View Reference Modelling Pedestrians when No Pedestrian Flow Data is Available In many cases pedestrian flow data will not be available for one or more Junctions being modelled This is not necessarily a major problem as it is still possible to model pedestrian delay at junctions even when no pedestrian data is available The main points to consider are e f no pedestrian flow data is available pedestrian flows should be entered as 1
239. h as signalled roundabouts and road networks which may include traffic signal pedestrian crossings and priority junctions as well as traffic signal junctions Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 Introduction LinSig has been available in a number of versions since 1985 and is the original software package for UK detailed traffic signal design The software is used by the majority of UK highway authorities and consultants at several hundred locations making it the most widely used traffic signal design and analysis software in the UK Throughout its life it has been regularly and extensively upgraded including several complete rewrites as computer technology and user requirements have changed and evolved The idea behind LinSig is straightforward in that it models operation at traffic signal junctions in a similar way to how real traffic signal controllers at junctions actually work This means that LinSig takes account of the features and constraints of the controlling equipment thereby ensuring that all modelling accurately reflects how existing junctions work and how any design proposals would operate if implemented LinSig is particularly appropriate for option testing and has been designed to make it easy to test large numbers of options quickly allowing unfeasible designs or scheme options to be quickly rejected or improved 1 2 What s New in Version 3 of LinSig LinSig for Windows Version 3 was released in 2009 and introduced a numbe
240. h part of the View is printed on each page Each Print Zone can have scaling defined independently and pre defined title blocks can be added to each page Most Views can of course also be embedded in a LinSig Report and printed with the rest of the report via a word processor This is covered in the Reporting section LinSig allows multi page print layouts to be set up and stored enabling consistent layout and scaling between print sessions Print Zones are used to set up the scaling and other settings for each printed page each Zone corresponding to one page f 7 Network Layout View w fo fe alel clala BF 2 2 2 8 N KNIE hi AIEK amp Find Junction P Find Arm pO 51 t ae 2 Arm 5 ar Arm 1 London Road Arm 2 High Street oe Arm 4 qm lt Fig a a nw te a bere in LNA s ms haty hes og amp AN a KY l n fi 4 2A a ai x k N gt uo i 9 erho TARN s High StLondon Rd Park St RC 239 Nee DS pour Ave Route Delay PerPed 60 7 s Ped Print Zone WANS Wed E Wy Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All y Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Lane All Destination Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 264 Reporting and Printing As shown in above a Print Zone is a rectangular area of a View and defines the content that will be included on the printed page corresponding to the Print Zone Any number of Print Zones can be defined
241. he average delay per PCU incurred on a signal controlled Lane or a flow weighted average over all signalled Lanes when considering a Junction or the Network LinSig allows you to redefine the various levels of delay that correspond to the levels A to F These can be redefined per model in the Network Settings or the default values can be redefined to be used for all new files Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 10 LinSig Basics 2 2 Working with LinSig Files LinSig stores all the information relating to a Network in a single file LinSig 3 introduces a new file format different to previous versions of LinSig which allows the large amount of extra information used in LinSig 3 to be stored To distinguish a LinSig 3 file from files from previous versions a file extension of Isg3x is used LinSig 3 can open files from previous versions of LinSig but can only save in LinSig 3 format due to the large number of new features Don t forget that each LinSig 3 licence allows a copy of LinSig 2 to be installed on the same PC to provide a facility to edit files for older projects which don t require upgrading to LinSig 3 format 2 2 1 Creating a new LinSig File A new LinSig File is created by choosing New from the LinSig File menu This closes any current file open in LinSig before creating a new empty model The file is not actually saved on disk until saved using Save As as described below 2 2 2 Opening an existing LinSig 3 File An e
242. he difference in flow or delay between two different Scenarios A pair of Scenarios can be compared as follows e Switch the Network Results View into Bandwidth Mode as detailed above e On the Bandwidihs toolbar displayed in the Network Results View change the Bandwidths mode setting to Scenario Compare e On the Bandwidths Toolbar select two Scenarios to compare using the drop down lists e Select whether to compare Flows or Delays using the Diff by drop down list Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 143 4 3 17 Rotating and Scaling Network Items Segments of the LinSig Network Layout View can be quickly scaled and or rotated as follows e Select the Network Items to be scaled whilst holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard This will select multiple Network Items Many Items can be selected at once by selecting a Junction e Choose Scale and Rotate Selected Items from the Network menu This will open the Rotate amp Scale dialog box Rotate And Scale E Angle to rotate Scale percent W Apply rotation to Phases Close e The selected items can be rotated or scaled dynamically by dragging the Angle to rotate and Scale Percent sliders 37 Network Layout View 7 Rotate And Scale BIB SA elek AAAA EA RE E Angle to rotate Scale percent 1 V Apply rotation to Phases 2 0 pour cme Per Ped 39 2 s Ped Conrroilier
243. he identifiers of the LinSig Arms that the counted traffic turns through The following snippet provides an example of the CSV file format The first line contains a Count of 513 PCUs turning from Arm J2 1 to Arm J2 4 The second line contains a Count of 152 PCUs turning from Arm J2 1 to Arm J2 5 Counted traffic turning through multiple Arms Sometimes traffic is counted making a movement that is represented in the LinSig model as a path through multiple Arms For example the right turn of a roundabout may pass through an entry Arm and two circulatory Arms before finally exiting the roundabout at an exit Arm LinSig allows you to enter Count values for these type of movements by using the CSV import facility described above In the example CSV file snippet shown above the last line Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 201 contains a Count of 275 PCUs turning from Arm J1 2 passing through Arm J2 4 and finally reaching Arm J3 2 Note that importing from a CSV file is currently the only way in LinSig to specify Counts that turn through multiple Arms 4 13 4 2 Managing Zone Totals using the Matrix Estimation View Zone totals define the total amount of traffic which has been counted leaving or entering each Zone Zone totals can be specified as follows e Asan implied total calculated from turning counts on the Arm feeding or being fed by the Zone e As an explicit Zone origin or destination total which has
244. he most recently used View will be on top Tip Avoid having a large View with Always on Top switched on as it is very easy to lose smaller Views behind it 4 1 2 Zoom and Pan The main graphical layout Views can be zoomed and panned using both the toolbars and the mouse Zooming can be carried out using the zoom toolbar located on the main toolbar of each of the zoomable Views 2 91 21 82 Zoom Toolbar The toolbar buttons are from left to right e Zoom to fit View contents to Window e Zoom View in e Zoom View out e Zoom to Max e Zoom to Min e Size Window to fit View Contents at current Zoom level Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 52 View Reference If your mouse is equipped with a mouse wheel the zoomable views can be rapidly zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel backwards and forwards The direction of zoom can be reversed if desired using Program Options on the File menu 4 1 3 Defaults Colours and Visual Settings LinSig can use a range of default settings many of which can be changed to custom values specific to your individual usage Defaults and Visual settings are split into groups These are e File Specific Settings These settings are located on the Graphical Settings tab of the Network Settings dialog box This can be opened by choosing Network Settings from the Network menu The tab contains settings which relate to the layout of the Network Layout View and other Views wh
245. he warning and clicking the Do not Hide this Item button in the Error View s toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 243 4 27 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks Many users will have large numbers of existing LinSig models of single Junctions or small Networks LinSig allows Networks to be merged together to create new larger Networks to allow the modelling of larger areas XF Network Layout View A oae 35 Network Layout View aea fe Sle ald aleeseen sle LE SSS fo SIS elel All e Sia ael B21 2 21 8 2 sie are SI Bak elle a aala Find Junction zl Find Arm xl m g fiat Find Junction x Find Arm xl mje g aaa PE F East Junction West Junction ry A inn sma A AN iaa od Delay 6 1 pcuHr Total Traffic Delay 3 9 pcuHr es l 11 51 eo _ I 1 2 i A ee _ Arm 5 Pane ore Arm 1 High St EB a 2 os peri Arm 2 High St WB A p 2 2 o eo a S gle 2 ele 5 i ee o gt ml 4i bod oo ____ _ a te poe Arm 2 High St WB oe 51 8 M jai Arm 1 High St EB N g a Am5 pE a AM a oe 1 2 l Route Filter Reset Origin Zone Al v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc Al Arm All LanefAl Dest Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane All v Contains Junc All v Armf Al Lane All Destinatior
246. his allows the Junction s settings to be entered 4 Edit Junction Junction Number Juncton Name Is Signal Controlled 1 High St London Rd Park St C1 Lincoln Road North St SCATS Site Number 1032 e The following settings are available for the Junction O Junction Number The Junction Number will default to one more than the maximum Junction Number of the existing Junctions Junctions can be numbered in any order but all Junction Numbers must be used with no gaps in the sequence If the new Junction is allocated the same number as an existing Junction the new Junction will be inserted into the Junction numbering sequence and higher numbered Junctions renumbered Junction Name A descriptive name for the Junction Is Signal Controlled Setting This setting specifies whether Controller associations in the next settings can be specified for this Junction Junction Controller This specifies the traffic signal controller s which control the Junction Normally a Junction will only be controlled by a single Controller however in rare cases a large or complex junction may be controlled by two or more Controllers e Click OK to finish creating the Junction Remember that Junctions and many other Items can also be added using right click pop up menus as well as from the main menu This may be quicker in some circumstances 4 3 4 2 Moving and Repositioning Junctions Junctions can be manipulated as follows
247. hlighting the differences between the two models This is done intelligently rather than just comparing the text of two Model Audit Views To compare two Scenarios e Ensure the Audit Compare Two Scenarios option is selected in the Model Audit View toolbar e Click the Compare button on the Model Audit View toolbar and select the Scenarios you are comparing e LinSig will display the comparison of the Scenarios in the Model Audit View Differences between the two models will be highlighted e tis possible to step through the differences using the lt and gt buttons and also to go directly to any particular difference by entering its position in the list of differences and clicking the Go button It is also possible to use the lt lt and gt gt to go directly to the first or last difference Remember that the comparison is of the Model Audit information which includes all important engineering data It does not include minor settings such as assignment or optimisation settings so an identical Model Audit Comparison means the traffic engineering behind Scenarios is the same but does not necessarily mean that they are identical 6 Model Audit View H ee Audit options Display options C Audit Current Scenario Hide All Show All Print Audit Compare Two Scenarios C Audit C e With Another File Compare Differences ES Oo Go to Phase Data Hide Back To Top Late Mini
248. iated Long Lane Lanes can be further broken down to show Route Layers o Pedestrian Links Performance statistics for individual Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links can be further broken down by direction of movement Each item can be expanded and collapsed as appropriate to manage the amount of information shown How many and which data columns are displayed are also fully customisable e The Network Summary This includes a summary of the performance of each Controller and of the Network as a whole Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 220 View Reference 4 20 1 1 Display Settings The Network Results View Display Settings control which results are shown and how they are displayed Results Filter The Results Filter allows the Results List to be filtered by a range of criteria to reduce the amount of information shown The filter criteria are e All Shows all the available Lanes or other Items e Lane Shows all the Routes passing through a specified Lane e Route Shows all the Lanes along a specified Route e Show Exit Lanes If Show Exit Lanes is un ticked the Network Results View omits Exit Lanes from the Results List e Show Non Zero Layers Routes Routes Layers break down the results on each Lane to give the delays or other statistics for each individual Route or Lane based Flow Layer passing through a Lane Often this level of detail isn t required and the Show Non Zero Layers Routes option can be un ticked simpl
249. ic queuing in the Long Lane prevents traffic from entering the Short Lane Right Turn Storage Area The Right Turn Storage Area is the space within the centre of a junction where right turning traffic can wait in front of the stop line to turn in gaps in the oncoming traffic This graph shows the traffic entering and leaving the Storage Area Each of the above graphs is presented in the same way A typical LinSig Flow Profile graph shows the following information This example is for a constant arrival rate although more complex examples follow exactly the same principles Queue Traffic arriving and Discharging immediately leaving on at Saturation _ s _ s Green Flow Link 2 1 All Rouges 1800 1800 1500 1500 1200 1200 ERON 900 900 600 600 300 300 0 0 AMANAN 000000000 CO 4 36 48 60 72 84 j Time in Green cycle Traffic arriving on Period Red and Queueing Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 25 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 235 4 25 3 1 Creating Flow Profile Graphs Flow Profile Graphs are created as described above and selecting Flow Graph as the Graph Type 4 25 3 2 Controlling the Display of Flow Profile Graphs The display of Flow Profile Graphs can be customised in a number of ways These include e Graph Scaling and Sizing e Showing Inflows and Outflows on separate graphs e Showing separate graphs for each Route through a Lane e Showing the individual Route Flow Components on one aggregate graph Scaling Graphs
250. ich are likely to be specific to an individual file rather than for a user For example a very detailed network may look better with a smaller text size or narrower lanes These settings are therefore stored in the LinSig file so they are used whenever the file is opened by any user e Default Settings for New Files The Default Settings for new files are located on the Defaults for New Files and Graphical Defaults for New Files tabs of the Defaults for New Files dialog box This is opened by choosing Defaults for New Files from the File menu These settings only apply to new files created in LinSig and once set avoid the need to setup your preferred File Specific Settings in each new file e User Graphics Settings These settings are located on the Graphics Options and Colour Options tabs of the Graphics Settings dialog box This is opened by choosing Graphics Settings from the File menu The User Graphics Settings affect display issues such as colours line thicknesses and font sizes which do not affect the Junction Layout and can therefore be specified by personal preference rather than being tied to each file Each LinSig file opened will be displayed using the User Graphics Settings e Program Settings These settings are located in the Program Options dialog box which is opened by choosing Program Settings from the File menu The Program Settings affect a number of aspects regardi
251. icular Flow Group Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time The Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time tab allows cruise speeds times to be specified for an Entry Lane at the edge of the Network Normally cruise speeds are specified on a Lane s incoming Lane Connectors As Entry Lanes have no incoming Lane Connectors the Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time tab is used to specify cruise soeeds times iSq Edit Lane 1 1 Default cruise time for all routes and layers through this Entry Lane f Time s 40 Speed km Hr 31 BE Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead When modelling buses Mean Bus Stopped Time s 0 Bus Speed km hr Mean Cruise lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel The cruise speed time and other settings are specified in the same way as on a Lane Connector Further details are given in the Edit Lane Connector section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 78 View Reference Saturation Flow Data The Saturation Flow Data tab allows saturations flows to be specified for the Lane iSq Edit Lane 1 1 General Geometric Calculated Lane Saturation Flow Arm 1 Lane 1 Directly Entered Lane Saturation Flow Arm 1 Lane 1 Lane Details 25 0 00 Default Saturation Flow PCU Hr 1800 Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Flow Group Sat Flow Default 2006 Friday AM Peak 1800 iw MB Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Calculated Turning Proportions are for Current Flow Group Unconstrained Infinite Saturation Flow lt lt P
252. iew The initial results displayed by LinSig will be calculated using an initial effectively random set of Phase Lengths for each Controller The current Phase times being used can be displayed using the Signal Timings View which also shows the duration of Signal Groups and details the structure of the Phase Running Intervals and Clearance Intervals Phase Lengths can easily be changed by dragging Phase Change Points with the mouse LinSig dynamically updates model results for the new Phase lengths as the times are changed e Checking for Errors using the Error View If Errors or Warnings exist in the Model an indicator on the Status Bar at the bottom of the LinSig main Window will indicate so The Error View can be opened by double clicking on the Error Indicator This View lists all Errors and Warnings and wherever possible indicates their location Errors prevent the model from calculating results Warnings allow results to be calculated but indicate that LinSig thinks some data or setting may be dubious and needs checking Information Warnings are LinSig bringing your attention to something you need to be aware of Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 29 e Estimate Matrix If LinSig s matrix estimation procedure is being used to estimate the OD Matrix it can be carried out at this point in the modelling sequence as Scenarios have now been defined e Assign OD Matrix to a Scenario s Routes Each LinSig Route is
253. iews 257 shown in white with any Late Start and Early Cut off Green periods in blue and the Clearance period in grey If the Network contains more than one Controller the currently selected Controller is displayed in the Animation Control e The Animation Speed Slider The animation speed is controlled by the vertical Slider to the right of the Animation Control Toolbar The animation speed can be increased by slider the slider down or decreased by sliding the slider up The animation speed can be varied between real time and 40x real time e Queue Display Settings This section controls whether to display animated queues in the Network Layout View and queue scaling settings 4 29 2 Viewing Animation in the Network Layout View The Network Layout View displays the animation in several ways These are e The Lanes are coloured red or green depending on whether the Lane s Controlling Signal Group is running at the current point in the cycle lt Network Layout View A ees w aR gt aleeden IS SIS B amp amp BES Find Junction Find Arm me g i gz wy we A WS ynog E zp uwy E ooo eo i 10 oo e ee 9 l 2 4 a A _____ Arm J1 5 Arm J2 2 High St WB Arm J2 4 a 27 Arm J1 1 High St EB he preia soc hese SO JA Arm J1 4 Arm J1 2 High St WB Arm J2 5 a i Ep E es cp Jt West Junction os Pac 365 J2 East Junction AN E Taoa cub oe Commaiier
254. ific Routes or Layers By ticking the This rule applies to specific routes or layers tick box the Override will apply only to the Routes or Flow Layers selected in the list underneath You can choose for the Override to apply to either selected Routes or selected Flow Layers by selecting either the Routes or Layers button e All Flow Groups By unticking the This rule applies to specific Flow Groups tick box the Override will apply to all Flow Groups e Specific Flow Groups By ticking the This rule applies to specific Flow Groups tick box the Override will apply only to the Flow Groups selected in the list underneath e Edit Override Data For this Override the cruise speed time and bus stop time can be edited using the Edit Override data button 4 3 7 3 Deleting a Lane Connector A Lane Connector can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Lane Connector from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Lane Connector will also delete the following e Any Routes passing through the Lane Connector Any traffic flow allocated to Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and the Actual Flows Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Routes through the deleted Lane Connector should be reassigned either to Routes through other Lanes Connectors or to any Routes through new Lane Connectors replacing the deleted Lan
255. ified It should not be seen as a convenient way of reducing the queue on an inconvenient Lane Mean Max Queue The Mean Max Queue is the sum of the Maximum Back of Queue in the modelled typical cycle and the calculated Random amp Oversaturated Queue The Mean refers to the fact that it is the mean over a number of cycles of the maximum queue occurring each cycle Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig 39 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig This section discusses options for structuring the Network and defining traffic flows in LinSig Further details of the techniques discussed are given in the View Reference Section 3 2 1 Background and Version Differences An important decision with any LinSig model especially larger models is how the Network should be structured and the related issue of how traffic flows will be defined Prior to LinSig 3 1 the only option for entering traffic flows was to use an Origin Destination Matrix for the entire Network Although this provided the maximum level of detail it could lead to long run times on large models required the production of a Network wide OD Matrix which could be onerous for larger models and required the same level of detail to be used for the entire model not just the smaller area where detail was required LinSig 3 1 introduces an additional less detailed method with which to define traffic
256. ify how traffic can flow through the Junction Network Layout View oe w SIR alala Eleegia 61S are SPSS PO SIS Sli laa Find Junction Find Arm mea g Layer Filter 51 Arm 5 i E a i ie hoo Arm 1 London Road ae l A di w Arm 2 High Street Tan n 1 i pn ph Arm 4 Se L A High St London Rd Park St Total Traffic Delay 133 6 pcuHr Awe Route Delay Per Ped TT 2 Ped Level Of Service F BaS Wey E Wy l Route Filter Reset Origin Zone Al Arm all Lane All Contains Junc Al Arm all Lane All Conni 4 3 1 Network Building Overview The section The LinSig Modelling Process in the LinSig Basics chapter describes a suggested sequence of steps for building a LinSig model The Network Layout View is used for a number of steps in this process The key tasks carried out in the Network Layout View are e Create LinSig Junctions for each real Junction e Add Arms to each Junction to reflect the Network Structure The Network Arm Structure described below is recommended e Add Lanes to each Arm to reflect the Lane layout within each Junction e Join Lanes on different Arms using Lane Connectors e Edit Lanes to set Saturation Flows and give way settings Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 58 View Reference e f using a Matrix Based Flows add Zones to define the entry and exit points for the Network e f using Lane Based Flows specify flows us
257. ifying the Network Results View PCU and Capacity Values The PCU and Capacity Values setting controls whether results are shown for the whole modelled time period or for a typical cycle within the modelled time period The columns affected by this setting are e Demand Flow e Capacity e Flow Entering Lane e Flow Leaving Lane e Right Turners in Gaps e Right Turners in Intergreen e Right Turners When Unopposed e Uniform Stops Results which are expressed as a rate for example flow or delay per hour are not affected by this setting Column Sets The Network Results View provides many columns of results of which only a proportion need to be displayed at any one time depending on the level of detail required As it is common to need to view different levels of detail in the Network at different times the Network Results View allows two standard sets of displayed columns to be defined These can then be recalled at any time without having to reselect each individual column to be displayed or hidden Defining a Column Set A column set can be defined by selecting the columns for display as detailed below and clicking save next to one of the column sets Displaying a Column Set A Column Set can be displayed by clicking on Use next to one of the Column Sets Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 20 Network Results View 221 View Type The View Type allows the Network Results View to be displayed as a hierarchal T
258. ig models a much wider range of standard lane arrangements more intuitively there are still a number of golden rules to remember when constructing a model These are e Each real lane is modelled as a single LinSig Lane Real lanes are never grouped together into a single LinSig Lane with a higher Saturation Flow as was the case with Links in earlier versions e A Short Lane is always associated with an adjacent Long Lane which feeds traffic into it Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 70 View Reference e A Long Lane can only be associated with a single Short Lane This means that situations such as a Long Lane feeding a Short Lane which in turn feeds an even shorter Lane cannot be directly modelled as such and require simplifying assumptions in a similar way to previous versions of LinSig The need to use simplifying assumptions will be less common than in previous versions Advice on how to model such situations is given later in this User Guide e A Long Lane can only have a Short Lane attached to one side Long Lanes with a Short Lane on both sides currently also require simplifying assumptions as in previous versions of LinSig For example where an Arm contains a single Long Lane with a left and a right Short Lane a lightly trafficked short right turn Lane would be modelled as a separate Long Lane allowing the left turn Lane and Long Lane to modelled with full accuracy Alternatively if the right turn was critical the left turn Lane could be i
259. ignal Group Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 216 View Reference EE Phase Overlap View lt Previous A gt B Next gt SGroup From A 1 Green 2 Green 3 5 7 Ped Green 8 Ped Green Overlap Default Yes Default Mo Yes Default Mo Default Mo Default Yes To B Green Green Green Green Override the default overlap for a Signal Group by clicking in the overlap column By default the Signal Group runs in the overlap if it runs in both the current Phase and the next Phase 4 17 2 1 Phase Change Selection The Phase Overlap View allows the current Phase Change to be selected by either e Selecting a Phase Change from the drop down list in the Phase Overlap View e Using the Previous and Next buttons in the Phase Overlap View to cycle through all possible Phase Changes The Phase Overlap View allows you to define overlap behaviour for all possible Phase Changes even if a Phase Change is not currently part of a Phase Sequence The Signal Group Overlap List will always show the overlap details of the current Phase Change 4 17 2 2 The Signal Group Overlap List The Signal Group Overlap List contains an entry for every Signal Group that runs in one or both of the Phases of the current Phase Change The list displays the following information e SGroup The number of the Signal Group e From This indicates whether the Signal Group is running in the From Phase involved in
260. ime in Cycle Queue clearance time Start of End of Traffic arriving after Red Red this time on green does not stop 4 25 4 1 Creating Uniform Queue Graphs Uniform Queue Graphs are created as described above and selecting Queue Graph as the Graph Type 4 25 4 2 Controlling the Display of Uniform Queue Graphs The display of Queue Graphs can be customised by displaying the Random amp Oversaturated Queue on the Graph as well as the Uniform Queue Displaying the Random amp Oversaturated Queue The Random amp Oversaturated Queue can be displayed on a Queue Graph by right clicking on the Graph and choosing Show Random amp Oversat Component Remember that the queue graph is for a typical cycle therefore the level of random amp overstaturated queue is an average value This is discussed in more detail in the Modelling Background section Disaggregating Queue Graphs by Route Uniform Queue graphs cannot currently show the queue layered for different Route Flow Components on the Lane as Flow Profile Graphs can do Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 240 View Reference 4 25 5 Storage Graphs Storage Graphs are new in LinSig 3 and show the amount of traffic in Lane segments such as Short Lanes or Right Turn Storage Areas They can be used to assess when Short Lanes or other Storage Areas begin to influence or block traffic in adjacent Long Lanes Storage is similar but not the same as a queue It is generally only used for
261. inSig Licence Server If the connection is successful LinSig will display details of its licence If the Workstation cannot connect to the Licence Server ensure that the Licence Server is running and the Workstation can access the Licence Server across the network without interference of firewalls or similar security software Centralised Configuration of Workstations Workstations can also be configured to use a particular Licence Server by using a third party Software Deployment System such as Microsoft SMS or Operations Manager to deploy additional configuration information to the registry of Workstations at installation If you wish to use this feature please obtain the Advanced Configuration User Guide from JCT Consultancy This describes in detail the registry entries required to fully customise the licensing of Workstations on Unlimited Networked PC Sites A 4 3 4 Technical Note for IT Administrators Please note that the Licence Server must be visible to the client PC over the network to allow the Unlimited Networked PCs Licence to function correctly To use the Unlimited Networked PCs Licence the network must be configured to allow the Licence Server and Workstation to communicate using TCP on the port selected in the activation configuration Please also note that the LinSig Licence forbids the forwarding of broadcasts from the Licence Server to segments of a network geographically located outside of the LinSig Site Ver 3 2 10 Janu
262. inSig to model traffic on this Layer using the bus traffic sub model This allows bus stop times to be modelled and also uses a different platoon dispersion mode to non bus traffic Deleting a Flow Layer To delete a Flow Layer select the Layer and click Delete Layer in the Edit Flow Layers dialog box Any Lane Based Traffic flows present on the Layer are deleted when the Layer is deleted 4 3 9 3 Lane Based Flow Display Lane Based Flows are displayed in Lane Based Flow Mode using several different visual components These include e Lane Flow A Lane Flow is shown on each Lane where a Lane Based Flow is defined It represents the traffic flow across the stop line for a Lane Based Flow Layer One value will be displayed for each Layer used by the Lane e Total Stop Line Flow The Total Stop Line Flow is display in front of each Lane It is the total Lane Flow across all Layers e Lane Connector Flow The Lane Connector Flow is displayed numerically on each Lane Connector This represents a flow of traffic between two Lanes for a Flow Layer An outflow from one Lane is always also an Inflow to another Lane e Uniform Flow A Uniform Flow is shown on a Lane prefixed by U Uniform flows represent a source of traffic onto the Lane not incoming from another Lane It feeds traffic onto the Lane at a constant rate throughout the signal cycle and is sometimes used to represent on street parking or other source of traffic along the Lane
263. ing a LinSig 1 file to LinSig 3 format LinSig 3 can load amp convert an existing LinSig 1 file simply by opening the file within LinSig 3 LinSig will detect the file is a LinSig 1 file and use the information in the old file Essential new information which LinSig 1 files do not contain or cannot be deduced includes e Exit Arms e Lanes Connectors e Zones Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 2 Working with LinSig Files 11 Routes Traffic Flow Origin Destination Matrices The above information must be added to a LinSig 1 file after loading into LinSig 3 before results can be obtained Information discarded by LinSig as there is no close equivalent in LinSig 3 includes Lane Turn Arrows These are derived directly from Lane Connectors in LinSig 3 Geometric Saturation Flow Turn Radii Turn Radii are used in a more sophisticated way in LinSig 3 which is dependent on Lane Connectors and therefore should be re entered after adding Lane Connectors LinSig 1 Link Flows As flows are represented in a radically more sophisticated way in LinSig 3 the conversion process cannot reliably convert the LinSig 1 flows without more information on the Network structure It is therefore safer and nearly as quick to simply re enter the original LinSig 1 Link Flows in the LinSig 3 Origin Destination Matrix using the Traffic Flows View It is suggested the following sequence is followed after opening a LinSig 1 file Further details on how to carry
264. ing estimated relative flow weights in the Pedestrian OD Matrices e Edit the Signal Group Conflict matrix Conflicting Signal Groups should now be entered using the SGroup Conflict Matrix View e Add Phases to each Controller Signal Groups can now be grouped into Phases using the Phase View Phases created in the Phase View represent Phases configured in the Controller and do not need to be in the order actually run Signal Groups can be added or removed from a Phase by double clicking LinSig will prevent Signal Groups from being added to a Phase if doing so would create a conflict between Signal Groups For each Phase the Phase Timing data can be entered using the Edit Phase Details dialog box This includes durations of the Late Start Minimum Green Early Cut off Green and Yellow All Red periods as well as specifying which Signal Groups make use of the Late Start or Early Cut off Green e Edit the Phase Overlap behaviour By default a Signal Group will be set to overlap between two Phases if and only if it runs in both those Phases Any Signal Groups and Phase Changes for which this default behaviour is not required can be edited using the Phase Overlap View e Create Phase Sequences for each Controller A Phase Sequence represents an order of Phases to run on a Controller Several alternative Phase Sequences can be created for each Controller with the one being used for modelling being selected in the Network Control Plan Phases can be
265. ing the drag and drop interface to drag flows around the Network e Create LinSig Controllers using other Views before returning to the Network Layout View to specify each Lane s controlling Signal Group s e Create a Pedestrian Network for each Junction as desired e Use the Network Layout View to display results as text and profile graphs This section describes how to use the Network Layout View to carry out the above tasks 4 3 2 LinSig Network Structure LinSig uses Junctions Arms Lanes Lane Connectors and Zones to describe a traffic Network A parallel Pedestrian Network can also be modelled within the same model using Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Zones Network Layout View 4a co aE T SB Alel elelee Zal IS AIS ga Find Junction s i i C wi aiam mea g Layer Filter Pedestrian Link Lane Connector 1 1 f aoe Arm 5 z E rm 5 i i Arm 1 London Road AA A l he Arm 2 High Street ps Arm 4 BA i a onl pe R Pedestrian Link Connector 0 High St London Rd Park St PRC 66 7 Total Traffic Delay 133 6 pcuHr Awe Route Delay Per Ped TT 2 Ped Level Of Service F SCATS Site Num 1032 Pedestrian Zone jaal S MEg LLU r P 4 a i m k F Th a k wn Junction Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane All Contains Junc Al Arm all Lane All The roles
266. inly used by Windows e 25Mb of free hard disk space e Minimum Graphics resolution of 1280x1024 with 16 7M colours e 19 Monitor e CD Drive required for installation only e A two button mouse Suggested Hardware specification for optimum productivity e PC with a 3 0 GHz processor or multi core running at a lower speed e 2 4Gb RAM e 25Mb of free hard disk space e Graphics resolution of 1920x1200 with 16 7M colours 24 Monitor e An additional monitor with compatible graphics card s significantly speeds up working on larger models e CD DVD Drive required for installation only e A three button wheel mouse Not essential but extremely useful for zooming graphical views Please note that depending on the version of Windows you are using the hardware requirements for Windows may exceed the above A 2 Software Requirements LinSig can be used on any of the following platforms e Microsoft Windows 7 e Microsoft Windows Vista 32 bit e Microsoft Windows XP Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 293 Although LinSig isn t formally tested on 64 bit versions of Windows it is envisaged that it should run successfully Please inform us if you would like to use LinSig on 64 bit Windows as we will produce a fully supported 64 bit version for Windows 7 if sufficient demand arises Although LinSig is not formally supported on earlier versions of Windows it is envisaged that LinSig should run successfull
267. int a pedestrian may start or finish a walk through a Junction 4 3 12 1 Creating Pedestrian Zones To create a Pedestrian Zone e Choose Create Pedestrian Zone from the Pedestrian Zones pop out menu on the Network menu e Position the Pedestrian Zone in the Network Layout View and drop it by clicking with the mouse e The Create Pedestrian Zone dialog box is displayed to configure the new Pedestrian Zone e LinSig will automatically connect the Pedestrian Zone to the nearest possible Pedestrian Link Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 132 View Reference Create Pedestrian fone Pedestrian Zone Number 3 Pedestrian Zone Name C Associated Pedestrian Link P4 Peds Across Park St Eastside Link attachment point Right Associated Pedestrian Link None e The Create Pedestrian Zone dialog box allows the following settings to be specified o The Zone s Name Number Pedestrian Zones are always named as a letter Pedestrian Zones can be named in any order but there can be no gaps in the sequence of Pedestrian Zone names lf a Pedestrian Zone is given the same name as an existing Pedestrian Zone the new Pedestrian Zone is inserted in the sequence and Pedestrian Zones later in the name sequence are renumbered o Associated Pedestrian Link The Pedestrian Link into which the Pedestrian Zone feeds Pedestrian traffic o Pedestrian Link Attachment Point Specifies which end of the Pedestrian Link the Zones attaches to
268. ion J2 West Junction f PRC 4 0 PRC 3 9 Total Traffic Delay 16 5 pouHr AM teartartc Delay 7 5 pouHr Controller 2 Controller 1 amp 1 e lf Confirm action is chosen from the pop up menu LinSig adds 200 PCU to the Lane Connector and to the Destination Lane s Total Flow However as the 200 PCU on the Source Lane was not used on any outgoing Lane Connectors LinSig anticipated that the desired action was to propagate the 200 PCU in the Source Lane to the Downstream Lane rather than add an additional 200 PCU and the flow is not added to the Source Lane s Total Flow If the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box had been opened this would have been reflected by the Also add same flow to Source Lane Total Flow option being unticked If this had been wrong it could of course of being changed by choosing to open the Specify Lane Based Flow Details instead of just confirming the action and changing the option Case 3 Single Flow Layer No Existing Flows on Source Lane with Multiple Outgoing Lane Connectors Where a Source Lane has multiple outgoing Connectors LinSig will allow flows to be added to each Lane Connector in turn summing them to obtain the Total Flow on the Source Lane For a Lane with two outgoing Lane Connectors it is desired have a Total Flow of 300 PCU split between 200 PCU on one outgoing Connector and 100 on the other e Click on the Source Lane the traffic is leaving from Ver 3 2 10
269. ios have been created e Add Traffic Counts If traffic counts are being used either to estimate the OD matrix or just to validate the Network s assignment they can be entered using the Edit Junction Turning Counts dialog box which is opened by right clicking on a Junction and choosing Edit Junction Turning Counts e Add Traffic Signal Groups to each Controller The SGroup View can be used to add Traffic Signal Groups to each LinSig Controller Each Signal Group should be given an appropriate Signal Group Type and minimum green time Pedestrian Signal Groups should be given appropriate Walk and Clearance durations Traffic Signal Groups can be specified as providing pedestrian protection if necessary As the Signal Groups do not yet know which Lanes they are controlling the Signal Groups will not yet show any directional arrows e Edit Lanes to Connect to Signal Groups Now Signal Groups exist for each Controller each signal controlled Lane can be edited to specify its controlling Signal Group The Signal Groups will now show directional arrows based on the turning movements allowed in Lanes controlled by the Signal Group e Edit Lanes to specify Give Way Movements Each Lane s give way turning movements are specified by ticking This Movement Gives Way on the Lane s movement tabs in the Edit Lane dialog box and entering give way settings for the movement Further information on modelling give way movements is provided in the
270. is one second for every one PCU of storage in front of the stop line Right Turn Factor The Right Turn Factor controls the amount of bonus capacity due to right turning traffic storing in front of the stop line The default value is 0 5 and it is generally appropriate to retain this value unless site data suggests a different value The Right Turn Factor is explained in more detail in the Modelling section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 91 Non Blocking Storage The Non Blocking tab is only available when the Lane contains a mixture of give way and non give way movements It is principally used for situations where an opposed right turn movement may block a non give way movement usually ahead bem Edit Lane 1 2 When mixed giving way and non giving way movements on this link General Lane Details Total number of PCU on give way movenent s that can store without blocking non gring way movement s 2 00 Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data MB Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage in front of Stopline Non blocking Storage lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel The only setting on this tab is e Total Number of PCUs on Give Way Movements that can store without blocking Non Giving Way Movements This value is the number of PCUs on the give way movement usually the right turn which can queue before blocking the non giving way movement usually the ahead or
271. is worth experimenting to see how signal settings affect the validation 4 14 Turning Counts View The Turning Counts View graphically displays the Turning Counts used for estimating an OD Matrix or validating a traffic assignment in LinSig The information displayed is the same as that shown in the Matrix Estimation View and more detail is given in the Matrix Estimation View section on how Turning Counts are used and managed As Lane Based Flows do not use Turning Counts this View is only relevant when Matrix Based Flows are being used for all or part of the Network The View can be opened by choosing Turning Counts View from the Traffic Flows menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 14 Turning Counts View 207 3 Turning Count View 4 E AM Peak Current Scenario Display Diff GEH after count value H aa vlla SS _S 2 28 8 Total Counted Traffic Counted Traffic Entering Junction on Exiting Junction Turning this Arm Count so 740 724 aro ar Totals The Flow Group for which Turning Counts are displayed can be selected in the Turning Counts View toolbar The selected Flow Group is linked with the selected Flow Group used by the Matrix Estimation View so both Views always show traffic flow information for the same Flow Group 4 14 1 1 Turning Counts The Turning Counts View displays each Junction s Turning Counts The information displayed includes e Turning Counts for each Junction Tur
272. isplayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Signal Groups for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Phase Sequence View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Phase Sequence View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the Phase Sequence Views title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Phase Sequence View too Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 10 Phase Sequence View 177 4 10 2 The Phase Sequence List The Phase Sequence List lists all of the Phase Sequences defined in the Controller currently being viewed in the Phase Sequence View The following information is shown for each Phase Sequence e The Phase Sequence Number A unique reference number for each Phase Sequence e The Phase Sequence Name A descriptive name for the Phase Sequence such as All Phases or With Pedestrians e Sequence The Phase order for the Phase Sequence as a list of Phase Names e The Selected Phase Sequence The Selected Phase Sequence is highlighted in red The Selected Phase Sequence is the Phase Sequence which is shown and edited in the other panel of the Phase Sequence View It is not necessarily the Phase Sequence being used for model calculations The Selected Phase Sequence can be changed by clicking a Phase Sequence in the Phase Sequence
273. it will often be appropriate to rerun the traffic assignment to take into account reassignment due to delay changes caused by signal timing changes e View Network Results The Network Results View displays a detailed table of performance results for each Lane or Lane Group and also for each Junction and the Network as a whole The table can be sorted by clicking on any column header and columns can be added removed and resized by right clicking on a column header The amount of information shown in the Network Results View can be controlled by expanding and collapsing different Junctions using the plus and minus buttons next to each Junction in the Network Results View e Check Lane Flow Profile Graphs As part of the Traffic Model Calculations LinSig calculates detailed traffic flow profiles of platoons passing through each Lane The flow profiles can be displayed either using the Cyclic Flow Profiles View or embedded on the Network Layout View The Lane Graphs are extremely useful in studying how traffic is using a Lane and can assist with identifying any areas of the model where traffic isn t being modelled correctly 2 5 3 Modelling Combinations of Matrix Based and Lane Based Flows When both Matrix Based and Lane Based Flows are used in the same model each of the above two sequences should be carried out for each of the different Matrix based or Lane Based model regions Issues such as routing etc should then be checked for the Network as a
274. ive way movements may not be available These settings can of course always be returned to later after Lane Connectors have been added 1a dit l tS Edit Lane 1 1 J j Lane Control a Controller Full Green Phase Arrow Phase Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed i Lane ls Signal Controlled C1 Lincoln Road N ort A ka Sat flow data MB Flows General Traffic Give Way Summary Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movement Giving Way Mum Opposing Lanes To 5 1 Ahead No Thiz lane does not hawe storage in front of the stopline lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel The Edit Lane dialog box contains a number of tabs The available tabs for a Lane are listed on the left side of the dialog box A tab can be selected by clicking an entry in this list The available tabs are e General This tab contains basic settings which apply to all Lanes e Lane Details This tab is always available and allows more detailed settings such as Lane Length and custom Short Lane occupancies to be set e Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed This tab is only available for Entry Lanes at the edge of the Network Normally cruise speeds are specified on a Lane s incoming Lane Connectors As Entry Lanes have no incoming Lane Connectors the Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time tab is used to specify cruise speeds times e Saturation Flow Data This tab is always available and allows saturation flows to be entered either directly or by estimation from lane geome
275. iven later in this section e Click Preview at the bottom of the Report Builder To avoid polluting your main data folders with lots of preview files LinSig saves a copy of the Report in the Windows temporary files folder and opens the Report in your default word processor e f desired the Report can be edited in the word processor before printing As you previewed the Report you will need to specify where you wish to save the Report when saving it from your word processor e Alternatively you can click Final Save and View which allows you to save the file straight to the current LinSig data file s folder before opening the file in your default word processor e f you wish to rebuild the report at any stage you do not need to re import the template Simply select the Report Definition in the Report Definitions List and click Save and View This Report 6 3 3 Using the Report Builder The Report Builder shown below is used to design and work with reports Each Report consists of a sequence of Report Fragments each Fragment representing a component of the Report such as a diagram or table Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 268 Reporting and Printing Report Builder Report Definitions Basic Results Summary Signal Configuration Data W b a Fragment Dependencies Network Layout Diagram Report Fragment Title Network Layout Diagram a Use Default Add New Report Definition Delete Curent Report Defini
276. ix also means that techniques such as automatic delay based assignment is possible which can dramatically speed up the specification and entry of Network Traffic flows when changes and made to the Network More in depth discussion of the benefits and costs of using Matrix Based Flows in LinSig is provided in the Essential Background section The main drawback with using an OD matrix is how to count or otherwise derive a sufficiently detailed and accurate flow matrix For a typical LinSig sized network the two main techniques are e Direct Measurement of OD movements Direct measurement using video or increasingly Automatic Number Plate Recognition ANPR is the most accurate but also the most expensive technique AS ANPR becomes more widespread and reduces in cost direct measurement will become increasingly more feasible It is recommended that for complex junctions such as signal roundabouts OD matrices are directly measured whenever possible e Estimation of the Matrix from Junction Turning Counts Matrix Estimation uses relatively less expensive junction turning counts to estimate the most likely OD matrix consistent with a set of measured traffic counts Many different techniques have been used in large transportation models for many years to estimate OD matrices and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 197 LinSig uses one of the most common and tried and tested methods based on a mathematical method called entropy ma
277. k 01 00 Standard e F2 PM Peak 01 00 Standard F3 Saturday 01 00 Standard 4 28 3 4 Detector alarms Should a detector fail to produce a traffic count for an interval the data file will contain a Detector Alarm for the detector on that interval LinSig allows you to treat those detector alarms either as zero value or alternatively the value can be automatically interpolated using the values on the surrounding intervals lf any Detector Alarms are present in the input data LinSig will provide a summary upon completion of the SCATS Flow Data Import Wizard indicating the amount of time that detector alarms were present during the imported Flow Group time periods 4 28 4 Specifying turning proportions Traffic volumes are only imported into Lane Based stop line flows and no Connector flows are automatically imported It is necessary to manually enter the turning proportions either as PCU value or as percentages This is most easily done using the drag and drop interface described in section 4 3 9 4 For Lanes where only one traffic movement is permitted for example a left turn only lane it is a trivial process to specify all the stop line flow either as PCU value or as 100 percentage value on the single Lane Connector leaving the Lane and into the downstream exit Lane For Lanes where multiple traffic movements are permitted for example a mixed ahead and left turn lane it will be necessary to decide how much traffic to place
278. k are represented by a matrix that specifies the traffic flow between Zones All flows are specified in PCUs The OD matrix does not specify which Route traffic takes between two Zones as the routing is dependent on signal timings and other issues Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 8 LinSig Basics e Route Flow Route Flows are the flows on individual Routes between Zones and are used with an OD Matrix in Matrix Based Networks or Matrix Based regions of a Network to specify how traffic travels between Zones A Route Flow can either be entered manually or can be estimated by LinSig using a standard traffic assignment user equilibrium algorithm to distribute traffic between Routes based on calculated delays Different Route Flows are stored for each Scenario reflecting the fact that the same OD Matrix can be assigned to the Network in many ways depending on signal timings and other scenario specific issues e Lane Based Flow Layer Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to separate different traffic types or movements in a Network or region of Network defined using Lane Based Flows For example bus traffic or traffic between two points in the Network can be separated out LinSig models each Layer separately whilst allowing for interaction between traffic in each Layer e Desired Flow A Desired Flow is an origin destination flow specifying the required total flow between two Zones If the OD Matrix has been assigned correctly the Desired Flows should equal
279. l e Add Controllers Add the traffic signal Controllers to the model using the Controller List View Controllers gt Controller List View Set the Controller type and naming information Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 26 LinSig Basics e Add Junctions Using the Network Layout View add a LinSig Junction for each junction within the modelled network The choice of how Junctions are used will usually be obvious but sometimes it makes sense to create a Junction for network features which are not strictly junctions such as mid block pedestrian crossings Give each Junction a name and specify which Controller s if any are involved in the Junction s control e Add Entry Arms Using the Network Layout View add Junction Entry Arms to each Junction The Junction Entry Arms will contain the Lanes approaching the Junction s stop lines e Add Entry Arm Lanes On each Junction Entry Arm create additional long and Short Lanes to represent the Arm s Lane structure Remember that it is important to model the Lane structure as traffic uses road space which may not necessarily be the same as lane markings Newly created Lanes will not show Lane arrows at this point as no Lane Connectors have been added yet e Add Exit Arms Add Junction Exit Arms at the points where traffic leaves the Junction e Add Exit Arm Lanes On each Junction Exit Arm add any additional Lanes required Remember that Junction Exit Lanes are always Long Lanes and are used to
280. lay calculated from the cyclic flow profile of the typical cycle which is termed the uniform delay An attempt is also made to allow for the fact that when the degree of saturation on a Lane is around 80 100 the real life randomness of traffic flows on a Lane will cause the delay to be higher than the uniform delay A random delay component is calculated using standard formulae and is added to the uniform and oversaturated delay to give the total delay on the Lane In reality traffic arriving at a stop line from an approach which has no signalled junctions will have a very high random component where as arrivals from within a dense network of signals will have a much lower random component The random delay component in the calculations is assumed to be a combination of the two situations Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 37 3 1 1 5 Queuing The queue lengths calculated by cyclic flow profile models are often misunderstood and it is important to understand the different queue components and how they are used to predict queue lengths Queues are inherenily difficult to model accurately regardless of the quality or level of detail used in the model Predicted queue lengths are extremely sensitive to small changes in input data For example looking at a typical Lane in a LinSig model with a flow of 600 PCU its predicted queue at a degree of saturation of 90 is 19 PCU Increasing the flow by 10 gives a degree of satura
281. lays the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box to allow this information to be added The Source and Destination Layers are set to General Traffic and the flow is entered as 200 PCU This is displayed in black as it is on the General Traffic Layer e Drag from the Source to the Destination Layer but avoid the current General Traffic numbers LinSig will again be unable to guess which Layer is being used and show the Specify Lane Based Flow Details to allow the Layer to be specified This time select the red Bus Layer and enter 50 PCU for the flow The flow is displayed in Red as it is on the Bus Layer Flow on Bus Layer Flow on General Traffic Layer _ ________________ Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J2 4 Main F Arm J2 6 Main Road Westbound 4 7 Arm J2 2 Main R T Ma t i a e Each Lane displays each Layers Total Flow The Total Stop Line Flow across all Layers is displayed in front of the Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 116 View Reference Case 6 Multiple Flow Layers Existing Flows on Source Layer When existing flows exist on multiple Layers on the Source Lane LinSig allows each number to be dragged to another Lane to allocate traffic for that Layer to Lane Connectors By dragging the individual numbers rather than just dragging from the Layer LinSig can guess more information and reduce the amount of data entry For a Lane with two Flow Layers General Traffi
282. lays the value entered for the Queue De Sliver Threshold on the Edit Lane dialog box s Advanced tab This is useful for indentifying Lanes on which the De Sliver mechanism has been used More details is given in the Network Layout View Section but briefly the De Sliver Mechanism automatically avoid long spurious queues being reported on Lanes when certain conditions occur Average Excess Queue PCU The Average Excess Queue is the average amount the queue exceeds the stacking space on the Lane defined on the Edit Lane dialog box s Advanced tab This is useful for monitoring how Excess Queue weightings are being applied Weighted Deg Sat The degree of saturation for the Lane after weighting for any excess queues or Lane weighting factors This is used mainly for monitoring the optimiser Weighted Delay PCUHTr The total delay on the Lane after weighting for any excess queues Lane weighting factors or use of Stops valuation This is used mainly for monitoring the optimiser Ignoring Random Delay The Ignoring Random Delay column indicates if Random Delay is being ignored for the Lane 4 20 1 3 Network Summary The Network Summary shows summary results for the entire Network broken down by Controller The following information is shown for each Controller Practical Reserve Capacity This shows the Practical Reserve Capacity PRC for each Controller The PRC is calculated from the maximum degree
283. les are travelling at cruise speed anticipating the green from the starting red amber For example consider the situation below where the signals at A commence green at time 0 and run until time 10 If the cruise speed from A to B is 5 seconds then it may seem reasonable to set the green time at B to be from 5 to 15 seconds The last vehicle through A will be travelling at the cruise speed and will therefore just clear the stop line at B However the first vehicle at A will be starting from rest and the time it takes to get from A to B will be one or two seconds more This means that the signals at B could start two seconds later and run from time 8 to 15 representing only 8 seconds of green If this is modelled in a conventional way the stop line on B will be shown to be overloaded even though this effect can be clearly seen to happen without overloading in practice The way to overcome this is to set the traffic at B to have no starting displacement since the traffic will already be moving when the signals turn green Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 36 Essential Background 15 0 10 Cruise time 5 seconds Platoon Compression Hence if the traffic at A is set to run green from O to 10 seconds with the usual start and end displacements of 2 and 3 seconds respectively then the signals at B will need to be set at 7 to 15 with zero start displacement and 3 seconds end displacement The effective green at both stop
284. lines will be 11 seconds giving the same degree of saturation Generally the rule is that if you are coordinating the signals in such a way that the first vehicle arrives on an opening green without needing to stop then you can remove the starting displacement 3 1 1 4 Model Accuracy and Queue and Delay Calculations At low and medium levels of flow on a Lane the above method is quite realistic and real life random variations in traffic do not greatly affect the overall levels of delay predicted by the model However it becomes increasing less accurate as flows increase as the assumption that each cycle is the same becomes less realistic When the flow on a Lane is greater than its capacity this assumption is obviously incorrect as at the end of each cycle the queue will have permanently increased by the difference between the flow arriving in the cycle and the Lanes capacity over the cycle Each subsequent cycle would then add a similar amount to the Lane s queue and as the flows are assumed to be the same for each cycle throughout the modelled period the queue will never discharge during this period This problem is resolved by taking advantage of the fact that the additional delay per cycle due to over saturation on a Lane can be separated from the delay caused by transient queuing within the typical cycle The oversaturated delay component is relatively easy to calculate using a mathematical formula This is then added to the transient de
285. ll Average Journey Time s The average time for traffic to travel between Zones Where more than one Route exists between the Zone LinSig weights the delay based on the traffic using each Route e Average Undelayed Time s The average travel time between Zones based on cruise times with no queuing delay e Average Delay s The average queuing delay encountered by traffic travelling between the two Zones 4 21 1 1 Refining the Travel Time Matrix The time shown in the Travel Time Matrix can be further refined by choosing one of the following options e All Traffic Displays the travel times experienced by all traffic travelling between the Zones e Routed Traffic Only Displays the travel times experienced by traffic travelling between Zones on Routes Delays experienced by any Lane Based Traffic are not included This option is useful for displaying delays to buses on Bus Routes where general traffic is specified using Lane based Flows e Lane Based Flow Traffic Only Displays the travel times experienced by Lane Based Traffic If multiple Lane Based Flow Layers are used this option aggregates delays over all Layers e Layer Layer Name One option will be available for each Lane Based Flow Layer in the model Each option will display only delay on the individual Layer This is useful for displaying travel times for a specific class of Lane Based traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 226 View Reference 4 22 Model Audi
286. ll Layers shown for F e Right clicking on the Network Layout View and choosing Lane Based Flow Entry Mode from the pop up menu e Click the Lane Based Flow Entry Mode button on the Edit Lane dialog box When the Network Layout View is in Lane Based Flow Mode the background is shown in dark gray to distinguish it from Standard Mode Entering Lane Based Flows using Drag and Drop When Lane Based Flows are edited using drag and drop a number of common cases arise LinSig will always try to use existing flow and Layer information to intelligently anticipate what action is being carried out and attempts to minimise data entry Case 1 Single Flow Layer No existing Flows on Source and Destination Lanes When a Lane Based Flow is added using drag and drop LinSig will add a Lane Connector Flow and also optionally add the flow to the upstream and downstream Lane s flow A Lane Based Flow can be added using the following procedure e Click on the Source Lane the traffic is leaving from e Drag with the mouse to the Destination Lane where traffic is moving to This must be connected to the Source Lane with a Lane Connector LinSig cannot chain flows over several Lanes and connectors e Whilst dragging LinSig will display a tooltip explaining what will be added if the mouse is released at that point LinSig will make intelligent assumptions about what is intended in order to minimise data entry Source _ Lane Anticipated Action Destination
287. ll also be reflected in the Matrix Estimation View and the Junction Turning Counts Matrix Further information on using Counts is provided in the Matrix Estimation View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 15 Signal Timings View 209 4 15 Signal Timings View Each Signal Timings View is used to display and adjust the Phase and Signal Group timings for the Current Scenario The View is opened by choosing Signal Timings View from the Phase Sequences menu El Signal Timings View Display Cycle Time Maintain Cycle Time Allow Edit Timings Double Triple time g0 B y Single 35 40 45 50 55 1 2 3 4 9 6 f 6 g 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 Time in cycle sec As well as viewing Phase and Signal Group timings the Signal Timings View also shows Clearance Interval structure Late Start periods Phase Minimums and allows signal timing optimisation of individual Controllers to be carried out The Signal Timings View is comprised of two panels e The Signal Timings Settings This allows timing settings to be controlled e The Signal Timings Panel This shows the Phase and Signal Group Times for the current Scenario over the Network Cycle Time 4 15 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Signal Timings Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Signal Timings View shows the signal timings for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is se
288. ll the Lane Connectors between the Arms right clicking on the Lane Connectors and choosing Edit Multiple Lane Connectors from the pop up menu e Set Lane Lengths amp Saturation Flows For each Lane in turn edit the Lane s length on the Lane Details tab and the saturation flow on the Sat Flow Data tab Saturation Flows can either be manually entered or calculated from the Lane s geometry e Create Traffic Flow Groups Flow Groups can be created and managed in the Traffic Flow View Remember that Flow Groups can be defined as a combination of other Flow Groups using a formula to specify how they are combined e Add Lane Based Flows Use the Network Layout View s Lane Based Flow Mode and the Edit Lane dialog box to enter Lane Based Flows for the Network Lane Based flows can also be added using the SCATS Flow Data Import e Add Traffic Signal Signal Groups to each Controller The SGroup View can be used to add Traffic Signal Groups to each LinSig Controller Each Signal Group should be given an appropriate Signal Group Type and minimum green time Pedestrian Signal Groups should be given appropriate Walk and Clearance durations Traffic Signal Groups can be specified as providing pedestrian protection if necessary As the Signal Groups do not yet know which Lanes they are controlling the Signal Groups will not yet show any directional arrows e Edit Lanes to Connect to Signal Groups Now Signal Groups exist for each Controller each sig
289. lowing If the movement gives way the box should be ticked and data entered for the rest of the fields on the tab If the movement does not give way the box can be left unticked and no further data entry is required on this tab e Maximum Flow When Giving Way PCU Hr This is the maximum capacity of the Give Way Lane when it is giving way and therefore potentially opposed but no opposing traffic is present e Minimum Flow When Giving Way PCU Hr This is the minimum capacity of the Give Way Lane when it is giving way This is typically zero but can be specified if it Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 89 is felt that LinSig is underestimating the amount of traffic able to discharge under high levels of opposing flow e Flow when Opposing Traffic is Stopped PCU Hr This is the Saturation Flow for the opposed movement when the opposing traffic is stopped When it is clear to opposed traffic that the opposing movement is stopped for example when a right turn s green arrow is running the Lane may have a higher Saturation Flow than the Maximum Flow value as traffic may not need to check for opposing traffic which is self evidently stopped Often this value is the same as the Lane s main saturation flow but may be different for example if the opposed movement turns through a tight radius the saturation flow would be lower The options available are o Use Maximum Flow when Giving Way Use the same value specified abo
290. lows only the Lane Based Connector flows will be deleted e Layer Select the Lane Based Flow Layer from which to delete flows You can also select all Lane Based Flow Layers e Junction Select the Junction from which to delete Lane Based Flows You can also select all Junctions e Flow Group Select the Flow Group from which to delete Lane Based Flows You can also select all Flow Groups Defining Flow Groups using Formulae Traffic Flow Groups are often built up by combining a number of component sets of traffic data to form a new composite set of traffic flows For example in a development context a Flow Group may be defined as a set of base traffic flows plus development generated traffic flows A more complex example may involve growthing the base traffic to a future year before combining it with development flows from a number of different and usually ever changing development scenarios LinSig allows Traffic Flow Groups to be defined as combinations of other previously defined Flow Groups Formulae are used to combine Flow Groups in any combination For example if the base traffic is Flow Group 1 F1 and Development scenario A is Flow Group 2 F2 a new combined Flow Group 3 F3 could be defined using the Formula F3 1 06 F1 F2 This will factor up the base traffic by 6 before adding the development traffic A Flow Group does not have to be defined as a Component Flow Group to be used in a formula Component Flow Groups are Flow G
291. lows are unbalanced over a wider area eg a signal roundabout or Lane Based Flow Layers if only a small area is affected eg a staggered pair of T junctions 3 2 3 2 Defining Network Regions Each Traffic Flow Group contains an OD Matrix a set of Lane Based Flows or both LinSig uses the combination of the OD Matrix and the Lane Based Flows to define Network Regions which are modelled using either method Creating a Matrix Based Network Region To define a Matrix Based Region e Create Zones around the periphery of the region including at the boundary with the rest of the non Matrix Based Network e LinSig uses a single OD Matrix for the entire Network regardless of any Network regions however only the parts of the matrix relevant to each region are used e Enter the section of the OD Matrix just for the Zones surrounding this region OD Matrix cells representing traffic between Zones in different regions should be left blank e Use Delay Based Assignment to assign the OD Matrix to the Network region Use the Assignment options to select only Zones surrounding the region Only Routes between Zones around the region are used Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig 43 Creating a Lane Based Network Region To Create a Lane Based Flow Region e Do not create Zones around the region which will use Lane Based Flows unless required for measuring journey times Zones are only necessary in
292. lows using the graphical method Layers are automatically added to Lanes when flows are added This method is only required when manual changes to Layers used by Lanes are required Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 121 Lane Based Flow Layer The Lane Based Flow Layer tab is used to edit traffic flows on a Lane Based Flow Layer and to manage Layers on the Lane The drag and drop Lane based Flow editing system normally allows Lane Based Flows to be defined much more quickly and should be used in preference to this tab This tab should only be used to edit detailed flow information not available using the drag and drop method 1a Edit Lane J2 1 1 ON Lane Based Flows AM Peak Lane Based Flows MMB General Traffic Total Layer 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode Layer aor 0 lane flaws using drag and drop Lane Based Flaws in the Network Layout View Mi Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Hancina BE 2 4 1 Ahead General Traffic Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows Add Total incoming 0 Add Total outgoing 100 This page displays the Lane Based Flows cali Totalincoming E ze te Tadd Eat arel Deluts buttons to Uniform Flow oo Total entering downstream flow 10000 a ertani T BE a aie TE AA Apparent flow loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D shes SaaS lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel In many cases where multiple Flow Layers ar
293. lute values of delay If you would like to know the absolute values of Total Delay refer to the Network Results View There is no significance to the crossing point of the PRC and delay curves e The Current Cycle Time Indicator If the option Allow Selection of Cycle Time and Signal Timings from Graph is ticked a Current Cycle Time Indicator is shown at the top of the view as a dark blue rectangle containing the current cycle time The Cycle Time Indicator can be dragged with the mouse to change the cycle time for the Current Scenario 4 24 1 2 Settings and Options The Cycle Time Optimisation View has the following Settings and Options which control how the View works e Allow Selection of Cycle Time and Signal Timings from Graph If this box is ticked the Cycle Time Optimisation View displays a cursor which can be dragged with the mouse to set the Cycle Time for the current Scenario The Phase lengths in the current Scenario will be reset to the optimal settings for the Cycle Time if they have been calculated If the Phase Lengths are subsequently changed in the Signal Timings View to non optimal settings the cursor will disappear and this box will be unchecked indicating that the Scenario s timings do not match the optimal ones for the cycle time as represented in the Cycle Time Optimisation View e Only Allow Selection of Cycle Times for which Optimised Timings have been calculated If the calculation of the Cycle Time Optimisation
294. mat is supported by most modern word processors including Microsoft Word Corel WordPerfect and the free to download OpenOffice Reports can then be edited and enhanced for example with company logos before being printed from within the word processor The Rich Text Format is particularly suited to this task as it Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 266 Reporting and Printing allows graphics and tables to be easily integrated into reports as well as providing comprehensive support for different page sizes and orientations LinSig no longer generates HTML reports due to the lack of flexibility of modifying and customising HTML based reports using standard word processing software 6 3 1 Report Definitions and Templates A LinSig Report is defined using a Report Definition A Report Definition specifies information such as a Report s title page size and most importantly the layout of the Report The Report s layout is specified as a sequence of Report Fragments Each Report Fragment represents a Report item such as a table or diagram LinSig includes over 30 different Report Fragments representing items such as Network Layout Diagrams Lane input data tables Signal Group Conflict matrices Phase diagrams and Network Results tables A Report Definition can be as complex or as simple as desired and any number of different Report Definitions can be defined in each LinSig file Any Report can be rerun at any point and will be completely regenerated using
295. matting for The current format for the selected text is shown in the settings boxes on the Note Editor s main toolbar e Choose anew font font size colour and other options such as bold and underline e Some settings such as justification centring and bullet point only apply to a whole paragraph A background colour can also be selected which applies to the whole Note e When all formatting changes have been made click OK to apply the changes to the Note Repositioning and Resizing a Note Each Note can be moved by dragging with the mouse and resized by dragging the Note s borders or corners with the mouse Each paragraph within the Note will be wrapped to fit within the Note s borders 4 3 14 2 Adding a QuickNote to the Network Layout View A QuickNote is a preconfigured Note containing dynamic fields which can be quickly added to the Network Layout View to display dynamic information regarding a Lane To add a QuickNote e Right Mouse click on the Lane for which the QuickNote is to be added e Choose a QuickNote type from the QuickNotes pop out on the pop up menu e Drag the QuickNote to its desired position and drop it by clicking with the mouse The QuickNote will update to reflect changes in the model s data 4 3 14 3 Working with Labels on the Network Layout View Labels can be used as an alternative to Notes on the Network Layout View Adding Labels to the Network Layout View A Label is added to the Network Layout View a
296. mber that if you accidentally delete a Phase using Undo will completely restore any Phase Sequences affected by deleting the Phase 4 9 9 Running or Removing a Signal Group from a Phase A Signal Group can be added to or removed from a Phase by double clicking the Signal Group in the relevant Phase in the Phase View with the mouse This will add a previously non running Signal Group to the Phase or remove a running Signal Group A Signal Group which has a conflict with Signal Groups already running cannot be run in the Phase and will be shown colour coded as described above to indicate why it cannot be run Double clicking on a Signal Group which cannot run will display more detail on the reason the Signal Group cannot run Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 9 Phase View 175 4 9 10 Editing Phase Timing Parameters Each Phase has various timing parameters that determine when and for what duration the Signal Groups in the Phase will run The Phase Timing Parameters on each Phase can be edited by clicking on the Phase to be renamed with the right mouse button and choosing Edit Name and SCATS Timings from the pop up menu The Edit Phase Details dialog will open and the following settings can be changed Late Start This specifies the duration of the Late Start period of the Phase Minimum Green This specifies the duration of the Minimum Green period of the Phase Early Cut Off Green This specifies the duration of the Early Cu
297. me between i Assign all Traffic Zones routes with the same origin and destination zones are as equal as possible Your LinSig model must be runnable in order to perform this assignment 0 Customised Delay Based Assignment Entry Lane Balancing The options available are e Delay Based Assignment This is the default selection which will be appropriate for most Networks This option uses a standard set of options for the assignment which will achieve an acceptable combination of assignment speed and accuracy for most Networks e Customised Delay Based Assignment This allows various options controlling the assignment process to be customised This is not usually necessary but may be useful for larger networks or networks with unusual characteristics to achieve a faster or more precise assignment The available options are o Thoroughness Allows a choice to be made between a slower more precise assignment and a faster less precise one The faster assignment may be useful when doing initial testing of a larger model o Behaviour The Behaviour setting governs the initial route flows LinSig uses to start the assignment process e Normal Normal simply starts each assignment run with zero route flows The first assignment iteration will then carry out an all or nothing assignment which will provide the initial Route Flows e Use Current Flows This option starts the assignment using the current assigned flows fo
298. mee se EE Plc E No Phase Sequence All he Current gaol Lebo Adding or Inserting Phases into the Phase Sequence Phases can be added to the Phase Sequence in several ways The most important include e Choose Add Phase to End of Sequence from the Phase Sequences Menu LinSig will display the Select Phase dialog box allowing you to pick which Phase to add to the end of the Phase Sequence e f a Sequence already contains some Phases additional Phases can be inserted around them To Insert a Phase select an existing Phase in the Phase Sequence and choose Insert Phase before after selected Phase from the Phase Sequences Menu The Select Phase dialog box will again ask which Phase to insert e Arrange the Views so that both the Phase View and Phase Sequence Views are visible Phases can be dragged from the Phase View and dropped at any position within the Phase Sequence View s Phase Sequence The Phase Sequence View will display an insertion point where the Phase will be inserted Providing the new Phase Sequence is valid LinSig will update model results for Scenarios using this Network Control Plans containing this Phase Sequence to reflect the new sequence LinSig will adjust the signal timings in each Scenario using the changed Phase Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 180 View Reference Sequence to ensure legal signal timings are used but these timings will not necessarily be sensible or optimal Moving a Phase
299. mes to be edited using timing dials Display flows as bandwidths Compare Scenario Route Flows using Bandwidths Display animated signal sequences and queues Annotate the Network diagram using Notes amp Labels O O O O Or O O O O O O O O O O e Controller List View The Controller List View displays all of the signal Controllers in the model and how they are grouped The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o Add edit and delete new signal Controllers o Group signal Controllers in Controller Sets o Set Cycle Times for Controller Sets e SGroup View The SGroup View graphically displays the Signal Group layout for a single signal Controller The View can be used to o Select which Controller to display in this View o Create delete and edit Signal Groups e SGroup Conflict Matrix View The SGroup Conflict Matrix View is used to enter a Signal Group Conflict Matrix for a SCATS Controller The matrix cells are colour coded to indicate cells where it may not be valid to specify a conflict for example where two Signal Groups are configured to run together in the same Phase This View can be used to carry out the following tasks o Select which Controller to display in this View o Addor remove Signal Group conflicts o View matrix cells where LinSig indicates a conflict is not valid e Phase View The Phase View is used to construct Phases for each Controller These are subsequently used in the Cont
300. minate Phase B may start Phase B may terminate Pedestrian runs in consecutive Phases A and B and overlaps from A to B Overlapping isolated operation pedestrian Signal Group 5 2 4 3 Overlap for Walk for Green pedestrian Signal Groups Specifying overlap for a Walk for Green pedestrian Signal Group means that the Signal Group will run green continuously throughout the Intergreen Period At the end of the succeeding Phase LinSig will not permit the next Phase to start until the pedestrian Clearance period has finished Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 1 Printing Graphical Layout Views 263 6 Reporting and Printing LinSig can print information in three ways These are e Directly printing the Network Layout Network Control Layout View and SGroup Views to a printer e Directly printing groups of Flow Profile diagrams to a printer e Building a Report using the Report Builder This can include both tables and graphics 6 1 Printing Graphical Layout Views The Network Layout View Network Control Layout View and SGroup View show the graphical layout of the Network the Network wide control and each Controllers Signal Groups As these diagrams can often be larger than an A4 page LinSig allows them to be printed directly to a printer possibly a large format printer as well as being included in a LinSig Report LinSig includes a sophisticated multi page printing system that allows Print Zones to be defined to specify whic
301. minimums are not violated Clearance Intervals Clearance Intervals between Phases are shaded grey Late Starts Late Start intervals at the start of a Phase are shaded in blue Early Cut Off Green Early Cut Off Green intervals after the Phase termination point are shaded in blue Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 214 View Reference e Phase Timings LinSig displays the Phase timings numerically in the area between Phase Change Point cursors The times are shown in the format Late Start Phase Length Early Cut Off Green Yellow All Red with Late Start and Early Cut Off Green omitted if not in use 4 16 1 2 Changing Phase Timings using the Lane Timings View Although the Signal Timings View is more appropriate for making changes to Phase times it is also possible to change Phase times in the Lane Timings View by dragging Phase Change Points with the mouse in a similar way to the Signal Timings View 4 16 1 3 Adding Bonus Greens to Lane Green Periods Bonus Greens can be added to a Lane Green Period as follows e Right click anywhere on the Lane Green Period s bar in the Lane Timings Panel e Choose Edit Start Bonus Green or Edit End Bonus Green from the pop up menu This will open the Edit Bonus Greens dialog box e In the Edit Bonus Greens dialog box double click the value next to the Bonus Green Type and enter a value for the Bonus Green Positive Bonus Greens always result in more green time and ne
302. ms can be freely positioned using the mouse as follows e Select the Arm with the mouse The Arm turns red indicating it is selected e Use the circular handles at each end of the Arm to reposition the Arm The direction of traffic on the Arm is indicated by the arrow on the Arm e If you have a number of Arms which you want to move together for example all the Arms at a Junction they can be moved by dragging the Junction rather than one by one Tip To assist with positioning graphical Items LinSig can display a grid and snap the cursor to the grid when dragging The grid is controlled from the View menu The grid size is controlled on the Graphical Settings tab of the File Settings dialog box which is opened from the File Menu 4 3 5 3 Editing Arm Settings An Arm can be edited by selecting the Arm with the mouse and choosing Edit Arm from the Arms pop out menu on the Network Menu This displays the Edit Arm dialog box which can be used to change the Arm s settings as described in Creating New Arms above 4 3 5 4 Deleting Arms An Arm can be deleted by selecting the Arm and choosing Delete Arm from Arms pop out menu on the Network menu It is important to remember that deleting an Arm also deletes any Lanes belonging to the Arm Undo is of course available in case of accidental deletion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 68 View Reference 4 3 6 Working with Lanes LinSig uses Lanes to d
303. mum ECO SGroups using Late SGroups using ECO Green Start Green G Yellow aliRed Start Green SGroups Ci A 1 2 7 8 Ci B 1 3 5 8 Ci C 3 4 6 9 Controller Phase Phase Sequence Data Hide Back To Top Controller Phase Sequence Phase Minimums Ci 1 2 3 J D 8 Compared Audit Data Cycle Times Hide Back To Top Controller Cycle Time Single Double Ci 90 single SGroup Timings Hice Back To Top Start Start Start Start End End End End adjustment adjustment adjustment adjustment adjustment adjustment adjustment adjustment DD UGT other total DD UGT other total Arm Name Controller Controller aes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 228 View Reference 4 22 1 4 Comparing Two LinSig Models The Model Audit View can compare two LinSig models highlighting the differences between the two models This is done intelligently rather than just comparing the text of two Model Audit Views To compare two LinSig Models Ensure the Audit Compare with another File option is selected in the Model Audit View toolbar Click the Compare button on the Model Audit View toolbar and locate the LinSig file you are comparing the current model with select the Scenarios you wish to compare in the Current Model and the Comparison Model LinSig will display the comparison of the Scenarios from the two files in the Model Audit View Differences between the two models will be highlighted It i
304. n highlighted in red e Choosing a new current Scenario from the drop down list in the LinSig main toolbar When a new Scenario is selected all other Views are updated to display and allow editing of information relating to the new Scenario For example the Signal Timings View will always show the Phase green times relating to the currently selected Scenario 4 12 1 3 Editing a Scenario The following items can be edited on a Scenario e The Scenario s Name The Scenario s name can be changed by clicking on existing name and entering a new one e The Flow Group The Scenario s Flow Group can changed by clicking on a Scenario s existing Flow Group and selecting a new Flow Group from the drop down list e The Network Control Plan The Scenario s Network Control Plan can changed by clicking on a Scenario s existing Network Control Plan and selecting a new Network Control Plan from the drop down list e Cycle Time This is described in more detail below in Managing Cycle Times Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 185 The Scenario Time Period cannot be changed as it is inherited from the Scenario s Flow Group If necessary the time period can be changed for the Flow Group using the Traffic Flows View 4 12 1 4 Deleting a Scenario A Scenario can be deleted by selecting the Scenario and choosing Delete Scenario from the Scenarios pop out on the Modelling menu Deleting a Scenario does not delete the
305. n Road Eastbound A Arm J3 5 Main Road Eastbound _ A K rairai NI Arm J1 2 Main Road WB at Ped X___Arm J2 6 Main Road Westbound Y E A j Arm J3 2 Main Road Westbound Y Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound gA K lt a ae t ca N Za R J1 Ped Crossing Fi PRC 101 7 7 ee eee ee J3 East Junction Toss Trafic Oelay 2 0 pour J2 West Junction PRC 14 0 bs Ave Route Delay Per Ped 39 8 s Ped PRO 540 Tots Trafic Delay 17 1 pour i Conmoer 4 Tors Tratte Deisy 92 poser canez i m Cortroler 181 i 8 Mode Bandwidths 7 Hide Decorations Manual Scale 400 E C Diff by Fo Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All vy Lane All Contains Junc All f Arm All v Lane All Destination Zone All gt Arm All v Lane All v 4 3 16 1 Displaying Bandwidths Bandwidths can be displayed by choosing Bandwidth Mode from the View Menu The Network Layout View will change its appearance to display the Bandwidths with a simplified display of Lanes to avoid obscuring the Bandwidths The Bandwidths can be removed by choosing Standard Mode from the Network Menu ia LinSig 3 1 1 2 UG Multi Junction Example No Graphs lsq3x C Snap To Grid Cyde Animation Mode Show Error View Compass w Status Bar Toolbars Find Arm 7 Scale Bandwidths to All Flow Groups 7 Display Lane Connectors Display Lane Text Key
306. n all junctions in a network run at the same cycle time the pattern of traffic and queues on under capacity Lanes will be very similar during each cycle throughout the modelled period that is the flow and queue profiles on each Lane will repeat cyclically In its simplest case each cycle is assumed to be identical which can then be extrapolated throughout the peak hour For example if the total delay on a Lane in the typical cycle is 2 3 pcuh the cycle time is 90sec and the modelled period is one hour then as there are 3600 90 40 cycles in the modelled period the total delay for the hour is 40 x 2 3 92 pcuh This also results in a reduction in the computing power required for calculating the flow profiles by 40 times There are in fact three different cyclic flow profiles used for each Lane These are e Arrive In Profile This represents the profile of traffic entering the Lane throughout the cycle e Accept Profile This represents the profile of traffic which is allowed to leave the Lane in each time slice The accept profile depends on the whether the Lane is Opposed e Leave Out Profile This represents the traffic leaving the Lane in each time slice The Figures below show examples of each of the above profiles Arrive Profile The Arrive Profile shown above shows the arrival profile of traffic at the Lane s stop line This profile is derived from the Leave profiles from one or more upstream Lanes after they have been
307. n the Edit Controller dialog box e Click on the Controller s type and select SCATS Based from the list of Controller Types Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 2 Using International Options 55 ee 1 SCATS Based West Controller Treat SGroup minimums as Street minimums SCATS Based Superseded since LinSig 3 2 v SCATS Based 4 2 2 2 Controller Views using SCATS Based Terminology When LinSig is set to use SCATS Based terminology mode and a Controller type is set to SCATS Based several Controller based views will change name and appearance to use terminology and numbering relevant to a SCATS Controller These include e UK Phase View becomes SGroup View The SGroup View shows the Signal Groups defined for a Controller The Signal Groups are numbered 2 se aic Le elel amp ae Kia e UK Stage View becomes Phase View The Phase View shows the Phases defined for a Controller The Phases are named alphanumerically and can have alternate Phases defined Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 56 View Reference 0 5 0 18 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 57 4 3 Network Layout View The Network Layout View is the most important View in LinSig The View is used to build a detailed model of the Network s geometric structure and layout This is carried out by combining components such as Junctions Arms Lanes and Zones to define the Junction s layout and to spec
308. n the Traffic Flows View defines the total desired movements between Zones The process of assignment to Routes specifies which Routes through the Network traffic will use to travel between two Zones Each Scenario contains its own distinct set of Route Flows as a Flow Group s OD matrix may potentially be assigned to the same Network with a number of different routing patterns depending on Scenario settings such as signal timings and cycle time 4 12 2 1 Assignment Overview Traffic flows can be assigned to Routes in two ways These are e Manually assigning a traffic flow to each Route This method provides more flexibility and control as the flow patterns can be refined to a high level of detail It can however be time consuming with larger Networks This method is described in more detail in the Route List View section e Automatically assigning traffic flows to each Route based on the Desired Origin Destination matrix LinSig uses standard traffic routing algorithms to automatically assign the OD Matrix to Routes based on delays calculated by the traffic model Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 188 View Reference It is of course possible to use a combination of the above methods using automatic assignment initially and refining manually where desired 4 12 2 2 Automatic Assignment Methods LinSig can assign traffic using two different methods These are e Delay Based Assignment Delay based assignment is new to Version 3 and is the n
309. nal Group Type A signal group can exist as one of eight different types These are o Three Aspect Traffic Signal Group This is a standard signal group used for most normal traffic movements Although the signals will in reality show periods of amber and red amber LinSig models the signals as green or not green o Non UK Arrow This Signal Group can be set as a Lane s Arrow Signal Group but may start and end independently of the Lane s Full Green Signal Group The Lane will run if either its Arrow or Full Green Signal Group is at Green o Pedestrian Signal Group Used to control Pedestrians Again LinSig models the signals as green or not green with any blackout periods being subsumed into the not green period Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 168 View Reference o Dummy Signal Group Dummy Signal Groups are signal groups which exist only in the signal controllers software and do not control any lights or other equipment o Dummy with Red Amber The same as a Dummy Signal Group but operates as though the Signal Group has a dummy Red Amber period o Cycle Signal Group Identical to a Traffic Signal Group but with a green lamp with a cycle symbol o Bus Signal Group Identical to a Traffic Signal Group but with a green lamp with a bus symbol o LRT Tram Signal Group Same as a Traffic Signal Group but with no starting red amber period and controls LRT signals rather than normal traffic signal lights e Controlled Lanes
310. nal controlled Lane can be edited to specify its controlling Signal Group The Signal Groups will now show directional arrows based on the turning movements allowed in Lanes controlled by the Signal Group Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 24 LinSig Basics e Edit Lanes to specify Give Way Movements Each Lane s give way turning movements are specified by ticking This Movement Gives Way on the Lane s movement tabs in the Edit Lane dialog box and entering give way settings for the movement Further information on modelling give way movements is provided in the Network Results View section and the Modelling Background section e Add Pedestrian Network If pedestrian delay is being modelled Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Zones are added using the Network Layout View Remember that each Junction has its own separate Pedestrian Network If it is not required to model pedestrian delay it is not necessary to add Pedestrian Links etc but timing constraints such as Pedestrian Signal Group Walk times Clearance times and Pedestrian Protection should still be modelled by including Pedestrian Signal Groups in the Controller model e Add Pedesirian Flow Information Pedestrian Flows are specified in the Traffic Flows View using a separate Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrix for each Junction Remember that even if pedestrian flow information isn t available it is still possible to partially model pedestrian delays by enter
311. nd is also shown in LinSig s main toolbar drop down Scenario list e Choose Assign OD Flows to Routes based on Current Scenario from the Traffic Flows menu The Traffic Flow Assignment Options dialog box is displayed This Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 189 allows various options relating to how the assignment is carried out to be specified The different options are described below e After setting the required options if any click OK LinSig will carry out a full delay based assignment of the entire network The time taken to assign flows will vary from instantaneous to several minutes depending on the size of Network number of Routes level of traffic and level of Route choice in the Network LinSig will display a progress dialog box which monitors the assignment s progress Delay Based Assignment DelayBased Assignment Scenario Scenario 1 Pass 2 2 Largest Route Transfer 6pcu Deviation from desired equilibrium 0 78 Abort with no changes Abort keeping progress so far e The two progress indicators displayed are o Largest Route Transfer This shows the largest amount of traffic the assignment process has moved between Routes on the last iteration This will diminish as the assignment converges If you feel that the amount of traffic being moved is insignificant for your purposes it is possible to terminate the assignment early by clicking Abort Keeping progress so far o D
312. ndividual movement leaving the Lane for example a left turn or ahead movement The Edit Lane Dialog Box will contain a separate Movement tab for each movement 38 Edit Lane 1 1 General Movement Give Way Data Lane Details This movement gives way Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data Multi Lane fe Advanced z F BE Flows General Traffic IA Movmt to 5 1 Ahead j Flow when opposing traffic is stopped Opposing Lanes _ Lane _ Coeficient cir Confict lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Non Give Way Lane 38 Edit Lane 1 2 General Movement Give Way Data Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data Flow when opposing traffic is stopped lw This movement gives way cts eee ppe C Use Maximum Flow while Giving Way Value Use Data Specified Below Use Lane Saturation Flow Value MB Flows General Traffic Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 1439 Use Custom Value pcu Hr ach ete Minimum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 0 Emi g u Opposing Lanes Storage in front of Stopline ca Cir Confiict Bi 2 7 Allopposing To 6 1 left 2 2 I Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Give Way Lane The settings available on each Movement tab are e This Movement Gives Way The This Movement Gives Way tick box specifies whether the movement gives way to any other movements from other Lanes or whether it is simply controlled by signals or even free f
313. ne immediately upstream of the Network boundary This is potentially inaccurate as traffic entering the Zone upstream of the Network boundary should really reappear on the downstream Lanes with the same cyclic flow profile This can be rectified using Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 249 the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting on Lanes which are fed by the Zones just downstream of the region boundary This setting which can be found on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box causes LinSig to take the cyclic flow profile of traffic exiting the Network into the Zone just upstream of the region boundary and apply the profile shape to the traffic exiting the Zone downstream of the boundary Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane set on these Lanes A _AS Traffic Starts or ends in Fones at aur each side of boundary Arm J3 5 Main Road Eastbound a Arm J41 Main Road EB at Ped X Et Arm J4 2 Main Road WB at Ped X N Arm J3 2 Main Road Westbound Paa pr 650 ti X S These Lane Connectors do not i carry traffic between A Network regions Inherit Cyclic Profile from 5 3sPed AN Upstream Exit Lane set on F these Lanes Network Region 2 Network Region 1 e The use of the this method maintains cyclic flow profiles and coordination across the Network region boundary but greatly limits the number of Route
314. ne to another e Pedestrian Routes Pedestrian Routes are comprised of a sequence of Pedestrian Links and Pedestrian Link Connectors from one Pedestrian Zone to another The main purpose of Routes is to specify traffic or Pedestrian flows through the Network at a very detailed level Each Route is allocated a flow either manually or automatically LinSig Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 154 View Reference then aggregates the Route flows to calculate Lane flows and any other traffic flow information required 2S Network Layout View ee I EX w 8 BA A 2 EL sle ALLE SIO e ak elel AEE el Find Junction O Find Arm zl m g f TAA i e IOo E J1 1 Main Road EB at Ped X Arm J1 im Arm J21 Main Road Eastbou J2 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J1 4 _ _________ e J1 4 1 e a fe J1 2 1 H 261 Arm J1 2 Main Road WB at Ped X Arm J2 6 Main Road Westbound ___ ap Jt Ped Crossing z PRC 101 i Total Tr ad Delay 2 0 peu 5 Ave Route Delay Per Ped ae s Ped 5 Controller 1 B we Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All w Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All vi Lane All v Destination Zone All li The Route List View lists all the Traffic or Pedestrian Routes through the Network LinSig scans the Network whenever its structure changes and discovers any new Routes created adding them to the Route List 4 5 1 1 Traffic Route List
315. neral Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 4 1 Left Movement Give Way Data Flow wh ing traffic is stopped W This movement gives way OW WEN Opposing t is stopp f Use Maximum Flow while Giving Way Value C Use Lane Saturation Flow Value Maximum Aow while Giving Way pcu Hr 715 C Use Custom Value pcu Hr Opposing Lanes _ Lane Coefficient Cir Conflict Movements Movement 1 2 v Al opposing To 4 1 Ahead 2 v All opposing To 4 1 Right Use Data Specified Below Points to note are e The section marked Flow when opposing Traffic is stopped if left set to Use Lane Saturation Flow Value will mean that during periods of the cycle where the passing traffic is stopped the rate of egress would be the Lane saturation flow which in this case would be wrong e In order for LinSig to know the time at which traffic from Lane 2 1 and Lane 3 1 is passing the give way entry a clear conflict time is added for each of the opposing Lanes The clear conflict time relates to the cruise time for vehicles travelling between the stop line and the give way point for each movement e In this case there is only a single movement on each Opposing Lane therefore the Opposing Movements part of each Opposing Lane entry is set to All Opposing for each Opposing Lane In more complex examples only certain movements leaving each Opposing Lane may oppose In this case the All Opposing box should be unticke
316. ng but not limited to labeling of the altered versions with the names Info ZIP or any variation thereof including but not limited to different capitalizations Pocket UnZip WiZ or MacZip without the explicit permission of Info ZIP Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip Bugs or Info ZIP e mail addresses or the Info ZIP URL s such as to imply Info ZIP will provide support for the altered versions Info ZIP retains the right to use the names Info ZIP Zip UnZip UnZipSFX WiZ Pocket UnZip Pocket Zip and MacZip for its own source and binary releases Ver 3 2 10 January 2013
317. ng Lanes The application of the above rules enables LinSig to calculate the traffic entering a lane during a time slice and the traffic leaving the Lane during the time slice If the queue length at the start of the time slice is known LinSig can then calculate the queue length at the end of the time slice Modelling a Longer Period A longer time period can be modelled by chaining together a series of time slices to model the evolution of traffic flows into and out of the Lane and the queue on the Lane over time For each time slice the queue at the start of the time slice is assumed to be the same as the Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 32 Essential Background queue at the end of the previous time slice As long as the flow profiles are known for traffic entering the network this method can be used to model a period of any duration 3 1 1 2 Cyclic Flow Profiles The main problem with the above methods is the amount of computation required to model a long time period for example one hour with a sufficiently fine time slice This can lead to large amounts of computation time and although computers have become much faster over the years the effort involved is still significant especially when it is necessary to rerun the model many times for optimisation purposes Cyclic Flow profiles have been used for many years as a way of reducing the number of computations necessary to model a junction This method takes advantage of the fact that whe
318. ng a conflict is not applicable 4 8 2 2 To Change an Signal Group Conflict To change a Signal Group Conflict click on the cell you wish to change to switch between Conflict and No Conflict Each signal group pair actually corresponds to two cells on the matrix due to symmetry and so setting the Conflict status of one cell will automatically set the conflict status of the other cell for that signal group pair Remember that grey cells indicate that the Signal Groups run together in a Phase and so they cannot be set to conflict Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 172 View Reference 4 9 Phase View The Phase View is used to create Traffic Signal Phases for each Controller and to display and edit the Signal Groups running in each of the Controllers Phases Each Phase represents a Phase configured in the controller and available for use in Phase Sequences The Phase View is opened by choosing Phase View from the LinSig Controllers menu Each Phase View shows the Phases for a single Controller 4 9 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more SGroup Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each SGroup View shows the Signal Groups for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the s
319. ng determined your Licence ID enter it as requested LinSig will also request some additional information such as Office Name and Computer User Reference Although this information is not essential it is strongly recommended to enter it as it clearly identifies to us which PC the licence has been installed on We are then able to use this information when your IT department requests a list of installed licences in your organisation when if software support is renewed Click Continue when you have entered all the information Choose Activation Method f 1 PC 4 PE or 10 PC licences In order to activate this product please enter your licence ID below then click Continue to proceed with the activation process Your licence ID wil have been supplied to you as part of your software package Licence ID LICTIA Office Location Lincoln Computer User Ref Pcoo34 Thiz should be something that can be used to reference this installation later for example a Computer Name or the User s Name or just an internal reference number Continue 4 LinSig will provide you with an Installation ID displayed in red that is a customised code for the installation of LinSig on your PC The Installation ID should be sent to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 296 Examples JCT Consultancy either by email or by telephone If your email system is compatible a hyperlink is provided in the activation dialog box that will email your details t
320. ng movement to be set Storage in Front of Stop Line This tab is only available if the Lane is signal controlled and one or more movements on the Lane give way to other Lanes The tab includes settings relating to various bonus capacity effects applicable only to right turns at signals Non Blocking Storage This tab is only available when the Lane contains a mixture of give way and non give way movements and is signal controlled It is principally used for situations where an opposed right turn movement may block a non give way movement usually ahead General Settings Ty Edit Lane 1 1 Lane Details Lane Control Controller Full Green SGroup Arrow SGroup SCATS Detectors Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed iM Lane ls Signal Controlled C1 Lincoln Road Nortk 1 ka Hi Flows G Give Way Summary eneral Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movement Gwing Way Mum Opposing Lanes To 5 1 Ahead No This lane does not hawe storage in front of the stopline lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel The General tab contains the following settings Lane is Signalled Controlled Ticking the Lane is Signal Controlled box specifies the Lane as a signal controlled Lane and allows the Controlling Signal Groups to be specified Controller The Controller setting specifies which traffic signal controller controls this Lane Normally this will be the Controller controlling the Junction to which the Lane belongs Full Green SG
321. ng out model recalculation as soon as model input data changes This can be useful when making a large number of minor input data edits to a very large model which can take a second or two to recalculate All Scenarios will be given the status Not Calculated and will not show any results in the Scenario view When the model editing is complete the recalculation status should be changed to one of the above settings to trigger recalculation of model results Any Scenario which has been successfully recalculated since the last change to any input data affecting model results will show a status of calculated in the Scenario View If for any reason a Scenario cannot be recalculated a status of Error will be displayed The details of what may have caused the error can be found in the Error View 4 12 1 8 Controlling Batch Signal Time Optimisation in the Scenario View The Scenario View can be used to optimise signal times for a number of Scenarios at once This avoids having to optimise each Scenario individually by selecting each Scenario in turn before clicking the Optimise button on the main toolbar If desired each Scenario can still be optimised individually using Optimise Current Scenario for Delay PRC on the Optimiser menu Further details on Batch Optimisation are given in the Signal Optimisation using Scenarios section below 4 12 2 Traffic Assignment using Scenarios The Desired Flows Matrix as displayed i
322. ng the way LinSig operates such as Auto updates and Auto save The Colours Font Text Sizes and other visual settings can usually be altered for items displayed in Views Generally it is recommended to retain the default colours unless a good reason to change them arises as this will avoid confusion between different users This User Guide assumes that colours are set to default when referring to the colour of items and objects Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 2 Using International Options 53 4 2 Using International Options LinSig includes a number of features to make it easier to use outside of the UK These include e Drive on the Right Graphical Views When the Drive on the Right option is set LinSig displays graphical Views using Drive on the Right logic e SCATS Based Terminology LinSig can display Traffic Signal Controller based views using terminology and labelling consistent with the SCATS adaptive traffic control system developed by New South Wales Roads and Traffic Authority e SCATS Controller specification LinSig allows you to specify input data for SCATS controllers in a form consistent with the SCATS system e Level of Service indicator LinSig can display a Level of Service indicator for Lanes Junctions and the entire Network e SCATS Flow Import LinSig can import traffic flows from detector data output by the SCATS Traffic Reporter program e SCATS Daisy Chain offs
323. ngle Long Lane This caters for the majority of common cases other cases involving multiple flares attached to a Long Lane can be modelled by making simplifying assumptions as was the case in LinSig 1 amp LinSig 2 When any issues have been resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as described above e Review Lane Connectors LinSig attempts to deduce the correct Lane Connectors from LinSig 2 Link Connectors These will usually be appropriate for LinSig 3 but should be checked e Add Additional Lane Connectors Add Lane Connectors for any Lanes which have been created from splitting multi Lane Links e Review lengths of Short Lanes LinSig 3 s traffic model takes into account issues which have sometimes previously been modelled by reducing the modelled Lane length using LINSAT In LinSig 3 the physical lane length should always be used If further fine tuning of Short Lane usage is required the Custom Occupancies can be adjusted e Review Signalling on Lanes Any LinSig 3 Lanes created by splitting LinSig 2 multi Lane Links will by default be created with the same signal control on each Lane LinSig 3 allows different control on each Lane e Review Movement Settings Any LinSig 3 Lanes created by splitting LinSig 2 multi Lane Links will by default be created with the same movement settings for each Lane The movement settings should be reviewed using the Movements tabs of the Edit Lane dialog box to check
324. ning Counts for each Junction are displayed showing counts values in PCU e Difference and GEH for each Turning Count The Difference and GEH can optionally be displayed alongside each Turning Count value Counts whose GEH is greater than 5 0 will be displayed in red This option can be selected by ticking the Display Diff GEH after count value tick box on the Turning Counts View toolbar e Junction Arm Inflow Totals The total incoming counted flow is displayed for each Arm entering the Junction This helps with locating poor quality or inconsistent counts e Junction Arm Outflow Totals The total outgoing counted flows is displayed for each Arm leaving the Junction These values can be compared with Inflow totals to assist with detecting inconsistent counts Note that if you have entered Counts for turning movements that pass through more than two Arms these will not be displayed in the Turning Counts View 4 14 1 2 Zone Totals Each Zone in the Network graphically displays the total counted Origins and Destinations As in the Matrix Estimation View the Zone Totals can be implied by adding nearby Turning Counts or can be explicitly entered values Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 208 View Reference 4 14 1 3 Editing Turning Counts and Zone Totals Turning Counts and Zone Totals can be edited in the Turning Counts View by double clicking with the mouse and entering the new count value in PCU This will update the Count which wi
325. nings indicate only a possible problem which it would be wise to check e Cyclic Flow Profiles View The Cyclic Flow Profiles View allows Lane Flow Profile graphs to be laid out on a page to be viewed or printed Both Flow and queue profiles can be displayed and profiles can also be displayed disaggregated by Route to show the detail of different platoons passing through the Lane An alternative to the Cyclic Flow Profiles View is to embed mini Flow Profiles in the Network Layout View e SGroup Data View The SGroup Data View simply lists the Signal Groups currently defined in the Controller model together with input data and results for each Signal Group e Undo History View The Undo History View displays all the previous editing steps and when they occurred in the current editing session The View can be used to revert back to any point within the current editing session e Lane Data Grid View The Lane Data Grid View displays Lane data in a spreadsheet style grid view Where possible data items can be edited directly on the grid allowing rapid bulk data changes albeit with a less informative user interface Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 22 LinSig Basics 2 4 International Options LinSig includes a number of features to make it easier to use outside of the UK These include e Drive on the Right Graphical Views When the Drive on the Right option is set LinSig displays graphical Views using Drive on the Right logic e SCATS
326. nk from Pedestrian Links pop out menu on the Network menu It is important to remember that deleting a Pedestrian Link also deletes any Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Routes associated with the Pedestrian Link Undo is of course available in case of accidental deletion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 129 4 3 11 Joining Pedestrian Links with Link Connectors Pedestrian Link Connectors are used in LinSig to define possible movements between Pedestrian Links when Pedestrian need to use more than one crossing to cross from one side of a junction to another For example Pedestrian Link Connectors are used as shown below to define the movements possible through a pedestrian island i i Triangular Pedestrian Island mB P3 Qe Om S Pal WO ETA adl H The diagram above shows three Pedestrian Link Connectors joining three Pedestrian Links to define which pedestrian movements can be carried out on the island q P 4 3 11 1 Creating Pedestrian Link Connectors Pedestrian Link Connectors can either be created between two existing Pedestrian Links or can be created between an existing Pedestrian Link and a new Pedestrian Link created at the same time as the new Pedestrian Link Connector The facility to create new Pedestrian Link Connectors on the fly allows Pedestrian Networks to be built more speedily To create a Pedestrian Link Connector between tw
327. ns Junc All Arm all Lane All Conn The information shown by the Junction includes Junction Name This is a name which identifies the Junction PRC The Practical Reserve Capacity of the Junction Traffic Delay The total traffic delay on all Lanes associated with the Junction in PCUh Pedestrian Delay The delay per Pedestrian in secs Ped The Junction s Controller s The Controller or Controllers associated with the Junction SCATS Daisy Chain offset The offset of the Junction s Controller s as both a positive and negative relative value in seconds Level of Service The Level of Service indicator for the Junction SCATS Site Number The site number of the Junction which is used when using the SCATS Flow Data Import Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 4 1 Creating New 4 3 Network Layout View 63 Junctions When a new LinSig file is created LinSig automatically creates a new Junction If your model only contains a single Junction you can use this initial Junction and there is no need to create any further Junctions Where your model contains several Junctions additional Junctions can be created as follows e Choose Add Junction from the Junctions pop out menu on the Network menu A new Junction will be created which can be dragged into its desired position and dropped by clicking with the mouse e When the Junction is dropped the Edit Junction dialog box will be displayed T
328. number into the bin Drag Lane Flow A Number into Bin os a Remove all 200 PCU from Lane and remove in and out flows 16 ar F o O 5 I mm Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound T i as 4 Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound e LinSig will delete the Lane Flow and any dependent incoming and outgoing Lane Connector Flows 50 200 Deleting Lane Based Connector Flows using Drag and Drop Lane Based Flows can also be deleted from Lane Connectors using drag and drop This can be carried out as follows e Click on the Lane Connector Flow number to be deleted with the mouse e Start dragging the Lane Connector Flow number A small bin icon will appear next to the Lane Connector e Drag over the bin and release the mouse effectively dropping the Lane Connector Flow number into the bin e LinSig will delete the Lane Connector Flow 4 3 9 5 Entering Lane Based Flows using the Edit Lane Dialog Box The Network Layout View s graphical drag and drop method is the easiest and quickest way of editing Lane Based Flows However this method cannot be currently used for every editing action For example Uniform Flows can only be currently edited using the Edit Lane dialog as described below The Edit Lane dialog is not as automated as using the drag and drop method and is therefore not as fast to use but allows finer control when editing Lane Based Flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 119 Th
329. o Edit Network Control Plans to specify a Phase Sequence for each Controller e Phase Overlap View The Phase Overlap View is used to specify how a Signal Group should behave in the Clearance Interval between two running Phases The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Select which controller to display in this view Select which Phase Change to display in this view Specify whether a Signal Group should overlap or not during the Clearance Interval of the Phase Change o View which Signal Groups run before the Clearance Interval and which run after the Clearance Interval e Signal Timings View The Signal Timings View is an important view which shows Phase amp Signal Group timings Running Interval structure and Clearance Interval structure for a Controller The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o View the Start and Finish times of Signal Groups throughout a Signal Cycle o View Phase Change Points and change them by dragging with the mouse Manage Controller cycle times Optimise Phase length for individual Controllers View Late Starts and Early Cut off Greens View Clearance Interval structure including overlaps O O O 30 e Lane Timings View The Lane Timings View is similar to the Signal Timings View but displays signal green times for each Lane rather than each Signal Signal Group Each Lane s start and end of green can be adjusted to allow for effects such as Ver 3 2 10 January 2013
330. o JCT JCT will provide you with a customised activation code for your PC by return Whilst waiting for your code you can leave the Activation Dialog box if desired using the Activate Later button You can return to the dialog at any point following the same procedure as above i Activate Cx Installation details Product LinSig a 0 1 7 Licence ID LICTA Installation ID KD2HDZ 95MN5Z E2M43U LOZM4C ER3C8H Office Name Lincoln Computer Ref PCO034 Prev Activation Code PEHANS 0152R0 D3T18T DH3CK ORSBID 4X0520 Operating System Windows Vista Service Pack 2 Please contact JCT to obtain your Activation Code quoting the details above For your convenience you can click the link below to compose an email to request an Activation Code Alternatively you can click the Copy button to copy all the installation details to the clipboard ready to be pasted into an email to the email address below activation jctconsultancy co uk Copy all details to Clipboard Activation code Once you have received your Activation Code please enter it below then press Continue Alternatively if you received your Activation Code via email you can copy the ActivationCode from the email and paste it in by clicking the Paste button below then press Continue Paste Activation Code from Clipboard Activation Code Continue Activate Later 5 When you receive your A
331. o Left from the pop up menu The length of the Short Lane is set as 5 on the Lane Details tab of the Short Lane s Edit Lane dialog box Unlike earlier versions of LinSig LINSAT does not need to be used to calculate an expected usage of the Short Lane LinSig 3 s traffic model deals with this internally Physical Flare length 5 PCUs f s 1600 la gt S2 1800 Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 2 Lane Length Am 1 Lane 1 This is a short lane Physical Lane Length PCL 5 0 Arm 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 8 Examples 7 1 3 Example 3 Left Turn Give Way This example is a signal controlled junction where a left turn is controlled on a give way basis The left turn Lane is assumed to be long enough not to block or be blocked by the ahead traffic in the adjacent Lane The left turners must give way to two movements Lane 2 1 and Lane 3 1 Assuming an Intercept of 715 and coefficient of 0 22 the parameters are entered into the left turns Movement tab of the Lane 1 1 Edit Lane dialog box as shown below Clear Conflict o Network Layout View co JL I es SB alala BA 1 2 21El SS alre SSX OS El Find Junction Pag Find Arm Pe Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 279 Edit Lane 1 1 Ge
332. o existing Pedestrian Links e Drag the starting Pedestrian Link s Connection Point with the mouse A Pedestrian Link Connector and new downstream Pedestrian Link will tear off of the starting Pedestrian Link Connector Drag the mouse pointer over the Connection Point on the Pedestrian Link where the Pedestrian Link Connector will end The tear off Pedestrian Link will disappear indicating no new Pedestrian Link will be created Drop the Pedestrian Link Connector on the downstream Pedestrian Link by releasing the mouse A new Pedestrian Link Connector will be created between the two Pedestrian Links The Pedestrian Link Connector will be created with a default walk time which can be edited if desired as described below The ability to create a new Pedestrian Link simultaneously with a Pedestrian Link Connector is intended to speed the creation of Pedestrian Networks To create a Pedestrian Link Connector with a new Pedestrian Link e Drag the starting Pedestrian Link s Connection Point with the mouse A Pedestrian Link Connector and new downstream Pedestrian Link will tear off of the starting Pedestrian Link Connector Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 130 View Reference e Drop the tear off Pedestrian Link anywhere other than on an existing Pedestrian Link The Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box will open allowing you to enter the new Pedestrian Link s Name Junction Controlling Signal Group and crossing time as described ab
333. o traffic flows The main difference is that pedestrian flows are entered as an OD matrix for each Junction as opposed to a single OD matrix for the entire Network as with Traffic This is because e t simplifies the specification of pedestrian flow data e Counting a pedestrian OD matrix for a large network is very difficult and expensive Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 145 The benefits of modelling pedestrians moving between junctions is not great as pedestrian platoons tend to disperse rapidly as pedestrians cross the road between junctions walk at different soeeds stop between junctions etc Where detailed pedestrian modelling is important other more complex and significantly more expensive specialist modelling tools exist As well as using pedestrian OD matrices in a similar way to traffic OD matrices LinSig also uses Pedestrian Routes in a similar manner to traffic Routes A Pedestrian Route is defined as a single path between two Pedestrian Zones Pedestrian OD Flows are manually assigned to Pedestrian Routes using local knowledge of Pedestrian movements at each Junction This is not usually an onerous task as each Junctions Pedestrian Network is usually quite small 4 4 3 Managing Flow Groups using the Traffic Flow Group List The Traffic Flow Group List displays the currently defined Flow Groups and allows new Flow Groups to be created and edited A new LinSig model is always created with an empty Flow
334. ocked 33 2 2 Ji 2 1 Unlocked J3 2 2 J2 5 1 Unlocked J3 2 1 J2 5 1 Unlocked J3 2 2 J3 6 1 150 Unlocked 1347 1a inina Ci 14 8 1 Fi 3 L Ln omrFPreoarwriAaar oa oo he et mn J e The permitted status column can be changed to one of three settings These are o Allow The Route can be used by LinSig regardless of the policies o Disallow The Route cannot be used regardless of the policies o Use Policy Whether the Route is allowed is governed by the Policies selected in the Policy Settings for Permitted Routes box at the bottom of the Edit Permitted Routes dialog box The result of applying the policy to a Route is shown in the Permitted Status column as either Use Policy Allow or Use Policy Disallow as appropriate Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 158 View Reference o Currently two policies are available These are Make Circular Routes non Permitted and Make U turn Routes non permitted It is recommended that both policies are kept switched on unless problems are encountered with a particular Network Remember the explicit Allow or Disallow can always be used to override the policies e The Lock Route Flow column can be used to lock the flow on the Route e Click OK to save the permitted and locked status for the Routes Any Route which is disallowed will have its Route Flow set to zero This will cause a flow deficit between the total Route flows in the Actual Flows OD
335. ode or in Walk For Green mode 5 2 1 Isolated Operation Pedestrian Signal Groups The pedestrian Signal Group can have values specified for Walk Time Clearance 1 and Clearance 2 When the pedestrian Signal Group runs in a Phase LinSig will run it on green for the duration of the Walk Time and will then make use of the Clearance values to constrain when the Phase can terminate and when the next Phase can start This is illustrated as follows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 260 Detailed Controller Background Phase may not terminate Phase may terminate Next phase may start Isolated Operation pedestrian Signal Group 5 2 2 Walk for Green Pedestrian Signal Groups Walk for Green Pedestrian Signal Groups model the pedestrian signal group running green for the running interval of the Phase The Clearance 1 value is automatically treated as zero and only the Clearance 2 value needs to be specified This is illustrated as follows Late Minimum Variable Green Duration Early cut Yellow All Start Green off Green Red Clearance 1 Clearance always 0 Phase may not end until Clearance 2 is finished Walk for Green pedestrian Signal Group 5 2 3 Pedestrian Protection A traffic Signal Group can offer protection to a pedestrian Signal Group in one of four ways e Timed for part of the Walk Interval e Duration of Walk Interval e Timed for Walk Interval and part of the Clearance e Full protection during Walk and Clearance Inte
336. of Repeat Select Blocks In the example it is desired to have the following report layout e Project and User Details Table e SGroup Diagram Controller 1 e SGroup Conflicts Controller 1 e SGroup Diagram Controller 2 e SGroup Conflicts Controller 2 e SGroup Diagram Controller 3 e SGroup Conflicts Controller 3 e Repeat for all Controllers The following shows how this Report layout is defined in the Report Builder Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 272 Reporting and Printing Current Report Definition Title Ad 210229 rim Signal Groups Available Fragments Show Non SCATS Report Definition Page Header Project and User Details Repeat Select For All Controllers SGroup Diagram SGroup Conflicts End A Page Header Fage Footer Project and User Details Network Layout Diagram SGroup Input Data SGroup Diagram a Network Control Layout E 1m 42 Phase Overlaps SGroup Conflicts SGroups in Phase Phase Diagram Phase Minimums Lane Input Data Give Wiay Lane Input Data SN Lane Saturation Flows Lane Connector Input Data FG raffic Flow Groups ka Add Fragment to Curent Report Add Repeat Select Options for Definition selected fragments 333434 The SGroup Diagram shows the SGroup layout for a Traffic Signal Controller As the above example shows the Report Definition includes a SGroup Diagram Fragment and a SGroup Conflicts Fragment enclosed by a Controller Repeat
337. of the Lane is the amount of traffic which can exit the Lane assuming infinite arriving traffic flows in the same turning proportions as the arriving demand traffic flows Degree of Saturation The Degree of Saturation of the Lane This is defined as the ratio of Flow to Capacity for the Lane Entering Flow PCU The total traffic flow entering the Lane from upstream Lanes This may be lower than the Demand Flow if traffic is held up on upstream oversaturated Lanes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 20 Network Results View 223 e Leaving Flow PCU The total traffic flow leaving the Lane This may be lower than the Entering Flow if the Lane is oversaturated e Turners in Gaps PCU The total flow exiting a Give Way Lane during gaps in the opposing traffic e Turners When Unopposed PCU The total turning flow turning during a Give Way Lane s unopposed period normally when a green arrow is controlling the Lane e Turners in Intergreen PCU The flow leaving a Give Way Lane during the Intergreen e Uniform Delay PCUHr The total Uniform Delay suffered by traffic over the modelled time period A more detailed description of Uniform Delay is provided in the Modelling Section e Random amp Oversaturation Delay PCUHr The total combined Random amp Oversaturation Delay suffered by traffic over the modelled time period A more detailed description of Random amp Oversaturation Delay is provided in the Modelling section
338. of these key items are described in Definitions in section 2 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 59 4 3 2 1 Recommended Network Structure A LinSig Network s Arms and Lanes can be structured in any way desired however the following describes a recommended structure for Networks LinSig does not require or enforce this structure but sticking to the structure will make Networks more consistent easier to understand and visually tidier The key elements of this structure are e Junction Inbound Arms Lanes These are the Arms amp Lanes on which traffic approaches a Junction s stop line and which model capacity at the stop line e Junction Exit Arms Lanes These Arms amp Lanes are used purely to assist with Network structure and do not need to model capacity queues or delays The Lanes should be modelled with unconstrained infinite saturation flow Lanes and with a nominal length of 1 PCU e Junction Turning Lane Connectors The Junction Turning Lane Connectors are used to represent the turning movements within the Junction The cruise time allocated to these connectors should be the time traffic takes at turning cruise speed from the stop line of the Lane on which it enters the Junction to the point it leaves the Junction This will usually be 2 10 seconds for a typical size of signal junction e Inter Junction Lane Connectors The Inter Junction Connectors represent the road between the exit from one Junction
339. om Lane Connectors LinSig models the queue build up in a Short Lane constraining it to the available space If a Short Lane fills up the queue will block back into the adjacent ahead Lane reducing its capacity Long Lane Street Short Lane Where signalled Short Lanes are relatively long and are unlikely to empty during a typical green period they can generally be modelled as a Long Lane which can sometimes be useful in simplifying complex Lane arrangements LinSig 3 1 reintroduces the ability to model simple short lanes in a similar way to LinSig 2 These are modelled in a significantly more basic way than LinSig 3 and should only be used where there is a specific reason to do so for example compatibility with a LinSig 2 model Further information is available in the Configuring Lane Settings section 4 3 6 1 Understanding Lanes in LinSig 3 LinSig 3 includes a range of new more detailed flare and blocking sub models which allow LinSig to model a much wider range of standard lane arrangements without the need for simplifying assumptions than previous versions of LinSig or many other similar models The new sub models mean that model structure is much simplified and more intuitive For example LinSig 3 no longer uses Links to group Lanes Generally lane geometry can be entered directly and LinSig deals internally with issues such as the interaction of short and Long Lanes and Lanes receiving different signalling Whilst LinS
340. omatically recalculate results for All Scenarios When optimising optimise for All Scenarios a ga ima B Number Scenario Name Flow Group Network Control Plan Flows Time Cycle Time s PRC Delay pcuHr LoS Status Mark 1 AM Peak AIl Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 88 3 11 05 D Delay Optimised 2 PM Peak PM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 150 143 2 7 58 C Delay Optimised 3 AM Peak 2015 AM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 150 6 8 57 52 E Delay Optimised 4 PM Peak 2015 PM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 150 60 3 21 84 C Delay Optimised The Scenario View lists all the Scenarios displaying the following for each Scenario e The Scenario Name This should be a descriptive name for the Scenario For example AM Peak with Right Turn Phase e The Scenario Flow Group The Traffic Flow Group used by the Scenario e The Scenario Network Control Plan The Network Control Plan used by the Scenario Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 184 View Reference e The Scenario Time Period The Time Period covered by the Scenario This is inherited from the Scenario s Flow Group and is edited in the Traffic Flow Group View e The Scenario Cycle Time The cycle time or cycle times used by this Scenario This is described in more detail below in Managing Cycle Times e The Scenario Results Summary Summary results including the Practical Reserve Capacity P
341. on s Pedestrian Flow Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit Pedestrian Route Flows should be edited to reassign the lost Pedestrian Flow either to other existing Routes or to new Routes when the Junction s Pedestrian Network is complete Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 131 4 3 12 Defining Pedestrian Start and End Points using Pedestrian Zones Pedestrian Zones are used in LinSig to define points where Pedestrians start and end their walk through a LinSig Junction All Pedestrian movements start from a Pedestrian Zone and end at a Pedestrian Zone Pedestrian Zones are also used in the Traffic Flows View to reference the start and end points of Pedestrian movements entered in the Traffic Flow View s Pedestrian Junction Origin Destination matrices Network Layout View H ee t BIB lela Bo 2 21 2 8 S S AFL Sex OAS elie Ala a Find Junction Fag Find Arm Pe g Layer Filter 1V1 A eH Arm 5 l Arm 1 London Road e A y Arm 2 High Street A Arm 4 i s PCi e e om fk XS 2 L d c High St London Rd Park St PRC 66 7 Total Traffic Delay 133 6 pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 77 2 s Ped Level Of Service F Pedestrian Zones SCATS Site Num 1032 4881S Wed A M j Route Filter Reset Origin Zone Al Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm all Lane All Conni A Pedestrian Zone should be created for each po
342. on Count values earlier in the sequence By processing the larger Turning Counts last this will have the effect of treating them as more significant that smaller Turning Count values Select Zones for Matrix Estimation W Estimate over all Traffic Zones Route Flow Assignment As part of the Matrix Estimation process LinSig will need to assign traffic flow to routes Click Edit Assignment Options if you wish to edit the current traffic flow assignment options Edit Assignment Options Use existing matrix as prior matrix for Matrix Estimation process Process counts in order of increasing size Click Estimate Matrix to continue with the matrix estimation process Estimate Matrix Cancel 4 13 6 Validating an Estimated Matrix or Assignment The Matrix Estimation View can be used to validate a Matrix Based model by comparing Traffic Counts to assigned flows This can be based on either an estimated or manually entered OD Matrix which is assigned either automatically or manually to the Network The Matrix Estimation View is simply comparing counted and modelled flows regardless of how they are modelled and providing goodness of fit statistics Counts and assigned Flows can be compared in two ways These are e Using the Matrix Estimation View This provides the most comprehensive way of comparing Counts and modelled flows across the whole Network e Using the Traffic Count Matrix in the Network Layo
343. on each Lane Connector leaving the Lane Again these can be specified either as PCU values or as percentage values For models containing more than one Junction it will also be necessary to ensure that flows are also specified on the Lane Connectors between the Junctions Depending on the reliability of the flow data between Junctions there may be inconsistencies between the amount of traffic leaving an upstream Junction and the amount of traffic arriving at the stop line of the downstream Junction Assuming you are happy to accept these inconsistencies the LinSig traffic model will automatically scale the traffic arriving at a Junction to ensure the Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 28 SCATS Flow Data Import 255 stop line flows are respected The Network Layout View s Flow Consistency Mode is useful for checking for any gross inconsistencies Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 256 View Reference 4 29 Animating LinSig Views several of the LinSig Views can be animated to dynamically show how signal timings change and coordinate throughout a typical cycle LinSig steps through a typical cycle showing the situation for each time step in a number of views The Views which can be animated include e The Network Layout View animates the display of turning movements on green and queue build up and decay on Lanes e The SGroup View animates the display of running and non running Signal Groups e The Phasing Plan View shows the running Phase
344. on the geometric nature of the junction In the example above it is assumed that the two yellow vehicles stored in front of the stop line will clear during the Intergreen period Any other vehicles waiting behind the stop line will wait for the next cycle Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig 47 Bonus effect from vehicles waiting in the junction prior to the start of a right turn arrow This concept which is unique to LinSig requires careful consideration but is easily observed at any existing junction with a right turn green arrow When right turners are controlled in this way there are no stationary vehicles in front of the stop line at the end of green which can then clear the junction in the following Intergreen period However an equivalent storage effect applies because of the way in which vehicles move off at the start of the arrow signal group green period This effect is controlled by the Right Turn Factor The above figure illustrates the concept of the Right Turn Factor At the start of the right turn arrow effective green Signal Group 5 the first car will move off to clear the junction However it will be about 3 seconds later when the fourth car shown in red is able to move over the stop line Effectively the first 3 seconds of arrow time have discharged 3 cars after which cars can cross the stop line at the saturation flow Without this storage effect the first 3 seconds would only have discharged
345. only important to the matrix estimation process when significant route choice occurs within the modelled network Any matrix cells which are accurately known prior to estimation should be specified in the Traffic Flows View and locked as described in the Traffic Flow Views section 4 13 5 2 Estimating the Matrix When the above prerequisites are satisfied the matrix can be estimated as follows Choose Estimate Flow Matrix from Turning Counts based on Current Scenario from the Traffic Flows menu LinSig displays the Matrix Estimation Settings dialog box Make any necessary changes to settings Further details on the settings available are described below LinSig will carry out the matrix estimation followed by an assignment of the new matrix to the Network The length of time taken for the matrix estimation process is dependent on the size of Network the number of Zones the amount of multiple route choice and loops in the network the level of weaving allowed between Junctions and the general traffic level in the Network A simple example with 2 staggered T Junctions 4 Zones no street route choice and full weaving typically takes less than 10 seconds on a modern office PC A larger more complex network may take substantially longer It should be remembered though that doing the process by hand would take substantially longer and the use of an OD matrix leads to time savings when specifying network flows later in the modelling
346. ooming graphical views very easy If you are used to applications which zoom in the opposite direction to LinSig when using the mouse wheel its direction can be reversed in Program Options Undo Any command can be undone by choosing Undo from the edit menu Any number of previous commands can be undone and if necessary redone The Undo History View can also be used to display the sequence of commands Undo will undo Undo is only available for the duration of the editing session and cannot undo past the point when a LinSig model was opened Error View The Error View lists any errors and warnings in the LinSig model being edited Each error is listed together with its location and severity allowing you to get an overview of any problems which require attention This helps to avoid issues such as inadvertently forgetting to enter the Saturation Flow for a Lane and not spotting the problem until after results have been used Please remember though that the Error View is an aid it is not an excuse to neglect proper scrutiny of your work and results i e No errors in the Error View does not imply your model is correct Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 16 LinSig Basics Options and Preferences Many settings such as defaults for new Networks and graphics colours can be customised using the option dialog boxes on the File menu Always on Top Each of the main Views contains a pushpin button to the right of the View s title bar Clickin
347. or any other nominal value in the Pedestrian Desired Flows Matrix and on Pedestrian Routes e Only delay per pedestrian results will be meaningful Aggregate pedestrian delay Statistics will obviously not be valid as LinSig does not know how many pedestrians are using the junction e The lack of aggregate pedestrian delay statistics means that when no pedestrian flows are specified it is not possible to compare overall levels of traffic and pedestrian delay e The best comparison where no pedestrian flow data is available is to compare relative delays per pedestrian on important Pedestrian Routes using the Route List View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 153 4 5 The Route List View The Route List View is used to work with routing patterns within the LinSig Network and lists information on Routes for the currently modelled Scenario E Route List View Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm jal Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Lane Al Destination Zone All Arm Al r Lane All Options for J ey Times and Delay gis Traffic Mode A Pedestrian Mode eet a nt es eee Soe a Lauter All Traffic Advanced Route Show Non Permitted Routes Edit Permitted Routes Sort By Zones 5 Building Options Route t Org Dest On Total Total fone Lane DelayipcuHr Joumey pcuHr 50 75 20 75 107 95 44 95 26 69 36 69 61 80 34 80 125 39 96 39 126 27 89 27 114 90 88 90 115 97
348. or its connectors e Any graphs or other graphical items associated with the Lane For a Lane in a Matrix Based Network region any traffic flow assigned to Routes through the Lane which are deleted will be lost and the Actual Flows Matrix in the Tratfic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Routes through the deleted Lane should be reassigned either to Routes through other Lanes or to Routes through any new Lanes replacing the deleted Lane This can be done by re running the traffic assignment by choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on current Scenario from the modelling menu More information is given in the section on the Traffic Flows View For a Lane in a Lane Based Flow Network region the flow on the Lane and its incoming and Outgoing connectors will be lost Any consequential flow inconsistencies can be viewed using the Network Layout View s Flow Consistency Mode These can be corrected by adding flow to other Lanes to add back the lost traffic flow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 74 View Reference 4 3 6 3 Configuring Lane Settings Lane settings are configured using the Edit Lane dialog box This is opened for a Lane by selecting the Lane and choosing Edit Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network menu or by double clicking the Lane It is advisable to specify Lane turning movements using Lane Connectors as described below before editing Lanes or some options such as specifying g
349. orage Graph as the Graph Type Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 26 Error View 241 4 26 Error View The Error View brings together all error and warning messages for the whole LinSig model It acts like a checklist of errors requiring fixing avoiding the need to trawl the model looking for errors and reducing the likelihood of accidentally missing a problem which could be causing results to be incorrect The Error View can be opened by choosing Show Error View from the View Menu or by double clicking the Error Warning on the Status Bar at the bottom of the Main Window lah Error View l Eee i Likl Flow Group AM Peak 4027 Warning Desired Flows do not match the Actual Route Flows The Error View shows three main pieces of information e The Error s Location This describes where in the LinSig model the error occurs e Code A numeric code identifying the error type e The Error s Severity This describes the consequences of the error The two levels of severity are o Error An Error prevents results from being calculated until the error is fixed o Report Generator Error This indicates a serious error in a report Model results can still be obtained but reports cannot be run o Warning A Warning does not prevent results from being calculated but indicates something that LinSig thinks is suspicious and requires investigating It is completely acceptable for a LinSig model to have warnings provided
350. order The sequence of Phases actually run for each Controller is defined using Phase Sequences e Phase Stream A Phase Stream is a separate set of Phases stored on a Controller which can be used to independently control a junction or portion of a junction Multiple Phase Streams are a feature which are only intended for use with UK controllers In LinSig SCATS Controllers are treated in the same way as a Controller with a single Phase Stream e Phase Sequence A Phase Sequence is the sequence of Phases running on a single controller e Network Control Plan A Network Control Plan specifies Phase Sequences for all Controllers in the Network This allows the phasing arrangement for the entire Network to be specified and stored in one place Each Network Control Plan can be used in one or more Scenarios Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 1 Definitions 9 e Bonus Green An extension or shortening of the effective green period available to traffic Bonus Greens are often used to model underutilised green time or demand dependency e Scenario A Scenario describes all the information needed to fully define a single LinSig model run This includes the Traffic Flow Group the Route Flows the Network Control Plan and the cycle time phase times and offsets e Level Of Service Level of Service provides an indicator typically ranging from A to F of the performance of a signal controlled Lane a Junction or the whole Network It is based on t
351. ormation in a form consistent with SCATS controllers Import of traffic flows from detector data output by the SCATS Traffic Reporter program A Level of Service indicator based on the delay within a network Output of SCATS Daisy Chain relative controller offset information Ability to model two lane flared right turns Ability to model storage in front of the stopline even if there is an adjacent short lane present Option to enter lane based turning flows as percentages instead of absolute PCU values Ability to enter Flow Group specific lane connector parameters Option to add a Minimum Flow value for traffic leaving give way lanes Extended the existing VISSIM interface for compatibility with VISSIM 5 30 UK controllers only Many user interface improvements to aid ease of use 1 5 Software Support Full Software Support for LinSig is available free of charge for the first 12 months after purchasing a brand new site When upgrading a site from an earlier version any existing Software Support is carried over to Version 3 Software Support provides the following benefits Free teleohone email advice on the use of LinSig Basic design tips amp advice for schemes being designed using LinSig A full consultancy service is available at additional cost if more detailed advice is required Free access to the LinSig Software Support Web Site This web site includes advice on using the software frequently asked
352. osely space signal junctions there is little opportunity for traffic to change lanes between junctions In fact in many cases it is good practice to try to design the networks lane structure to minimise the need for traffic making disruptive lane changes There is a balance to be had however as sometimes the ability to change lanes between junctions means that traffic can distribute between lanes more evenly improving capacity Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 60 View Reference The Inter Junction Lane Connectors in LinSig are used to control the Lane changes allowed between Junctions Where no lane changing is possible as is often the case at closely spaced junctions Lane Connectors simply join Lanes on the previous Junction s Exit Lanes to the equivalent Lanes on the downstream Junction s Entry Lanes Where lane changing can take place additional diagonal weaving connectors are used to represent traffic changing lanes between junctions In Matrix Based Network regions this will create additional Routes which provide LinSig s assignment procedure with more scope to balance traffic between Lanes Avoiding Excessive Weaving Care should be taken with the modelling of weaving as excessive use of weaving connectors can create very large numbers of Routes in Matrix Based Network regions many of which are not strictly necessary These excessive Routes can significantly slow down optimisation and assignment within LinSig Often the excessive R
353. ost of a stop in delay terms When optimising LinSig uses this value to determine how much increase in delay to accept for a decrease in stops The higher the value the more important stops become relative to overall network delay The default value is derived from regularly used values for the monetary cost of delay and stops used in many other models This should only be changed if a good reason exists to do so The importance of Stops on an individual Lane can also be weighted using the Stops and delay degree of saturation weights on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 194 View Reference Grouping of Controllers when Optimising Offsets This setting allows Controllers to be grouped together when optimising signal offsets This allows the offsets between Controllers to be locked together and optimised against other Controllers as a group as detailed below Display These Optimiser Settings Each Time you Optimise This setting is selected by default causing the optimiser settings dialog to be shown every time the optimiser is run partly to highlight the available settings and partly to confirm the current optimiser settings If this dialog becomes annoying it can be prevented from appearing at every optimisation by deselecting this option It can however still be displayed by choosing Optimiser Settings from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu if settings require changing Managing
354. ough not perfect it is a useful way of gaining a basic insight to a intersection e If aquery is urgent please mark it as so explaining what aspects are urgent We may be able to get back to you out of UK office hours if the query is concise enough e In some circumstances it may be easier to discuss an issue on the phone If this is the case we will arrange a mutually convenient time for us to ring you 1 6 Training JCT Consultancy provides a wide range of training courses covering both the use of our software and general traffic signal design Full details of all our courses are available on our web site www jctconsultancy co uk Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 1 7 Model Auditing 5 1 7 Model Auditing JCT can provide a comprehensive model auditing service at a level of detail to suit needs and budgets This can vary from a basic check of the model with a brief note on issues arising to an in depth audit with a full report Details of our fixed cost auditing of LinSig models are available on our web site www jctconsultancy co uk 1 8 Consult Assist Consult Assist is an increasingly popular option for new LinSig users especially in smaller organisation where there are no other experienced LinSig users With Consult Assist JCT will help you design and or model a scheme whilst teaching you how use of LinSig on the job to build a model of the scheme At the end of the process you will have a scheme designed by traffic signal exp
355. out each step are available from the Views Reference section Check Loaded LinSig 1 Model LinSig will indicate any LinSig 1 multi Lane Links which require splitting into Lanes and highlights them in red or orange This indicates o Red LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting but is unable to split the Link automatically Resolve any issues with ambiguous Link structures as described below When the issues are resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as below o Orange LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting and is able to do so automatically without any additional information Right click on each Link with the mouse and choose Accept Lane Structure to split the Link into Lanes Correct Illegal Lane Structures If the Link is highlighted in red LinSig cannot interpret how to split the Link without further help The two most likely reasons for this are o It is ambiguous which Long Lane a Short Lane should be associated with This can be clarified by right clicking on the Short Lane and choosing Feeder Lane on Left or Feeder Lane on Right as appropriate o LinSig 2 could model Links containing several Short Lanes but had the restriction that all Lanes had to have the same green times and turning movements LinSig 3 s more sophisticated Short Lane blocking model can model independent control and turning movements on each Lane but currently can only model a single Short Lane atta
356. oute numbers are due to LinSig creating Routes which weave backward and forwards between Lanes many times along a corridor Unfeasible Routes can be quickly located and marked as non permitted using the Route List View This will prevent LinSig from incorrectly assigning traffic to them and also significantly soeed up the model Automatic Identification of Excessive Weaving Routes LinSig 3 1 introduces a new method of automatically identifying Routes which excessively weave backwards and forwards between Lanes This can be used as follows e In Network Settings check that the option Allow use of Weaving Connectors is selected e On each Lane Connector which carries weaving traffic set the Mark as Weaving Connector option in the Edit Lane Connector dialog box Weaving Lane Connectors are shown dotted Weaving Connectors 7 aa BI O as mag J2 42 gt QE J3 1 2 gt 2 o B eee Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound Dv J2 2 2 m we J3 4 2 O pez Oo BM J3 4 1 e Set a weaving penalty sec per PCU in the assignment options dialog box This penalty is added to the assignment journey time of all traffic using this connector This acts as a deterrent for traffic using this connector and discourages traffic from choosing Routes containing a high proportion of Weaving Lane Connectors The weaving penalty only effe
357. ove e Click OK in the Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box A new Pedestrian Link will be created with a Pedestrian Link Connector joining it to the starting Pedestrian Link e Edit the new Pedestrian Link and Link Connector as appropriate 4 3 11 2 Editing Pedestrian Link Connectors Pedestrian Link Connectors are edited as follows e Select a Pedestrian Link Connector by clicking it with the mouse e Choose Edit Pedestrian Link Connector from the Pedestrian Link Connectors pop out menu on the Network Menu This opens the Edit Pedestrian Link Connector dialog box Edit Pedestrian Link Connector Mean Walk Time Between Crossings 5 3 OK Cancel e The Edit Pedestrian Link Connector dialog box allows the Pedestrian Link Connector s only setting to be edited o Mean Walk Time Between Crossings The walk time between crossings is the time for a Pedestrian to walk across a pedestrian island or section of footway from the end of one pedestrian crossing to the start of another 4 3 11 3 Deleting a Pedestrian Link Connector A Pedestrian Link Connector can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Pedestrian Link Connector from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Pedestrian Link Connector also deletes any Pedestrian Routes passing through the Pedestrian Link Connector Any Pedestrian flow allocated to Pedestrian Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and Juncti
358. ow from the Routes pop out menu on the Traffic Flows menu The Edit Route Flow dialog box appears which allows the Route Flow in PCU to be specified Edit Route Route Flow Route No 11 How Route Flow 203 Lock this flow value when assigning OD flows Lane Flows in the Network Layout View and Network Results View and the Actual Flows matrix in the Traffic Flows View are updated to reflect the new Route Flow The traffic model also calculates new results based on the new Route Flow Locking a Route Flow When editing a Route ticking the Lock this Flow value when balancing box prevents the Route s flow from being changed when carrying out automatic flow assignment as described below This is typically used for Traffic Routes to manually specify and Lock the traffic flow on some Routes on an Arm and balance the remaining flow between the remaining non locked Routes More information is provided in Allocating the Traffic Flow Matrices to Routes using the Route List below Suppressing Unfeasible Routes In larger LinSig Networks the number of possible Routes through the Network is very large and increases exponentially as Network size increases This is particularly so when many route options are available due to the Network Topology Whilst building Routes LinSig monitors how good a Route is and how likely a Route is of having tratfic assigned to it and suppresses obviously unfeasible Routes from being built and
359. ow Components on a Single Graph As well as splitting a Flow Profile graph into separate graphs for each Route the Flow Profile View can also show a single graph for the Lane or Lane Group as described above in Showing Inflows and Outflows Separately displayed disaggregated by Route Link 6 1 All Routes Link 6 1 All Routes 5000 5000 5000 5000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Each Route Flow Profile is shown as a separate layer in the graph The layered Route Flow Profiles cannot be shown on a combined inflow outflow graph as the display becomes extremely complex and difficult to understand Displaying a Graph Showing Route Flows as Route Layers A graph can be displayed with Route Layers as follows e Right click on a graph and choose to display either Inflows or outflows from the pop up menu e Ensure Aggregate all Routes on the Show Routes pop out menu is selected on the same pop up menu and that the graph isn t showing a single Route Profile e Choose Show Route Components when Aggregated from the pop up menu e The graph will be shown with each Route Component as a separate layer Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 238 View Reference Highlighting a Single Route Layer When a Lane has many Routes it is sometimes difficult to determine which Route Layer is which in the graph A Route Layer can be identified as follows e Ensure the Rout
360. ow Group s general details other than traffic flow information can be edited as follows e Select the Flow Group in the Flow Group List e Choose Edit Flow Group from the Traffic Flows menu e The Edit Flow Group dialog box is displayed Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 147 Edit Flow Group 23l Flow Group Flow Group Title AMM Peak Flow Group Stark Time 08 00 Flow Group End Time 09 00 oOo f e The Edit Flow Group dialog box allows the following Flow Group settings to be edited o Flow Group Number A Flow Group can be renumbered by changing its Flow Group Number Flow Group numbers must be sequential with no gaps in the sequence If the Flow Group is given the same number as an existing Flow Group the Flow Group will be inserted into the sequence and the existing and higher number Flow Groups will be renumbered o Flow Group Title Each Flow Group should be given a meaningful title o Flow Group Start Time The Flow Group Start Time should be specified using the 24 hour clock in the format hh mm o Flow Group End Time The Flow Group End Time should be specified using the 24 hour clock in the format hh mm o Component Flow Group A Component Flow Group is a Flow Group which is used only as a component of another Flow Group in a Flow Group Formula Typically running or reporting a model using just a single Flow Group Component would not be correct Marking a Flow Group as a Componen
361. ow the preferred method for assigning flows to Routes in most cases LinSig uses delays calculated from the LinSig network model to assign traffic to Routes using a standard equilibrium assignment method In basic terms LinSig distributes traffic between competing Routes such that no traffic can achieve a quicker travel time between two Zones by transferring to a different Route This method is widely used in large area transport modelling software packages such as SATURN or TRIPS however LinSig is the only small area model of its type which assigns traffic in this way whilst modelling delays due to traffic signals in such a high level of detail e Network Entry Arm Lane Flow Balancing LinSig assigns traffic to Routes by attempting to achieve equal Lane flows on Network Entry Arms No account is taken of flow distribution on arms other than the first Arm on a Route This method is an alternative method to delay based assignment and may be useful in some cases for single Junction models and signal roundabouts It is recommended to use delay based assignment unless good specific reasons exist to use entry Lane flow balancing 4 12 2 3 Principles of Delay Based Equilibrium Assignment When Delay based Assignment is selected LinSig uses the long established technique of equilibrium assignment to distribute zone to zone traffic volumes as defined in the OD Matrix between Routes During the assignment process LinSig shifts traffic from Routes with lon
362. ox which can be opened by right clicking on a Junction in the Network Layout View and choosing Edit Junction Turning Counts This is described in more detail in the Network Layout View section Edit Junction Turming Counts Juncton Turning Counts are used for Matris Estimation andor for validating assigned turing Flows Enter Turning Counts here for use in Matix estimation and or assignment validation Turning Counts are for currently selected Flow Group Flow Group being edited F1 AM Peak Change the Flow Group being edited by changing selected Flow Group Count Modelled Flow Difference Origin Destination J2 4 J2 5 J2 1 Main Road Eastbound 500 150 650 J2 2 Main Road Westbound 220 450 670 2 3 250 200 450 Total T50 370 650 1770 For comparison with Counts the Modelled Flow does not include Lane Based flow or Bus Flow Cancel e Using the Turning Count List in the Matrix Estimation View Counts can be entered as a list of counts in the Matrix Estimation View as described in the next section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 200 View Reference e Using the graphical Turning Counts View The Turning Counts View is new in LinSig 3 1 and displays the Turning Counts graphically Consistency checking information is also provided allowing rogue counts to be quickly located This is described in more detail in the Turning Count View section below For all methods counts are entered as PCUs 4 13 4
363. p line the Storage in Front of Stop Line tab is also used to enter the Lane s settings Edit Lane 1 2 es General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Mowmtto 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L This is a signal controlled Right Tum giving way to oncoming traffic lf Does the lane have Right Tum Storage in front of the stopline ar er mont o Right Tum Move Up s 3 Gl re ee ee Max Right Tums In Intergreen PCL 20 Right Tum Factor Points to note on the Storage in Front of Stop Line tab include The Does the Lane have Right Turn Storage in front of Stop Line box is ticked indicating this Lane is a Right Turn Lane with Storage in front of the Stop Line The Right Turn Storage the Maximum Turns in the Intergreen and the Right Turn Factor are entered as specified above The Right Turn Move up Time is set to use Auto Calc to estimate the Right Turn Move Up time from the Right Turn Storage Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 284 Examples 7 1 5 1 Signalling Conditions LinSig will calculate the capacity of the right turn according to the method of control set in the Phase Sequence For example the diagram below shows a simple Phase arrangement where there are no special opportunities for right turning traffic to turn except during gaps in Phase A and during the Intergreen at the end The capacity is simply calculated as The number turning in gaps the number turning during the Intergreen
364. plementing unequal length double cycling which should be implemented by repeating Phases in the Phase Sequence Reduce to Minimum Click the Reduce to Minimum button to reduce the Controller s Cycle Time to its minimum length This will automatically untick Maintain Cycle Time as the link with the parent Controller Sets Cycle Time is broken The parent Controller Sets Cycle Time can be re implemented by re ticking Maintain Cycle Time Optimise Delay Clicking the Optimise Delay button optimises the Phase lengths for the Controller to minimise aggregate traffic delay for Lanes controlled by the Controller All other Controllers are unchanged More information on optimisation is available in the Scenario View section Optimise PRC Clicking the Optimise PRC button optimises the Phase lengths for the Controller to maximise Practical Reserve Capacity PRC for Lanes controlled by the Controller All other Controllers are unchanged More information on optimisation is available in the Scenario View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 15 Signal Timings View 211 4 15 3 The Signal Timings Panel The Signal Timings Panel is located below the Signal Timings Settings in the Signal Timings View FA Signal Timings View Fat halek Display Cycle Time Maintain Cycle Time Allow Edit Timings Double Triple time 90 Iw Iw Single educ 15 20 25 30 3 40 45 50 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 T G 9 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 6 70 7 8
365. process Please report any models which appear to be taking an excessive amount of time to JCT Software Support Support jctconsultancy co uk as this will assist us in improving the matrix estimation process Check the quality of the estimated matrix and its assignment using the techniques described below 4 13 5 3 Matrix Estimation Options The Matrix Estimation options serve several purposes These are Select an area of the Matrix to estimate This allows an area of the OD Matrix corresponding to a Matrix Based Network region to be estimated Control Assignment options for the assignment part of the matrix estimation process The Routes which traffic uses through the Network and the amount of traffic predicted to use them are a crucial part of the matrix estimation process The assignment options allow this process to be controlled Further details of assignment options are provided in the assignment section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 204 View Reference e Specify to use the existing OD matrix as a prior matrix for the Matrix Estimation process This allows you to influence the Matrix Estimation process towards the Traffic Flow distribution specified in the existing OD matrix e Specify to process Turning Counts in order of increasing size The Matrix Estimation algorithm processes each Count value in turn which means that the Count values processed later in the sequence may alter OD matrix cells that have been calculated based
366. pts such as Routes and delay based assignment e As the level of detail is much less than Matrix Based Methods models will run faster and larger models can be built The soeed advantage with smaller models will be much less and will be less important than other factors when choosing which method to use e Existing counted traffic flows or turning flows output from a strategic model can be directly entered This avoids the need to produce an OD matrix and assign it to the Network and also avoids any calibration needed to ensure the assignment matches the original counts or flows Disadvantages of Lane Based Flow Method e Less detailed traffic flow information is available for LinSig to use for modelling a Lane s queues delays and capacities Although in many cases this lack of detail will only cause minor insignificant differences in results for some more complex junctions such as signal roundabouts or closely spaced staggered T junctions the inaccuracies may be more significant e In simple Networks where delay based assignment is quick and accurate using Lane Based Flows will often require significantly more data entry than using Matrix Based methods e When changes are made to the Network for example banning a right turn which will lead to reassignment of traffic it is necessary to manually determine new Lane traffic flows externally from LinSig This can involve significant effort if no established methods such as a strategic traffi
367. questions FAQs and news of software updates Free software updates which can be downloaded from the LinSig Software Support website These include bug fixes minor feature updates and more significant additional feature updates for a limited period after a major release Major new versions are not included Discounts off major new versions of LinSig Free attendance at LinSig User Groups To register for your free 12 months Software Support please return the Software Support Agreement sent to you with LinSig After this period has expired paid Software Support is available from JCT Consultancy Ltd Please see the Software Support Agreement or contact JCT Consultancy for more information on Software Support Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 Introduction 1 5 1 Accessing Software Support Software Support can be accessed free of charge by any of the following means e On our Web Site at www jctconsultancy co uk e By Email at support jctconsultancy co uk e By Telephone 09 00 to 17 00 UK Time on 01522 751010 e By Faxon 01522 751188 e By Post at JCT Consultancy Ltd LinSig House Deepdale Enterprise Park Nettleham Lincoln LN2 2LL Please have your Licence ID handy before calling Software Support so we can validate your Software Support status If emailing please include your Licence ID Name Office Company and a contact telephone number in case we need to contact you to discuss the problem Your Licence ID is availa
368. r of major new features These include e Multiple Traffic Signal Controllers e Lane based Modelling giving Improved Modelling of Short Lanes e Larger Network Modelling e Delay Based Traffic Assignment e Matrix Estimation e Pedestrian Modelling These new features are explained in more detail later in this User Guide 1 3 What s New in Version 3 1 of LinSig LinSig 3 1 was released in May 2011 and is the first major update to LinSig since the launch of LinSig 3 in 2009 New features introduced since the launch of Version 3 0 include e New traffic flow definition methods including Lane Based Flows Layered Flows and the ability to mix different flow definition methods in different regions of a modelled Network e Improved modelling of bus traffic including Bus Zones and Bus Routes e New ways of checking input flow and count data using the new Flow Consistency Mode in the Network Layout View and a new graphical Traffic Turning Counts View e Modelling of different cycle times within the same Network model e Improved checking and auditing tools such as the new Model Audit View e Improved facilities for fine tuning network calibration such as the ability to define Bonus Green times for Lanes e SCATS based Terminology Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 1 4 What s New in Version 3 2 of LinSig 3 1 4 What s New in Version 3 2 of LinSig LinSig 3 2 was released in May 2012 and includes Specification of controller inf
369. r the Total stop line flow on the Lane on this Layer in Total Flow e Check the Incoming Flows and Outgoing Flows lists As every Incoming Flow is also an Outgoing Flow for another Lane some entries may already exist in either list that were entered earlier when editing other Lanes e Click on Add for Incoming or Outgoing Flows as appropriate This opens the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allowing either an incoming or outgoing turning movement to be added The Layers in the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box will be defaulted to the Layer currently being edited e Assuming that an Incoming Flow is being added the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allows the Source Lane for the Incoming Flow and the amount of flow in PCU or as a percentage to be entered e The new Lane Based Flow movement is displayed on the Network Layout View if it is set to Lane Based Flow entry mode When using the graphical Lane Based editing LinSig updates several dependent flow items at once when adding flows However when using the Edit Lane dialog box each flow item must be edited separately Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 124 View Reference O 4 3 9 6 Checking Lane Based Flows for Consistency Errors Although Lane Based Flows provide a lot of flexibility it is very easy to introduce flow errors into the Network The Network Layout View provides a Flow Consistency Check Mode which allows flow errors to be quickly located and corrected
370. r this Scenario This is very useful for speeding up the assignment process for larger Networks when Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 191 only minor changes have been made to the Network for example revising signal timings As the final assigned flows are likely to be similar to the previous assigned flows the assignment process starts with route flows near to the final route flows potentially leading to a big reduction in assignment run time e Wider Flow Spreading This option spreads traffic between two Zones equally between all allowed routes between the Zones This option will sometimes give a more realistic assignment when many similar routes exist between Zones but will slow down the assignment process o Advanced Settings The advanced settings affect the speed precision and realism of the assignment and are intended to be used for difficult networks under guidance from JCT Software Support It is recommended that the advanced settings are not changed unless instructed to do so by JCT Entry Lane Balancing LinSig assigns traffic to Routes by attempting to achieve equal Lane flows on Network Entry Arms No account is taken of flow distribution on arms other than the first Arm on a Route This method is an alternative method to delay based assignment and may be useful in some cases for single Junction models and signal roundabouts Traffic Zones to Assign This option allows only traffic from a subset of Zone
371. ree View the default or as a Flat View showing all Lanes at one level The Flat View is primarily to allow all Lanes to be sorted by one column for example Degree of Saturation irrespective of its parent Junction 4 20 1 2 The Results List The Results List displays numerical data and results for the items selected using the Route Filter The Results List is hierarchal allowing the amount of information displayed to be managed by expanding or collapsing sections of the list to display more or less information Expanding and Collapsing the Results List Items on the results list can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the or adjacent to each item The List adjusts the number of columns displayed so that only relevant columns are displayed when the list is fully or partially collapsed Customising the Data Columns Displayed The Results List can be customised by adding or removing columns from the Results List The columns shown can be changed as follows e Right Click on the Results List column headings and choose Customise from the pop up menu The Select Columns dialog box will be opened Select Columns For Display Columns For Display Turners In Intergreen pa w Total Delay pcuHr Iw Av Delay Per Veh s p iw Mean Max Queue pou iw Average Excess Queue p Position In Filtered Route C Num Greens Start Green End Green s Arrow Green 5 Entering pou e Tick or Un
372. rent Scenario in the following ways To minimise delay in the whole Network by adjusting phase lengths and offsets for all Controllers To maximise PRC in the whole Network by adjusting phase lengths and offsets for all Controllers Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 192 View Reference e To minimise delay in the whole Network by adjusting offsets only between all Controllers e To maximise PRC in the whole Network by adjusting offsets only between all Controllers e To minimise delay for a single Junction by adjusting the phase lengths and offset for just the Controller s controlling that Junction e To maximise PRC for a single Junction by adjusting the phase lengths and offset for just the Controller s controlling that Junction e To minimise delay for Lanes controlled by a single Controller by adjusting the phase lengths and offset for the Controller e To maximise PRC for Lanes controlled by a single Controller by adjusting the phase lengths and offset for the Controller 4 12 3 1 Optimising Signal Timings for the Whole Network Either phase lengths and offsets or offsets only can be optimised over the whole Network Optimising Phase Lengths and Offsets for the Whole Network To optimise phase lengths and offsets for the whole Network choose Optimise Phase Lengths and Offsets for Delay or Optimise Phase Lengths and Offsets for PRC from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu LinSig will adjust the Phase Leng
373. represents Zone to Zone movements for which too little or too much flow has been allocated to Routes Where the Difference Matrix is non zero this should be investigated and corrections made to Route Flows using the Route List View This will ensure the total Zone to Zone route flows for a Scenario equal the Flow Group s desired Zone to Zone traffic movements eee Traffic Origin Destination Matrix Auto Assign Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Copy Paste Destination Pt A B c D Tot EE Tat 50 Flow Deficit due to een insufficient flow on a E o a Route between B and A If Auto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Flow Matrix will automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flows you may have lf Auto Assign is not enabled the Desired Flows will not be assigned to Routes until the Assign OD Flows To Routes menu option is selected Auto Assignment of OD Matrix to Routes when OD Matrix Changes When traffic data in the Desired Flows OD Matrix changes it is necessary to re assign the new OD flows to the Routes The assignment process is described in detail in the Scenario View section If Auto Assign is selected using the button on the Traffic Flow View toolbar LinSig will automatically reassign the matrix to the Routes for all Scenarios using this Flow Group whenever th
374. revious Next gt gt OK Cancel Lane Saturation Flows can be specified manually or can be calculated from a Lane s geometry using the formulae published in the TRRL report RR67 Saturation flows are always specified in Passenger Car Units PCU in LinSig Although using saturation flows calculated from geometry may seem like an easy option it is recommended that wherever possible at least a brief saturation flow survey is done for an existing junction The RR6 formula although a good starting point does not allow for all significant factors when estimating saturation flow For example no allowance is made for regional variations in saturation flow leading to the same estimate for Central London and rural Lincolnshire Additionally the data underlying RR6 was collected over 20 years ago and traffic conditions may well have changed significantly in the mean time Before using saturation flows calculated from geometry in LinSig it is advisable to obtain and read RR67 and satisfy yourself that the methodology used is acceptable It is good practice to consult the Local Authority Traffic Signals Department for a junction s location as most will have considerable local Knowledge as to what constitutes an acceptable estimate of saturation flow for similar junctions in the area If you choose to use RR6 saturation flows please bear in mind that as queue predictions are very sensitive to inaccurate saturation flows the possibly small differenc
375. rk Control Plan from the pop up menu e A new Network Control Plan is created with the first defined Phase Sequence selected for each Controller as default e Each Controllers Phase Sequence can be changed from the default as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 182 View Reference Alternatively a new Network Control Plan can be created by copying as existing Network Control Plan as follows e Select the Network Control Plan to be copied in the Network Control Plans List e Right click on the Network Control Plan e Choose Copy Network Control Plan from the pop up menu e A new Network Control Plan is created with a default name It can be renamed by clicking on the default name in the Network Control Plans List 4 11 1 2 Deleting Network Control Plans A Network Control Plan can be deleted as follows e Select the Network Control Plan in the Network Control Plan List e Right click on the Network Control Plan e Choose Delete Network Control Plan from the pop up menu e The Network Control Plan is deleted but Phase Sequences referenced by the Network Control Plan are not Any Scenario using the Network Control Plan will be invalid until a new Network Control Plan is selected for it 4 11 2 Editing Network Control Plans Each Network Control Plan specifies a Phase Sequence for each Controller in the Network Each Phase Sequence is specified as follows e Inthe Phase Sequence List on the right of the Network
376. rollers Phase Sequence View to construct Phase orders for each Controller The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o Select which Controller to display in this View o Create and delete Controller Phases Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 18 LinSig Basics o Change the order in which Phases are displayed in this View by reordering them with the mouse Add and remove Signal Groups from a Phase by double clicking Edit a Phase to change its name or the SCATS timing parameters of the Phase o Use colour to display Signal Groups which cannot run together due to Signal Group Conflicts e Phase Sequence View The Phase Sequence View is used to create and edit Phase Sequences for each Controller As many Phase Sequences as desired can be created and quickly switched between The Phase Sequence View can be used to carry out the following tasks Create and delete Phasing Plans Define the Phase Sequence for a Controller by dragging Phases from the Phase View o Enter the Phase Sequence for a Controller by typing a numerical list of Phases in the Sequence column of the Phase Sequence List o Change the Phase Sequence for a Controller by reordering Phases with the mouse e Network Control Plans View The Network Control Plans View allows Network Control Plans to be created and Phase Sequences selected for each Controller The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o Create delete and copy Network Control Plans
377. rom the pop up menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 SGroup View 167 e A new Signal Group is created and can be dropped in an appropriate position using the mouse e The Edit SGroup Dialog box is shown and can be used to configure the Signal Group s properties as described below in Editing Signal Groups e The Signal Group can be repositioned if necessary by dragging the centre of or circular handles at each end of the Signal Group with the mouse 4 7 4 Editing Signal Groups Signal Groups can be edited by selecting the Signal Group and choosing Edit SGroup from the SGroups pop out menu on the Controllers menu or by double clicking with the mouse The Edit SGroup Dialog Box shown below is used to edit the Signal Group s settings Edit SGroup SGroup 8 SGroup Type Traffic SGroup Type cannot be ay changed as the aig al Ena lanes ere Pedestrian Protection controlled by this SGroup Type Timed for Walk interval and part of Timed protection 3 Minimum Green s f Protected Pedestrian SGroup SGroup Name additional text A Signal Group has the following parameters e Signal Group Number The number used to reference the Signal Group in the Controller The Signal Group can be relabelled by changing the Signal Group number in the drop down List Other Signal Groups will be renumbered accordingly Signal Groups must be contiguous with no gaps in the Signal Group sequence e Sig
378. rough the Lane separate This allows LinSig to display the flow profiles on a Lane not just for the whole Lane but also for individual Route components on the Lane For example the Flow Profiles shown above could be split into their component profiles as shown below r al Flow Profiles View A F Diagram Size Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route 14 Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route 15 Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route 17 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 A ETON ATAGATATTATATATACTOTATOTETTT MMMM 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Viewing separate profiles is sometimes useful when analysing a complex model and trying to identify the effects of different signalling arrangements on different traffic movements rather than on the Lane as a whole A Flow Profile graph for a single Route through a Lane can be displayed as follows e Select the graph for the Lane in question e Right Click on the graph with the mouse A pop up menu will appear e Choose Show Route x Only where x is the Route number of one of the Routes through the Lane e The graph will show the Flow Profile for the individual Route through the Lane e Add additional graphs for the Lane changing each of them to show a different Route as desired Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 25 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 237 Showing the Individual Route Fl
379. roup e Signal Group Name Additional Text Signal Group names are generated automatically by LinSig To provide more flexibility in naming Signal Groups you may enter some additional text that will be appended to the generated Signal Group name This is particularly important for pedestrian Signal Groups as LinSig cannot usually generate a detailed signal group name for a pedestrian Signal Group 4 7 5 Using a Signal Group to Control Lanes Each Traffic Signal Group may control one or more Traffic Lanes A Traffic Signal Group will display directional arrows in the SGroup View based on the turning movements allowed on the Lanes it controls No arrows will be shown if the Signal Group does not control any Lanes The Signal Groups controlling each Lane are specified whilst editing Lanes in the Network Layout View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 SGroup View 169 4 7 6 Deleting Signal Groups To delete a Signal Group select it with the mouse and choose Delete SGroup from the SGroups pop out menu on the Controllers Menu or right click on the Signal Group with the mouse and choose Delete SGroup from the pop up menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 170 View Reference 4 8 SGroup Conflict Matrix View The SGroup Conflict Matrix View is used to display and edit each Controller s Signal Group Conflicts It is opened by choosing SGroup Conflict Matrix View from the LinSig Controllers menu Each SGroup Conflict Matrix View show
380. roup The Full Green Signal Group is the main three aspect signal group which controls the Lane All Lanes which are controlled by signals must have a Full Green Signal Group defined Arrow SGroup The Arrow Signal Group applies only to Lanes that are controlled by a non UK Arrow as well as a main three aspect signal group The Arrow Signal Group can only be entered if a Full Green Signal Group is specified The LinSig traffic model will take into account which Signal Group is controlling the Lane at each point in the cycle Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 76 View Reference e SCATS Detectors The SCATS Detectors setting specifies the SCATS detector numbers that you wish to be considered when importing flow onto this lane using the SCATS Flow Data Import Multiple detector numbers can be specified in which case the detector counts from each detector will be summed This is typically of use for MultiLanes e Give Way Summary The Give Way Summary lists the different turning movements exiting the Lane and summarises which movements give way to other Lanes Further give way details are contained on each movement s individual tab in the Edit Lane dialog box Lane Details The Lane Details tab contains a number of settings relating to detailed Lane settings such as Lane Length and custom Lane Occupancy Sq Edit Lane 1 1 a _ Lane Length Arm 1 Lane 1 Custom Occupancy This is a long lane Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow d
381. roup Conflicts for several controllers at the same time To allow this each SGroup Conflict Matrix View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a SGroup Conflict Matrix View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the SGroup Conflict Matrix View s title bar and choose which Controller to lock the SGroup Conflict Matrix View too Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 8 SGroup Conflict Matrix View 171 4 8 2 Managing Signal Group Conflicts 4 8 2 1 Signal Group Conflict Checking LinSig checks whether a Signal Group Conflict is appropriate for each signal group pair taking into account which Signal Groups run together in Phases An empty white cell indicates that there is currently no conflict between the signal group pair You should click the cell if you wish to define the signal groups as conflicting or leave the cell blank if the signal groups do not conflict A white cell with a red cross indicates that the signal groups conflict and are therefore prohibited from running together in the same Phase You should click the cell if you wish to define the signal groups as not conflicting A grey cell indicates that the signal groups run together in a Phase and so they cannot be defined as conflicting Clicking this cell will have no effect A black cell indicates that the cell does not correspond to two distinct signal groups and so defini
382. roups which are used only in formulae Flow Group Formula Formula FA F2 The formula can contain any of the standard mathematical symbols Other Flow Groups can be referenced as F1 Fe etc Examples F1 1 6 of 2 4 F1 Fey A Formula based Flow Group can be defined choosing Formula Flow Group when creating the Flow Group and specifying a formula in the Edit Flow group dialog box Any common mathematical operators such as and can be used as can brackets to specify precedence Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 149 4 4 4 Working with the Origin Destination Matrices LinSig uses Origin Destination OD matrices to display and edit the following for the Flow Group selected in the Flow Group List on the left side of the Traffic Flows View e Total Zone to Zone traffic movements through the Network e Total Zone to Zone Pedestrian movements through each Junction Edit Lane Based Layers Traffic Ongin Destination Matrix Auto Assign Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Destination A B C A o so 297 203 MEE oian E 200 0 153 o7 E e ar as o aso s20 D 2 203 500 Cro eso 370 eso a50 2120 lf Auto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Flow Matrix will automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flows you may h
383. rrent signal timings for each Traffic Data A Report showing traffic flow data used in the model K C Create a blank Report Definition Cancel e A new Report Definition can be based either on a previously defined Report Template or can be created as a blank Report Definition e To create a new Report based on a Template select the Create a new Report Definition from a Template option The Template List lists all of the Templates currently installed in either o The System Templates Folder The Templates in this folder are listed in brown The folder is located at LinSig Install Folder Report Templates This is usually C Program Files JCT Consultancy LinSig 3 Report Templates This folder contains all the pre defined Templates supplied with LinSig Although there is no reason not to save your own Templates here you may find that your system s permissions have made the program files folder read only o Custom Templates Folder The Templates in this folder are listed in black The folder is located at My Documents LinSig Report Templates If desired the folder can be changed using the LinSig Program Options to a shared network drive to allow users to share Templates Select the desired template and click OK to create the new Report Definition from the selected Template and return to the main Report Builder e Alternatively select the Create a blank Report Definition option and click OK to cre
384. run on Also sometimes referred to as a Client PC A 4 2 Product Activation for Individual PCs Individual PC activation applies only to Single PC Four PC and Ten PC site licences and is not available for Unlimited Networked PC Site Licences Installing LinSig either from CD or by downloading will install a copy of LinSig on your PC The software will however only work as a restricted demonstration copy unless it is activated following the procedure below You may install the software and use it for demonstration purposes on as many PCs as required however only the number of PCs actually licensed may be activated to allow fully functional use Licences can be freely transferred between computers within a Site Licence s site using the procedure described later in this section A 4 2 1 Activating the LinSig Licence for the First Time The activation procedure is as follows 1 When running LinSig for the first time the software will present a dialog box showing information relating to the activation status of the software on the particular PC This will show the activation status to be Not activated If the OK button is clicked the activation process will be cancelled and LinSig will run in demonstration mode It can still be activated later by choosing About LinSig from the Help Menu and proceeding as below About LinSig I LI E LinSig Version 3 0 16 0 M Copyright 2010 JCT Consultancy Ltd AI Rights Res
385. rvals When pedestrian protection takes place LinSig will not permit the traffic signal group to run green until the protection period has completed This is illustrated as follows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 5 2 SCATS Pedestrian operation in LinSig 261 Timed Protection during Walk Protection for Walk Time Timed Protection into Clearance Full Protection Modes of pedestrian protection 5 2 4 Signal Group Overlaps For a Signal Group that runs in two consecutive Phases LinSig allows you to specify whether or not that Signal Group overlaps in the Intergreen period between the two Phases LinSig also allows you to specify overlap green in the Intergreen period even though the Signal Group is not running in either the preceding or succeeding Phase 5 2 4 1 Overlap for Traffic Signal Groups For Traffic Signal Groups specifying overlap simply means that LinSig will run the Signal Group green continuously throughout the Intergreen period 5 2 4 2 Overlap for isolated operation pedestrian Signal Groups For isolated operation pedestrian Signal Groups specifying overlap permits LinSig to start the succeeding Phase during the Walk period the Clearance 1 period or the Clearance 2 period However it does not extend the duration of the pedestrian green signal for any longer than the Walk period This is illustrated in the following diagram Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 262 Detailed Controller Background Phase A may ter
386. s All Controllers in each Controller Set run at the same cycle time e Signal Phase Times The signal timings for each Controller as manually defined or as Calculated by the signal optimiser e Traffic Route Flows The Route Flow pattern for models using Matrix Based Flows These are based on the assignment of the Scenario Traffic Flow Group s Origin Destination Matrix to Routes These are defined either by manually assigning traffic flows to Routes or by using delay based assignment or lane flow balancing to automatically assign traffic to Routes The Route Flows can be different for each Scenario as different signal settings in each Scenario will often lead to different delays and therefore different routing patterns within the Network When Lane Based Flows are used the flow pattern is by definition fixed and therefore cannot change between Scenarios Typically a number of Scenarios will be set up with each Scenario representing a different combination of the above information for which LinSig model results are required Using Scenarios makes changing between different model runs very easy as the current Scenario can simply be changed rather than having to remember to change each of the above individual settings 4 12 1 Working with Scenarios The Scenario View is used to create select edit and delete Scenarios It can be opened by choosing Scenario View from the Scenario Menu Scenarios View H fo e lD Z aut
387. s or from outside the Network and leaves at its downstream end at a rate dependent on the Lane s control for example whether it is a signal or give way controlled Lane The rate at which traffic enters or leaves the Lane varies over time with the model calculating queues and delays based on profiles of the arrival and discharge rate Time Slices LinSig models the arrival and discharge profiles by splitting the profile into time slices usually of one second This fine resolution is necessary to model the detailed behaviour of traffic at a signal junction The amount of traffic arriving at a stop line during a time slice is dependent on the amount of traffic entering the Lane from upstream Lane within the time slice adjusted for the travel time on the Lane The amount of traffic able to leave a Lane during a time slice is dependent on how the Lane is controlled For example a signal controlled Lane will allow no traffic to leave during its red period but will allow traffic to leave at a maximum rate equal to the Lane s saturation flow during its green period The rate at which traffic can leave a give way Lane varies continuously dependent on the traffic flow in the current time slice on its opposing lanes Lane Groups model Long and Short Lanes which interact and potentially block each other LinSig internally models Lane Groups using Lane Segments which behave similarly to Lanes but also models the complex interaction between Short and Lo
388. s can be managed as follows e Click on either a Scenario s existing cycle time or the cycle time on the main LinSig toolbar This will open the Controller Set Cycle Time Management dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 186 View Reference E Edit Controller Set cycle times scenario AM Peak Current Controller Set Cyde Time Default Controller Set Western Area Current Enter the Cycle times for each Controller Set in the selected Scenario The cycle time will set for all controllers in that Controller Set Cancel e The Controller Set Cycle Time Management dialog box allows the cycle time of each Controller Set for each Scenario to be changed More information is provided on cycle time management in the Signal Timings View section 4 12 1 7 Controlling Recalculation of Model Results When an item of data affecting model results is changed for example a Saturation Flow being altered LinSig will need to recalculate model results for each Scenario affected The Scenario View can be used to control when this recalculation takes place Recalculation is controlled using the Automatically Recalculate Results for drop down list in the Scenario View s toolbar s Scenarios View aE Fl AM Peak All Demands Assign 2 PMI Peak PMI Peak All Demands Assign 3 AM Peak 2012 Am Peak 2012 All Demands Assign 4 PI Peak 2012 PI Peak 2012 All Demands Assign Clow Larmu The options available
389. s circulatory carriageway platoon dispersion should be switched off LinSig is unable to directly model platoon compression at this time however it is often possible to allow for platoon compression on some movements by changing the Start End Displacement on the Lane Flow Detail The Flow Detail tab provides access to the traffic flow components on the Connector Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 97 Edit Lane Connector General Flow Detail Ovenides Routed Layers Through The Lane Connector Scenano 006 AM Peak Fi A a00 EF Total Routed Aow Lane Based Layers Through the Lane Connector Selected How 2006 Friday AM Peak Eeim Total Lane Based Layer The Flow Details tab displays the following e Routed Layers Through this Lane Connector The Routed Layers through this Lane Connector box lists all Routes through the Connector Each Route is modelled as a separate Layer on the Lane e Lane Based Flow Layers through this Lane Connector When Lane Based Flows are used on a Lane Connector this lists all Lane Based Traffic Flows through the Connector It also allows the Traffic Flows on each Layer to be edited using the Edit Flow button however care should be taken to maintain Flow Consistency Overrides The Overrides tab provides fine control over cruise speed times on the Connector Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 98 View Reference Edit Lane Connector General How Detail Ovemides
390. s follows e Choose Add Label from the Labels pop out on the Network menu e Click anywhere on the Network Layout View to drop the Label The Create Label dialog box will appear e Set the Label s text colour and Font e Click OK to create the Label Editing a Label A Label can be edited by double clicking with the mouse and changing its settings as described in Adding Labels to the Network Layout View above Currently dynamic data fields cannot be used in labels Repositioning a Label A Label can be repositioned by selecting it with the mouse and then dragging either the centre of the Label move the whole Label or one of the red handles at the end of the Label to change the Labels orientation Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 139 4 3 15 Displaying and Using Timing Dials Timing Dials allow the signal timings for a Controller to be displayed and changed directly on the Network Layout View This is useful with larger Networks when there is insufficient screen space to view both the Network Layout View and the Signal Timings View at the same time It also provides a concise overview of signal times for all Controllers when printed on the Network Layout View 25 Network Layout View Foe P BIB alala B42 21 2I8 She FL El Peps Gals elle Al Find Junction Find Arm Fi g Layer Filter r t Arm 5 a Arm High Street e A m 2 2 A
391. s in the model by only modelling Routes within each Network Region and not modelling Routes between each Network region The lack of Routes crossing the region boundary means that cyclic flow profiles of traffic crossing the region boundary would be lost if the above setting was not used 4 27 3 2 Joining Two Lane Based Network Regions Two Lane Based regions are much simpler to join as there are no Routing issues to resolve The Network regions can be joined as follows e Create Lane Connectors joining Lanes immediately upstream and downstream of the region boundary e Add Lane Based Flows on the new Lane Connectors using the Network Layout View s Lane Based Flow Edit Mode 4 27 3 3 Joining a Matrix Based and a Lane Based Network Region Where the two Network regions being joined are of different types they can be joined using a combination of the above techniques This involves Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 250 View Reference e Create Lane Connectors joining Lanes immediately upstream and downstream of the region boundary e Where traffic leaving the Matrix Based region terminates at the Zone upstream of the Network region boundary its cyclic flow profile must be passed on to the first Lane downstream of the region boundary which has a Lane Based Flow defined on it This is achieved using the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 20
392. s not work correctly on your computer as it MAY be possible with the agreement of your IT department for us to reconfigure LinSig to work with your firewall Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 301 B Appendix B Third party licences B 1 Crashrpt htip code google com p crashrpt Copyright c 2003 Michael Carruth All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT O
393. s possible to step through the differences using the lt and gt buttons and also to go directly to any particular difference by entering its position in the list of differences and clicking the Go button It is also possible to use the lt lt and gt gt to go directly to the first or last difference Remember that the comparison is of the Model Audit information which includes all important engineering data It does not include minor settings such as assignment or optimisation settings so an identical Model Audit Comparison means the traffic engineering behind Scenarios is the same but does not necessarily mean that the files are identical Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 23 Audit History View 229 4 23 Audit History View The Audit History View allows comments and notes to be logged in the LinSig file as a permanent record of changes to the model The Audit History View is opened by choosing Audit History on the File menu Audit History Description Entered By Entered On Read Ony Added New Development Flows Paul Moore Friday May 13 2011 00 30 40 2 Changes Stage Sequence for East Junction in AM Peak Peter Cheng Friday May 13 2011 00 31 00 iii Add a new Audit Record The Audit History shows a list of log entries with each log entry containing e Log item number e Log Item Description A text description of the log item e Entered By The name of the person entering the log item
394. s proposed it should be carefully justified using site observations Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 48 Essential Background Right Turn Move Up In order to ensure that right turning traffic has reached a position in the junction to accept a gap a right turn move up parameter is specified This is the time taken for a right turning vehicle to get from the stop line to the front position in the storage area A rule of thumb is to estimate the move up time as 1 second for each PCU of storage space in front of the stop line Clear Conflict Times The Queue Clear time is used to ensure that right turning traffic cannot clear during the Intergreen until the last opposing vehicle has travelled from the stop line to the queue clear point Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig 49 4 View Reference LinSig maintains a detailed model of the Network being studied and the traffic signal controllers controlling Junctions within the Network The model is displayed and edited using a series of Views Each View displays the model in a different way or allows different aspects of the model to be worked on The LinSig Views were introduced briefly in Section 2 LinSig Basics where their purposes are briefly summarised This section covers each View in more detail describing how they are used to edit the model and to interpret results The LinSig Network Views are e Network Layout View e Traffic Flows View e Route List
395. s subsequent Phase is shown in the bottom right corner of the Phase This is only shown for the Phase Sequence associated with the Current Scenario as other Phase Sequences do not store signal timings e The Phase Minimum of the Phase is shown in the top right corner of the Phase The Phase Minimum shown is the particular Minimum for the Sequence of Phases in the Phase Sequence Other Sequences of Phases may result in different Phase Minimums See the Phase Minimums View for more information Some of the above data items are only available when the Phase Sequence is valid If the Sequence is invalid as described below some items may not be shown Changing the Way the Phase Sequence is displayed The Phase Sequence View toolbar includes a number of buttons which control the way the Phase Sequence is displayed Options include e Non Running Signal Groups can be omitted e The display of Phase Running interval durations minimums and Clearance Interval durations can be omitted Phase Sequence Validation LinSig checks Phase Sequences to ensure they are valid An invalid Sequence is indicated by a large blue cross over a phase change This indicates that the Phase Change cannot take place due to a problem typically if the phase changes to itself or if it involves a phase that has no running Signal Groups St b a As you build up a Phase Sequence the unfinished sequence can often show a number of sequence errors This is quite normal
396. s the Signal Group Conflicts for a single Controller The View displays Conflicts as a matrix with each Signal Group on the rows and the columns Group Conflict Matrix 4a fE XXIX E E E xx E E E E x x x x x x x SEG ESES x Ed MES ES x Wx x x E a A 5 G 8 3 The Conflicts represent the Signal Groups that are not permitted to run together in the same Phase 4 8 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more SGroup Conflict Matrix Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each SGroup Conflict Matrix View shows the Conflicts for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the SGroup Conflict Matrix View s title bar is set to Current Selection the SGroup Conflict Matrix View will display the Conflicts for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Signal G
397. s to be assigned Generally Zones are assigned in mutually connected sets each set being associated with a Matrix based Network region 4 12 2 6 Improving Assignment Run Times in Larger Networks In larger networks the delay based assignment may take from several seconds to a few minutes to run The following factors are worth considering Assignment run time is heavily influenced by the level of Route choice in the Network If many weaving movements have been allowed and permitted routes have not been checked properly LinSig may have many choices of unlikely Routes on which to place traffic when assigning This can significantly extend run times and also lead to overly complex routing in some cases The best approach is to only allow weaving movements where they are likely to happen rather than allowing weaving to occur in all situations Excessive use of Internal Zones will also lead to longer assignment run times as LinSig will need to balance many more competing traffic movements on Routes Generally Internal Zones should be used judiciously where obvious significant traffic generation is occurring within the Network for example on street parking Remember that the delay based assignment on larger Networks will always be significantly quicker then working out Lane flows on a spreadsheet or piece of paper as has usually been necessary case previously 4 12 3 Signal Optimisation using Scenarios Signal Timings can be optimised for the cur
398. same shape as the Leave Profile of the upstream Lane but displaced in time by the Lane s cruise time e In reality unless Lanes are very short platoons of traffic soread out as they travel along a Lane The shape of the Leave Profile is therefore smoothed as it travels along the Lane to model the effects of platoon dispersion The level of smoothing is dependent on the Lane length e In the case of very Short Lanes platoon dispersion is negligible In reality another effect becomes more prevalent due to the assumptions made about vehicles either being at rest or travelling at cruise speed This is known as Platoon compression Platoon Compression It is assumed that vehicles start from the stop line at the cruise speed when the signals turn green or at least after the start displacement This assumption is perfectly valid over Long Lanes because traffic will start to disperse However over a Short Lane of say 40 or 50 meters the start up time will effect when the first vehicle arrives at the second stop line Conventional modelling techniques assume that the first vehicle starts at the cruise speed and crosses the downstream stop line after the cruise time has expired In reality this only happens to the last vehicle the first vehicle will take longer because it is starting from rest Whilst the starting displacement takes account of this at the first stop line there will be no starting displacement at the second stop line because the vehic
399. se the Alternate Of option and select the Phase which this is an alternate of LinSig will automatically set the name of this phase to the same as the Phase which it is an alternate of LinSig will also automatically apply a numeric suffix to the Phase Name 4 9 6 Inserting a Phase To insert a Phase between two existing Phases select one of the Phases and choose Insert Phase before Selected Phase or Insert Phase after Selected Phase as appropriate from the Phases Menu As Phases must always be in numerical order with no gaps in the sequence existing Phases will be renumbered when a Phase is inserted Remember that the numerical order of Phases in the Controller does not imply that they must be run in this order in LinSig Phase Sequences 4 9 7 Moving a Phase To move a Phase to a different position select it with the mouse and drag it to its new position in the Phase View If there are multiple Phases that are all alternates of the same Phase and their order has now changed their numeric suffixes will be changed to ensure that they are maintained in numerical order from left to right 4 9 8 Deleting a Phase To Delete a Phase select it with the mouse and choose Delete Phase from the Phases Menu or Right Click on the Phase and choose Delete Phase from the pop up menu Deleting a Phase has the following consequences e lf the Phase is used in any Phase Sequences it will be deleted from the Phase Sequence Tip Reme
400. se with unusual geometries it may sometimes be necessary to enter a Count between two Arms at different Junctions To display Turning Counts between different Junctions in the Junction Turning Counts Matrix the Show Junction to Junction Counts option should be selected This is located in the Graphic Options tab of the Graphics Settings dialog box which is opened from the File menu 4 3 4 5 Deleting a Junction A Junction can be deleted by selecting the Junction with the mouse and choosing Delete Junction from the Junction pop out menu Deleting a Junction also deletes all items associated with the Junction such as Arms Lanes Lane Connectors graphs etc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 66 View Reference 4 3 5 Working with Arms An Arm in LinSig is a one way section of road forming part of the LinSig Network Arms take no part in modelling and are principally for grouping Lanes to allow them to be graphically manipulated as a single unit Arms always contain at least one Lane The figure below shows a typical Arm just after it has been created and contains only a single Lane which is not yet connected to anything else The colour of the Lane number circle shows how the lane is controlled as described in the Lanes section below Lane Lane Lane Entry Number Point amp Contral Arm 1 West St Arm 4 3 5 1 Creating New Arms New Arms can be created in the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Arm from the
401. selected Override by using the Edit Override data button If more than one Override applies to a Route Flow Layer or Flow Group the Override that is highest in the list will be given precedence Overrides can be moved up or down the list using the up and down arrow buttons The Defaulf entry in the list corresponds to the values that will be applied if no matching Override is found The Defaulf entry always remains last in the list Overrides can be added edited and deleted using the Add new Override Edit Override and Delete Override buttons Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 99 Edit Override rule ka lf This rule applies to specific routes or layers This rule applies to specific Flow Groups Select Routes Layers 2 PM Peak 3 AM Peak Lane Based Flows Edit Override data Select the Flow Groups Rowtes and Layers that this rule will apply te This rule can apply to Routes or Layers but not both Click the Edit Override Data button to specify the cruise speed time values that will be used for this override Cancel The Edit Override Rule dialog box allows you to specify which Routes Layers and or Flow Groups the rule applies to The following settings can be changed e All Routes and Layers By unticking the This rule applies to specific routes or layers tick box the Override will apply to all Routes and Flow Layers on the Connector e Spec
402. sier than calibrating one larger Network This method retains the Zones at the region boundary and does not create any new Routes between Zones on different sides of the boundary The Lanes downstream of the boundary should be set to inherit the cyclic flow profile of traffic entering the Zone upstream of the boundary This is achieved using the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane option in the Lane Edit dialog box s Advanced tab Merging Zones Zones at the boundary of two Matrix Based Network regions are merged using the Zone Merge Wizard as follows Open the Zone Merge Wizard by choosing Merge Zone Networks from the Network menu First page fone Menge Wizard This Wizard will guide you through the process of joining two zones together to form a large network There is one step to complete Click Next to move to step 1 of the Wizard Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 247 Second page Select Zones Merge Zone lB with Zone E Default cruise time between these zones ho Select the two Zones to merge Zones can be on a different Junction or on the same Junction The only restriction is that you cannot merge a zone with itself Also select the default mean cruise time between the merged zones This will be used on any new Lane Connectors created by this Wizard and the values can be comected later by editing these Lane Connectors lt Back Canc
403. sing Lane Timings View from the Phase Sequences menu HJ Lane Timings View Number 1 Junction Display J1 West Junction J2 East Junction E 15 20 25 30 35 40 4 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 8 amp 5 90 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 4 50 5 60 6 70 7 80 990 Time in cycle sec Its principal purpose is to allow the effective green times of individual Lanes to be adjusted using Bonus Greens to allow for effects such as underutilised green time and demand dependency The Lane Timings View is comprised of two panels 4 16 1 Junction List The Junction List lists all Junctions in the Network and allows the Junctions to be displayed in the Lane Timings View to be selected by ticking the Display column Lane Timings Panel This shows the Phase and Lane Green periods for the current Scenario over the cycle time Bonus Greens can also be set for each Lane s green periods 1 Lane Timings Panel The Lane Timings Panel shows the following information Lane Green Bars Each Lane s green period is represented as a bar showing the times when the Lane is running Phases Each Traffic Signal Phase is displayed using a blue cursor above the main Lane Greens area to show each Phase Change point The exact time of the Phase Change Point is shown above the Phase Change Point Cursor Phase Change points can be dragged with the mouse to change Phase lengths LinSig will ensure constraints such as Pedestrian Clearance and Signal Group
404. single Flow Layer is being used LinSig automatically enables this Layer on a Lane when it is first edited e Select the Flow tab for the single Flow Layer e Enter the Total stop line flow on the Lane in Total Flow e Check the Incoming Flows and Outgoing Flows lists As every Incoming Flow is also an Outgoing Flow for another Lane some entries may already exist in either list that were entered earlier when editing other Lanes e Click on Add for Incoming or Outgoing Flows as appropriate This opens the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allowing either an incoming or outgoing turning movement to be added As only a single Flow Layer is being used LinSig presets the Source and Destination Layers for the incoming movement to the default Layer e Assuming that an Incoming Flow is being added the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allows the Source Lane for the Incoming Flow and the amount of flow in PCU or as a percentage to be entered e The new Lane Based Flow movement is displayed on the Network Layout View if it is set to Lane Based Flow entry mode Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 123 Adding Lane Based Flows when using Multiple Flow Layers When using multiple Flow Layers a Lane Based Flow Summary tab is shown as well as a separate Lane Based Flow Layer tab for each Flow Layer 1a Edit Lane J2 1 1 Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Groupi AM Peak Lane Based Flows WB General
405. ss the crossing from kerb to kerb This is used for delay calculations and is not currently used for any clearance time calculations o Crossing Type The Crossing type is for reference and future use only and is not currently used in any modelling e Click OK to finish creating the Pedestrian Link 4 3 10 2 Moving and Repositioning Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links can be freely positioned using the mouse as follows e Select the Pedestrian Link s handles with the mouse The Pedestrian Link turns red indicating it is selected e Use the square handles at each end of the Pedestrian Link to reposition the Pedestrian Link Remember to use the square handles for dragging rather than the circular connection points e f you have a number of Pedestrian Links which you want to move together for example all the Pedestrian Links at a Junction they can be moved by dragging the Junction rather than one by one 4 3 10 3 Editing Pedestrian Link Settings An Pedestrian Link can be edited by selecting the Pedestrian Link with the mouse and choosing Edit Pedestrian Link from the Pedestrian Links pop out menu on the Network Menu This displays the Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box which can be used to change the Pedestrian Link s settings as described in Creating New Pedestrian Links above 4 3 10 4 Deleting Pedestrian Links A Pedestrian Link can be deleted by selecting the Pedestrian Link and choosing Delete Pedestrian Li
406. sting Lanes or can be created between an existing Lane and a new Lane on a new Arm created at the same time as the new Lane Connector The facility to create new Arms on the fly allows Networks to be built more speedily To create a Lane connector between two existing Arms Select the Lane Connector s starting Lane Number Circle Drag the starting Lane with the mouse A Lane connector and new downstream Arm and Lane will tear off of the starting Lane Drag the mouse pointer over the Lane where the Lane Connector will end The tear off Arm will disappear indicating no new Arm will be created Drop the Lane Connector on the downstream Lane by releasing the mouse A new Lane Connector will be created between the two Lanes The Lane Connector will be created with no mean cruise time defined and will use the default value of 10 seconds until edited to set a specific cruise time The ability to create a new Arm and Lane simultaneously with a Lane Connector is intended to speed the creation of Junction Exit Arms The feature can however be used to create any Arm To create a Lane Connector with a new Arm and Lane a AA Select the Lane Connectors starting Lane Number Circle Drag the starting Lane with the mouse A Lane connector and new downstream Arm and Lane will tear off of the starting Lane Drop the tear off Arm and Lane anywhere other than on an existing Lane The Edit Arm dialog box will open allowing you to enter the ne
407. stream Lane M oe Also add same Flow bo Upstream Lane total Flow I Also add same Flow to Downstream Lane total Flow e Click the Add Lane Flow button to complete the action The percentage value will now be displayed on the Lane Connector e The 25 right turners can now be added in a similar manner Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 118 View Reference e Note that when specifying a turning flow as a percentage value in this manner it is not always necessary to begin with a flow value on the upstream lane If there is no flow value on the upstream lane the percentage turning proportion can still be added and then when the upstream lane flow is subsequently set the modelled turning flow and the stop line flow on the downstream lane if specified will be automatically updated accordingly Other Cases The above Lane Based Flow editing cases illustrate some of the main tasks which can be carried out using the drag and drop interface The interface is very flexible and many other cases exist but most are combination or parallels of the cases described above Deleting Lane Based Flows using Drag and Drop Lane Based Flows can also be deleted using drag and drop This can be carried out as follows e Click on the Lane Flow number to be deleted with the mouse e Start dragging the Lane Flow number A small bin icon will appear next to the Lane e Drag over the bin and release the mouse effectively dropping the Lane Flow
408. structure the Network not to model capacity issues such as merges immediately after a Junction e Add Lane Connectors Lane Connectors define which traffic movements are allowed between Lanes on different Arms If the recommended Arm structure discussed later is used Lane Connectors within a Junction define which turning movements can take place from an Entry Lane to an Exit Lane at the same Junction Lane Connectors between Junctions specify which Lane changes can take place between junctions Lane Connectors are added in the Network Layout View by dragging with the mouse from one Lane to another Lane e Set Cruise Times on Lane Connectors For each Lane Connector set a cruise time Where multiple Lane Connectors between Arms all have the same cruise time they can be edited in one step by selecting all the Lane Connectors between the Arms right clicking on the Lane Connectors and choosing Edit Multiple Lane Connectors from the pop up menu e Set Lane Lengths amp Saturation Flows For each Lane in turn edit the Lane s length on the Lane Details tab and the saturation flow on the Sat Flow Data tab Saturation Flows can either be manually entered or calculated from the Lane s geometry e Add Zones LinSig uses Zones for routed Networks or routed regions of Network to specify how traffic will enter and exit the Network or routed region Each Zone specifies a Network Entry Arm and a Network Exit Arm to define how traffic will enter or lea
409. t Flow Group prevents the Flow Group from being selected as the Flow Group for analysis and also omits them where relevant from reports Setting a Flow Group to be a component Flow Group has no affect on calculations o Flow Group Formula This is covered below in Defining Flow Groups using Formulae e Click OK to finish editing the Flow Group Deleting a Flow Group A Flow Group can be deleted by selecting it in the Flow Groups List and choosing Delete Flow Group from the Traffic Flows menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 148 View Reference Deleting a Flow Group also deletes all associated traffic information such as Origin Destination matrices and Lane based Flows Items using the Flow Group such as Scenarios will not be deleted but will show an error until a new Flow Group is set Deleting unused Flow Groups Any Flow Groups that are not used in an Scenarios or referenced in any formulae Flow Groups are indicated as unused in the Traffic Flow Group List These Flow Groups can be deleted in a single action using the Delete all unused Flow Groups button Removing Lane Based Traffic Flows Lane Based traffic flows can be deleted in bulk using the Clear Lane Based Flows button The granularity to which the Lane Based traffic flows will be deleted can be set by selecting the appropriate settings e Stopline Flows Select the Stopline Flows tick box to delete lane based at the stop line If you choose not to delete stop line f
410. t Off Green period of the Phase Yellow All Red This specifies a single value that is the sum of the durations of the Yellow and the All Red periods of a Phase SGroups using Late Start This list contains all Signal Groups running in the Phase Select the Signal Groups that make use of the Late Start period of the Phase If no Signal Groups are specified as using the Late Start period of the Phase the Late Start duration will be ignored SGroups using Early Cut Off Green This list contains all Signal Groups excluding Pedestrians Select the Signal Groups that are required to make use of the Early Cut Off Green period of the Phase If no Signal Groups are specified as using the Early Cut Off Green period of the Phase the Early Cut off Green duration will be ignored Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 176 View Reference 4 10 Phase Sequence View A LinSig Phase Sequence consists of a running order of Phases for a Controller Phases can run in any order in a Phase Sequence and if necessary can run more than once or not at all This differs from the Phase View which shows the Phases in the order they are configured in the Controller For example typical Phase Sequences may include sequences such as All Phases Early Cut Off or Including Pedestrian All Red The Phase Sequence View is used to create and edit Phase Sequences and to display and edit the Phases running in each Sequence The View is opened by choosing Phase
411. t View The Model Audit View is designed to assist with checking or auditing a LinSig model It brings together all of the important input data and results for a LinSig model and presents it in an easy to check standard format It can also be used to compare two models by highlighting differences between two Models The Model Audit View can be opened by choosing Model Audit View from the File menu Model Audit View A eee Audit options Display options Audit Current Scenario Hide All Show All Print Audit Compare Two Scenarios Audit Compare With Another File Compare cote Lane Multi Saturation Short Lane Length Short Long l a Flow RR67 Occupancy m ane PCU Hr PCU Start End Queue Ignore Displacement Displacement s s De sliver Threshold PCU Associated Controlling Lane SGroup s Random Arm ame London mpr 345 long no 1800 no 1 2 London Road 345 long no 1800 no 1 5 High Street High Street Park Street Park Street 345 long no 1800 no 345 long no 1800 345 long no 1800 345 long no Queue I 2 gnore De sliver Pinion Threshold PCU Delay Saturation Short Lane Multi RR67 Occupancy PCU lane Associated Controlling Lane SGroup s A Lane Lane rm Length Short Long Name m Start End Displacement Displacement s s 4 1 345 long no o no 5 1 345 long no no 6 1 345 long no no Storage In Front Of Stopline
412. t from the counted traffic entering the next downstream junction This can be caused by a number of issues including o Counts at each Junction being carried out at different times or even on different days Count inaccuracies and miscounting Traffic turning off or entering the network between the Junctions On street parking between the two Junctions The first two issues should be corrected by careful examination of counts and selection of the most accurate ones omitting the least accurate of inconsistent counts The second two issues if significant can be explicitly modelled using internal Zones as described below If inconsistent counts are used in LinSig for matrix estimation LinSig will attempt to produce the best matrix possible but it is always better to use local knowledge of the network and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 202 View Reference judgement to resolve count consistency problems rather than just relying on LinSig doing its best with a poor set of counts 4 13 4 4 Using Internal Zones to Resolve Consistency Issues Where it is identified by inspecting counts that an inconsistency between two counts is due to traffic entering or leaving the Network between Junctions it can be resolved in one of three ways e Ignoring the inconsistency if it is small and is unlikely to cause problems e Adding a new Junction and Zone s to explicitly model traffic entering from a distinct and significant side road e Adding
413. t of tables and graphics in the Report The Fragments are reordered as follows e Select the Fragment to be moved in the Report Definition Several Fragments can be selected and moved together by holding control or shift down whilst selecting e Click either the up or down arrow buttons to the right of the Report Definition to move the selected Fragment up or down relative to other Fragments in the report e As the Fragment is moved it may turn red indicating in its current position it has Repeat Select errors This can be ignored unless occurring when the Fragment is in its final position in which case the Repeat Select options should be corrected as described below 6 3 3 3 More Advanced Report Editing using Repeat Select Options The Repeat Select facility allows sophisticated control over how a LinSig Report handles repeating Fragments for example a table of traffic flows which is required to be repeated for a number of different Flow Groups As well as allowing individual Fragments to be repeated the Report Builder also allows groups of Fragments to be repeated making the design of Reports very flexible The repeating of Fragments or groups of Fragments are controlled using Repeat Select blocks A Repeat Select Block encloses one or more Fragments in the Report Definition The Report Builder then repeats these Fragments multiple times for a chosen criterion such as Controller or Scenario The following example illustrates the principle
414. t using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Signal Timings View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Signal Timings View will display the signal timings for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e n some instances you may wish to view the signal timings for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Signal Timings View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Signal Timings View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 210 View Reference in the Signal Timings View s title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Signal Timings View too 4 15 2 The Signal Timings Settings The Signal Timings Settings allows the following options and settings to be controlled for the Controller Cycle Time This displays the current Cycle Time for a Controller using the current scenario This will usually be the sam
415. tail in the modelling section The model is used to predict the give way capacity of a Lane at each modelled time step based on the flow in that time step on any number of opposing Lanes or movements In each model time step LinSig calculates the capacity of a Give Way Lane using the formula F max Fmin FO A1 Q1 A2 Q2 An Qn Where e F is the give way capacity of the Lane in a time step e Fo is the maximum flow when the Lane is potentially opposed but no opposing traffic is present Fmin is the minimum flow when the Lane is opposed e Q Is the flow in the current time slice on the first opposing Lane e A is a coefficient for the first opposing Lane which specifies by how much the Capacity is reduced by flow on the first opposing Lane e Q is the flow in the current time slice on the second opposing Lane e Ao is a coefficient for the second opposing Lane which specifies by how much the Capacity is reduced by flow on the second opposing Lane e Q is the flow in the current time slice on the second opposing Lane e A is a coefficient for the second opposing Lane which specifies by how much the Capacity is reduced by flow on the second opposing Lane Guidance on the values to use for the above parameters is given in Give Way Lanes in LinSig in Section 3 Essential Background Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 88 View Reference Movement Settings The Movement tabs contain settings relating to an i
416. te A New Report Definition Create a new Report Definition from a Template Browse for a Template Delete Selected Template Template Description Basic Results Summary A Basic Summary of Model Results Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data followed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig Vi report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data Signal Timings A Report showing the current signal timings for each Traffic Data A Report showing traffic fow data used in the model Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data followed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig V1 report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data Signal Timings A Report showing the current signal timings for each Traffic Data A Report showing traffic fow data used in the model C Create a blank Report Definition Cancel OK cone e Check that the Create a new Report Definition from a Template option is selected e Select a Report Template from the list as desired and click the OK button e The Report Definition defined in the Template is loaded into the LinSig file and added to the files Report Definition List The Report s contents are shown in the Report Builder Further information on changing the standard reports and working in the Report Builder is g
417. te Filter can contain any or all of the following criteria e Route Origin Zone Arm or Lane e The Route Destination Zone Arm or Lane e An Arm or Lane which a Route passes through Only Traffic Routes which match all three criteria will be included in the Filtered Route List Pedestrian cannot currently be filtered The Route Filter can be set using either the toolbar in the Route List View or the toolbar in the Network Layout View If a Route Filter has been set it can be removed by clicking the Reset button in the Route Filter toolbar The Route Filter can also be set in the Network Layout View by right clicking on a Lane and selecting Apply Route Filter For This Lane or right clicking on a Lane Connector and selecting Apply Route Filter For This Connector and also in the Matrix Estimation View and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 159 the Turning Count View by right clicking on a Turning Count and selecting Filter Routes on Turning Movement Refining the Route Journey Times The journey time shown on the Routes can be further refined by choosing one of the following options e All Traffic Displays the travel times experienced by all traffic travelling on the Route e Routed Traffic Only Displays the journey times experienced by routed traffic travelling along the Route Delays experienced by any Lane Based Traffic encountered along the Route are not included This option is useful for displaying dela
418. ted The model now contains two disconnected Networks which can be joined together as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 246 View Reference 4 27 3 Joining Imported Network Regions When a Network is imported into an existing LinSig model it is imported as a separate disconnected Network region After importing the separate Network regions they can be joined together to form a single larger Network How they are joined together depends on the different Network region types being joined 4 27 3 1 Joining Two Matrix Based Regions Two Matrix Based Regions can be joined in two different ways These are Merging two Zones at the join point of the two regions This method is the most detailed and provides greatest modelling accuracy but may involve more work LinSig eliminates the two Zones at the join point creating one large Network with Routes between all remaining Zones in the new joined Network Only one Zone from each Network region can be merged at once In larger Networks where two or more Zones require merging with the existing Network each Zone pair should be merged sequentially Connecting the Network Regions but retaining the boundary Zones his method will create a faster running model and will often involve less work calibrating traffic flows within the model as Routes are only considered within each Network region not between them This means that each Network region can be calibrated in isolation which may be ea
419. ted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Zone also deletes any Routes originating or ending at the Zone and also deletes any traffic flows originating from or travelling to the Zone in the Traffic Flow View s Origin Destination Matrix Zones should not be deleted unless you wish to delete its associated traffic flow data When restructuring the Network instead of deleting the Zone a better option may be to disconnect the Zone from its entry and or exit Arms and reconnect it to new Arms as appropriate This will retain OD flow information but Route flows will need to be recreated either by automatic assignment or by manually editing route flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 105 4 3 9 Working with Lane Based Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows are new in LinSig 3 1 and are an alternative simpler way of defining traffic flows compared with an OD Matrix and Routes as used by Matrix Based Networks Traffic Flows are defined as a Total Traffic Flow for each Lane together with Incoming and Outgoing Turning Flows Other than the immediate previous and next Lanes for each Lane Lane Based Flows contain no information on how traffic routes over the wider Network Further details of Lane Based Flows including how to decide when to use them in preference to Matrix Based Flows is given in the Essential Background Section This section describes the
420. the Controller List View and clicking the Edit button on the Controller List View s toolbar This opens the Edit Controller dialog box allowing settings to be edited as described in Creating a New Controller above 4 6 3 4 Deleting Controllers A Controller can be deleted by selecting the Controller in the Controller List View and clicking delete on the Controller List View s toolbar Remember that deleting a Controller will also delete all of its Signal Groups Phases Phase Sequences etc and also leave any Lanes controlled by the Controller as uncontrolled Lanes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 SGroup View 165 4 7 SGroup View The SGroup View is used to display and edit each Controller s traffic signal Groups It is opened by choosing SGroup View from the LinSig Controllers menu Each SGroup View shows the Signal Groups for a single Controller 4 7 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more SGroup Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each SGroup View shows the Signal Groups for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller vt SGroups Current Selection a Ser re Current Selection w alB Lock To Controller 1 West Controller Controller 2 East Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they ar
421. the current state of the LinSig model This allows Reports to be defined once and quickly updated as a LinSig model evolves In many cases a Report Definition developed as part of one LinSig file could be useful for a number of LinSig files LinSig therefore allows Report Definitions to be exported using Report Templates Each Report Template is a file containing a detailed definition of the Report This file can be imported into any LinSig model by any user to allow the Report to be reproduced based on the LinSig file it is imported into LinSig is supplied with a number of default templates to get you started however you may find it useful to develop a series of standard Report Definitions which can be distributed within your organisation to ensure a consistent Report design by all users 6 3 2 Quickly Printing a Default Report LinSig comes with a number of pre built Report Templates which can be used to quickly run a report if you haven t yet had chance to develop your own Report templates To create a report based on a default template e Open the Report Builder by choosing Report Builder from the LinSig Reports menu e Click the Add New Report Definition button The Create a New Report Definition Dialog Box will open as shown below The Standard Report Templates supplied with LinSig are shown in brown Any User Defined Report Templates are listed in black Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 267 Crea
422. the exit point being the upstream Junction s Exit Arm to the next Junction s stop line Remember that cruise times for the whole distance are specified on the Lane Connectors not the Lanes The cruise time allocated to these Lane Connectors should be the time traffic takes at cruise speed from the exit of the upstream junction to the stop line of the downstream junction 32 Network Layout View a Eoee Sia Hel BA 2 8 81 SLE ALLE SE sa elle AAE BE SE m EELS Find Junction _y Find Arm ind m g Junction Inbound Junction Exit A Arm Lanes Arm Lanes Junction Turning Lane Non Weaving Inter Junction A Lane Connectors Junction Turning Connectors Weaving Inter Junction Lane Connectors Connectors J3 5 1 J3 5 2 Ot bamean Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 5 Main Road Esstbound A Arm J3 2 Main Road Westbound e awa AJ3 2 2 l J3 2 1 l Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound J3 East Juncti PRC WO A Tak Deb Cortraler 2 Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc al Arm All _y Lane All _ Destination Zone All v Arm All Lane All v Recommended Network Structure Modelling Lane Changing Weaving between Junctions In many networks of cl
423. ther ways Assigning the Origin Destination Matrix to Routes Traffic flows can be assigned to Routes in two ways These are e Manually assigning a Traffic Flow to each Route This method provides more flexibility and control as the flow patterns can be refined to a high level of detail It can however be time consuming with larger Networks e Automatically assigning Traffic Flows to each Route based on the Desired Origin Destination Matrix This method is significantly faster than manually assigning flows but is by its nature more systematic and assumes acceptance of standard traffic routing algorithms It is of course possible to use a combination of the above methods using automatic assignment initially and refining manually where desired Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 160 View Reference The Traffic Flows View monitors the total aggregate amounts of traffic allocated to Routes in the Actual Flows Matrix and provides a check that the flows allocated to Routes match the Desired Origin Destination matrix Manually assigning Traffic Flows to Routes Traffic flows can be assigned to each Route independently by editing the traffic flow on each Route as described in Editing a Route Flow above It is your responsibility to ensure that the sum of Route Flows between any two Zones equals the total desired Zone to Zone flows specified in the Traffic Flow View s Desired Flows Matrix The Difference Matrix in the Traffic Flows View is usef
424. they have been checked and you have satisfied yourself that they do not affect the validity of results o Information An Information entry in the Error List indicates something which LinSig wishes to bring to your attention about an aspect of the Network or Network Item The information entry does not necessarily imply that anything is wrong with the model but is just LinSig prompting with reminders of issues to consider e The Error s Description This provides a detailed description of the error or warning e A User Comment on a Warning or Information Entry This allows a comment to be added to a warning or Information Entry when it is hidden as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 242 View Reference rR Total Traffic Delay Controller 1 AN Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc All v Arm All Lane All Destination Zone All vA Ready No Results Due To Errors Errors Exist Click Here To Show Error View When Errors or Warnings exist in the Error View LinSig will highlight this by displaying a red or amber Error Indicator in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Main Window The Error View can be opened by double clicking the Error Indicator 4 26 1 1 Correcting Model Errors LinSig assists with correcting Errors by guiding you to the source of the Error whenever possible Double clicking on an error will jump to the View or Dialog Box
425. though the left turn is controlled by an arrow signal head in this situation it is not necessary to model this as a signal group of Arrow type In LinSig arrow signal groups are required for situations where a Lane needs to be controlled by two Signal Groups and a green signal on either of those Signal Groups results in the Lane being modelled as on green Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 291 Instead this situation can be modelled using two Signal Groups of type Traffic as follows G __l Here the dummy short left turn lane is controlled by Signal Group 1 and the ahead lane is controlled by Signal Group 2 Signal Group 1 offers pedestrian protection to pedestrian Signal Group 3 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 292 Examples A Appendix A Installation and Setup A 1 Hardware Requirements The minimum hardware requirements for LinSig are not onerous however as with all computer aided design software a well specified graphics system will make the software much easier to use and more productive The minimum hardware specification should therefore be treated as just that a minimum on which the software will be useable but some tasks such as optimisation may run quite slowly The suggested hardware specification will significantly increase LinSig s usability and should be adhered to wherever possible Minimum Practical Hardware specification e PC with at least a 2 GHz processor e 1Gb RAM This is ma
426. ths and Offsets of the current Scenario to minimise total traffic delay or maximise PRC for the Network Optimising Offsets Only for the Whole Network To optimise offsets only for the whole Network choose Optimise Offsets only for Delay or Optimise Offsets only for PRC from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu LinSig will adjust the Offsets of the current Scenario to minimise total traffic delay or maximise PRC for the Network 4 12 3 2 Optimising Signal Timings for a Single Junction To optimise signal timings for a single Junction right click on the Junction and choose Optimise this Junction for PRC or Optimise this Junction for delay as appropriate LinSig will adjust the Phase Lengths and offset of just the Controller s controlling the Junction to minimise traffic delay or maximise PRC over all the Lanes contained by the Junction 4 12 3 3 Optimising Signal Timings for a Controller To optimise signal timings for a single Controller click Optimise for Delay or Optimise for PRC in the Signal Timings View LinSig will adjust the Phase Lengths and offset of just the individual Controller to minimise traffic delay or maximise PRC Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 193 4 12 3 4 Controlling the Signal Optimiser using Optimiser Settings The optimisation process can be controlled using optimiser settings which are changed using the Optimiser Settings dialog box Optimiser
427. tion Network Layout Diagram Reporting Options Current Report Definition Title f Portrait Landscape ra Always start on Ad 2108297 ee 210x259 7mm i Show Report Fragment Title B asic Results Summary Available Fragments Show Non SCATS Report Definition Page Header Page Footer Project and User Details Network Layout Diagram SGroup Input Data SGroup Diagram Network Control Layout Phase Overlaps SGroup Conflicts SGroups in Phase Phase Diagram Phase Minimums Lane Input Data Give W ay Lane Input Data Lane Saturation Flows Lane Connector Input Data Trathic Flow Groups T Display Entire Diagram Page Header Scale Fit To Page Width Project and User Details Repeat Select For All Scenarios Text Format Capacity Results Report Network Layout Diagram Network Fesulks Display PCUs and Capacity Per Cycle End Display Text Format Kep Key position has not yet been set Display Results Black Block position has not yet been set Scenario W Show Scenario dependent elements Bandwidth Show Bandwidth Add Repeat Select Options for Lane Flow selected fragments Bl cage Simard The Network Layout Diagram displays all or part of the Network Layout and can Include a range of test and graphical data displays This fragment can be used a number of times in a report with each fragment displaying different data oper Final Save and Ene Save This Definition as WEW a Template The R
428. tion of saturation of 100 and a queue of 29 PCU an increase of over 50 in the queue length Due to the variability of queues and sensitivity to small changes in conditions both in models and in reality we recommend avoiding directly calibrating models to measured queues as unless done with extreme care and highly detailed data it has the potential for introducing significant inaccuracy into the model It is recommended that a greater emphasis is placed on ensuring capacities are modelled correctly whilst still checking that modelled queues are acceptable LinSig models queue lengths in three components similar to those used to model delay Uniform Queuing The Uniform queue is the cyclic queue which grows and dissipates every cycle when the Lane is below capacity LinSig calculates the maximum queue in the modelled typical cycle and assumes this will be same for all cycles in the modelled period The maximum Uniform queue is the maximum length of the back of the queue as LinSig allows for the fact that vehicles are still joining the back of the queue after vehicles have started leaving the front of the queue The maximum back of queue occurs when the discharging front of the queue catches up the back of the queue which usually will be lengthening more slowly This is illustrated in the figure below Link 8 4 Queue clears as front of queue catches up back of queue 4 A 4 Back of queue building at arrival rate Flow _ Front of queu
429. to edit Status Bar The Status Bar is shown along the bottom of the main window and displays useful information about the current LinSig model View Arrangements Manager The View Arrangements Manager allows arrangements of the different LinSig Views to be defined and saved Different arrangements of views can then be recalled at any time depending on the current task being undertaken For example one View arrangement may be defined Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 17 positioning the Views to allow easy entering of traffic flows whilst another may arrange the signal editing Views e Network Layout View The Network Layout View displays the overall layout of the Network s Junctions Arms and Lanes and how they interconnect The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Create delete and edit Junctions Create delete and edit Arms and Lanes attached to each Junction Join Lanes on different Arms together using Lane Connectors Create delete and edit Zones and connect them to Arms Create delete and edit Pedestrian Links Connectors amp Zones Allow Lane Based Traffic Flows to be edited using Lane Based Flow Mode Display input data and results by Lane Display mini graphs of flow profiles and queues Display mini phase diagrams embedded in the View Display Timing Dials which can be used to edit signal timings Examine and display Routes selected in the Route List View Allow signal ti
430. tomatically maintained to match the turning proportion from upstream Assuming an upstream Lane contains a Total Flow of 200 PCU and we wish to specify 75 aheads and 25 right turners percentage Lane Based turning flows can be added to downstream Lane Connectors and Lanes using the following procedure e Click on the 200 on Source Lane the traffic is leaving from e Drag with the mouse to the Destination ahead Lane where ahead traffic is moving to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 117 O e Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane e Choose Change Flow Details from the popup menu to display the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box e On the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box click the Switch PCU Percent value button and change the option to Percent of flow leaving upstream lane You can also tick the Remember this as a default etc tick box to remember this option for next time e In the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box you can now enter the flow as a percentage value of 75 Ticking the Automatically maintain on downstream lane tick box will also ensure that the stop line flow of the downstream lane is also automatically maintained to match that percentage value re 150 FCU not yet assigne i Lane Ji 1 1 Downstream Lane J2 1 1 MM General Traffic Additional Flow 75 of flow leaving up
431. torage area The Non Blocking Storage tab is used to specify how many right turning PCUs can accumulate before blocking the Ahead traffic Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat Flow Data Advanced Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Non Blocking Storage When mixed giving way and non giving way movements on this link Total number of PCUs on give way movement s that can store without blocking non giving way movement s 2 00 The only setting on the tab is the number of PCU at the front of the storage area which do not block Ahead traffic In this case as shown above this is 2 PCU with the third Right Turn Storage PCU blocking the Ahead traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 288 Examples 7 1 7 Example 7 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple Lanes In this example the ahead traffic can choose one of two Lanes In the right Lane however any ahead traffic choosing this Lane must share with the right turning traffic in the Lane In modelling this example the difficulty is in deciding on how the Ahead traffic will distribute between the Ahead Lanes bearing in mind that once the offside lane becomes blocked ahead traffic will be reluctant to use it The Lane on the offside can be set up as illustrated in Example 6 In previous versions of LinSig trial and error was required to determine the appropriate split of ahead traffic between Lanes In LinSig 3 the process
432. training software consultancy LinSig 3 2 User Guide SCATS Version Paul Moore JCT Consultancy Ltd JCT Consultancy Ltd LinSig House Deepdale Enterprise Park Nettleham Lincoln LN2 2LL Tel 44 0 1522 751010 Fax 44 0 1522 751188 Email sales jcitconsultancy co uk support jctconsultancy co uk Website www jctconsultancy co uk JCT Consultancy Ltd 2009 2013 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 This User Guide is Copyright by JCT Consultancy Ltd 2009 2011 All copying of this document is prohibited except in the following circumstances Licensed Users of LinSig Version 3 and unlicensed users trialling the software may copy a single copy of the document to their computer when installing the software Licensed users of LinSig Version 3 may copy this document within their own company an unlimited number of times provided it is copied in full and no fee or other charge is made for any copies Employees of licensed users of LinSig Version 3 may make a single copy of this document for use at home provided it is only used for personal study or in connection with their employer s business Licensed users of LinSig Version 3 may use small extracts from the document for use in technical reports provided the source of the extract is fully acknowledged This does not include course notes used for commercial training All Requests for copying other than the above should be made to JCT Consultancy Ltd in writing Win
433. tream is comprised of a number of components These are e Right turning traffic across gaps in the oncoming traffic e Unopposed movement when opposing traffic is stopped e Stationary traffic turning right during the intergreen e A bonus effect from vehicles waiting in the junction prior to the start of a right turn arrow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 46 Essential Background Right turning traffic across gaps in the oncoming traffic LinSig uses the give way model described above to model the capacity of the right turn during the period it is opposed by oncoming traffic Common practice in the UK for many years has been to use Tanners formula to calculate the amount of traffic turning in gaps This can be closely approximated in LinSig 3 by using 1440 for Intercept and 1 09 for slope in the give way model Unopposed movement when opposing traffic is stopped The Capacity during the time when the right turn is unopposed possibly whilst a right turn Green Arrow is running is calculated using the value of Saturation Flow when Unopposed defined for the give way Lane This may be lower than the Lane s Saturation flow if the right turners share the Lane with Ahead traffic as the Lane s Saturation Flow relates to the Ahead movement Stationary traffic turning right during the Intergreen Vehicles waiting in the junction at the end of the main road phase can turn right during the Intergreen The Intergreen clearance depends up
434. try using the RR6 method e MultiLane The MultiLane tab allows wide LinSig Lanes containing one or more identical physical Lanes to be defined This is useful for two Lane corridors where traffic flows and lane markings mean that traffic will always share equally between the two physical lanes e Advanced his tab is always available and includes a number of advanced settings which may not always need changing e Lane Based Flow Summary The Lane Based Flow Summary tab is only present if Lane Based Flows are defined on a Lane with two or more Layers This tab summarises the Lane Based Flows across all Layers and allows Layers to be managed Details of how to use this tab are provided in the Working with Lane Based Flows section below e Lane Based Flow Layers A separate tab is shown for each Lane Based Flow Layer using the Lane The tab allows the total flow and incoming and outgoing flows to be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 75 specified for the layer Note that it will normally be more convenient to use the drag and drop Lane Based Flow editing than this tab This tab is provided principally for editing Lane Based Flow details not available through the drag and drop method Details of how to use this tab are provided in the Working with Lane Based Flows section below Movement Tabs A separate tab is provided for each turning movement leaving the Lane Each tab allows settings relating to that turni
435. tte E ae tae Soe donot dentate andes 6 2 2 WWOPKING WIH LinS PUGS sairis a a AE 10 22 Gredan anew LNSO FIC i e ceusicsites ican a a a a a 10 2a 2 Opening atv SxISUnG LINSIG S FIle oerna aa a e aa 10 22 93 SAVING LinS FeS anane a el a eee re ee ree as 10 2 2 4 Loading and Converting LinSig files from Earlier Versions ccsccceeeeseeeeees 10 2 2 9 Importing and Merging LinSig Files ec cceecesseeceeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseueeseeeeaes 14 2 9 The LINSIG USEF INTE ACE ies sccusecteacenaseenaunsiossacts oncoamessanisenaneasisegeesasinnaasnnsloamnssaswemadtannesne 15 2 0 VsUsetul Ser INieMaCe Concepto ca itgcde tate eset eec tance toads teddoe tend acetaidenemrdi tase 15 2 3 2 New User Interface Concepts in LinSig 3 to Watch Out for ce ceeeeeeeee ees 16 2 3 3 Important LinSig User Interface Components cccceecceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeees 16 24A Mema lona OPUN ie a 22 2 5 The LinSig Modelling PKOGESS oicisoistisi aroti a enone 22 2 5 1 Modelling Sequence using Lane Based FIOWS c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 22 2 5 2 Modelling Sequence using Matrix Based FIOWS cccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeees 25 2 5 3 Modelling Combinations of Matrix Based and Lane Based Flows 0008 29 3 ESSenitlal Background wisccscccccesessceereeecneenuvetesssessnensspwpssteosscemssnewssnenesi 31 chs The LIRSIG Traic Model sccaee steers encase Sots Sones sen cteeendes A
436. ueue whilst traffic is discharging from the front The Maximum Back of Uniform Queue allows only for the variation of the queue within a typical cycle and does not include Random and Oversaturation queues e Random amp Oversaturation Queue PCU The Random amp Oversaturation Queue due to non cyclical effects i e effects which last longer than a typical cycle over the modelled time periods The Random amp Oversaturation Queue estimates the queue which will form due to a some cycles randomly having more or less arrivals than the typical cycle leading to an overall net increase in queue length and b the steadily building queue over the modelled time period when the Lane is oversaturated Further details on this topic are provided in the modelling section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 224 View Reference Mean Maximum Queue PCU The Mean Maximum Queue is the sum of the Maximum Back of Uniform Queue and the Random amp Oversaturation Queue It represents the maximum queue within a typical cycle averaged over all the cycles within the modelled time period When a Lane is oversaturated the Maximum Queue within each cycle will grow progressively over the modelled time period This means that the Mean Maximum Queue will be approximately half the final queue at the end of the modelled time period Please read the Modelling Section before attempting to interpret queue predictions Queue De Sliver Threshold PCU The De Sliver Threshold disp
437. uilt and detailed reports produced The reports are in rich text format that can be viewed and edited in most word processors e Model Audit View The Model Audit View is intended to assist with model auditing by showing a subset of the most important input data and results in one place The Model Audit View can be used to o Display input data and results in a standard format for auditing o Compare two LinSig files displaying Auditing information for both files and intelligently highlighting differences e Audit History View The Audit History View allows auditors comments to be irreversibly logged in the LinSig file e Cycle Time Optimisation View The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays the performance of the Network over a range of cycle times e Time Distance Diagrams View The Time Distance Diagrams View displays time distance diagrams for selected Routes through the network This can be used for examining coordination and progression through the Network Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 21 e Phase Minimums View The Phase Minimums View displays the phase minimums for all possible combinations of preceding and succeeding phases This information is useful when configuring remote monitoring and in some SCOOT applications e Error View The Error View Lists all current Errors and Warnings in the LinSig model together with their location Errors indicate a fatal problem somewhere in the model whereas War
438. ul in checking for any mismatches between the Desired Flows Matrix and total Route Flows between Zones Automatically Assigning the Desired Flows OD Matrix to Routes Traffic from a Desired OD Matrix can be assigned to each Scenario s Routes automatically using LinSig s equilibrium assignment algorithm As the assignment is carried out for each scenario this is described in more detail in the Scenario View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 6 Controller List View 161 4 6 Controller List View The Controller List View lists all the traffic signal controllers in the Network It is opened by choosing Controller List View from the Controllers menu The View is used to edit Controller settings and to group Controllers into Controller Sets Controller List View Add Edit Delete Add New Controller Controller Controller Controller Set O Default Controller Set CT 120 Controller C1 West Controller he SGrp 7 Phs 3 Controller C2 East Controller i SGrp 7 Phs 4 4 6 1 Definitions The Controller List View can be used to manage two different signal control items These are e Controller Sets Controller Sets allow Controllers using a common cycle time to be grouped together for easier management e Controller Each Controller represents a real life signal controller 4 6 2 Working with Controller Sets Each LinSig Model is created with a single default Controller Set containing a Single
439. uration flow can be specified A Lane showing a blue Lane number circle is an unsignalled Lane pa A A 1 A A which gives way to other traffic They are typically used for minor Dji arms of priority junctions and unsignalled left slips within signal junctions A Lane showing a yellow and blue Lane number circle is a _ signalled Lane which also gives way to other traffic They are O ein typically used for right turning lanes within a signal junction although they may also be used in more specialised situations such as signal amp give way left slips Each Lane also shows the possible turning movements in the Lane and also optionally display Lane input data or results as text Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 69 Lane Length Lanes can also be Long Lanes or Short Lanes as shown above These are defined as follows e Long Lane A Long Lane extends back to the previous upstream junction and can receive traffic from upstream Lanes via Lane Connectors Long Lanes can generally supply a constant saturation flow for the full green period As with previous versions of LinSig and with other similar traffic models the Cyclic Flow Profile model used in LinSig does not constrain the queue to the length of a Long Lane e Short Lane A Short Lane only extends part of the way back to the previous upstream Junction Short Lanes can only receive traffic from an adjacent Long Lane and cannot receive traffic directly fr
440. ure of absolute and percentage error similar to the GEH statistic for comparing flows is used This is the recommended setting The setting in effect scales the circles non linearly so small errors are not missed and large errors do not create large circle obscuring the background Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 125 O Flow Inconsistency Details Additional details of Flow Consistency errors can be obtained by hovering over the consistency error warning indicator with the mouse This displays a pop up table providing details of traffic flows at the point of the inconsistency warning LANE J2 1 1 OUTGOING LANE BASED FLOWS Flow Group 3 AM Peak Lane Based Flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 126 View Reference 4 3 10 Working with Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links are used in LinSig to represent and model pedestrian crossings Typically a Pedestrian Link is used to model each crossing in the Junctions being modelled Network Layout View H a ie gt SB alala Bl 221 2 2 8 siel mlte wax FO SIS elim A aA Find Junction Find Arm m g Layer Filter Pedestrian Pedestrian Link Connector Fy Arm 5 Arm 1 London Road a a f M Arm 2 High Street AA Arm 4 Sass ae High St London Rd Park St PRC 66 7 Total Traffic Delay 136 6 pouHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 77 2 s Ped Level Of Service F SCATS Site Num 1032 P 4 i E w Z ey D Route Filter R
441. ured in the Controller The Phases are ordered by Phase Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 135 number and are therefore not necessarily in the order in which the Phases are run o Show Phase Sequence This option shows the Phase Sequence for the Phase Sequence associated with the current Scenario As the current Scenario changes the Phase Diagram changes to reflect the Phase Sequence for the new current Scenario e Select the Layout of the Phase Diagram This setting governs how the different Phase boxes are laid out within the overall Phase Diagram This setting can usually be set to Auto but where this does not provide a sensible layout the Layout option can be used to provide several alternative layouts e Click OK to create the Phasing Diagram 4 3 13 2 Repositioning and Resizing a Phase Diagram A Phase Diagram can be repositioned by dragging the diagram with the mouse It can also be resized by dragging any or the diagram s borders or corners with the mouse 4 3 13 3 Editing a Phase Diagram A Phase Diagram can be edited by double clicking with the mouse This will open the Edit Phase Diagram dialog box which can be used to edit the Phase Diagram s settings as described in Adding a Phase Diagram to the Network Layout View above 4 3 13 4 Changing the Appearance of the Phase Diagram The graphical appearance of the Phase Diagram is inherited from either the appearance of the Phase View or
442. us flows should still be entered in PCUs e The Create Zone dialog box allows the following settings to be specified O The Zone s Name Zones are always named as a letter Zones can be named in any order but there can be no gaps in the sequence of Zone names If a Zone is given the same name as an existing Zone the new Zone is inserted in the sequence and Zones later in the name sequence are renumbered Arm Entering Network The Network Entry Arm which the Zone feeds traffic too Currently each Zone can only feed traffic to one Arm lf the Zone is not providing an entry point into the network this can be set to none Arm Exiting Network The Network Exit Arm which the Zone receives traffic from Currently each Zone can only receive traffic from one Arm If the Zone is not providing an exit point from the network this can be set to none Bus Zone This setting defines the Zone as a Bus Zone All Routes created from or too the Zone will be Bus Routes Only Create Routes with other Bus Zones For Bus Zones if this setting is selected LinSig will only create Bus Routes from this Zone to other Bus Zones In most cases selecting this setting will give the best results as allow buses are then kept separate from non bus traffic e Click OK to create the Zone The Zone displays dotted Zone Feeds in the Network Layout View to indicate which Lanes it is feeding traffic to or accepting it from 4 3 8 2 Repositionin
443. using the Zone Merge Wizard for Matrix Based Network regions or by joining Lane Based Network regions using Lane Connectors Repeat this process for any additional Network regions to be added Having merged all the Network Segments together optionally refine the combined Origin Destination Matrix for any Matrix Based regions using matrix estimation and check and refine routing in the combined Network Further details are given in Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks in the View Reference section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 15 2 3 The LinSig User Interface The LinSig model is edited using a sophisticated graphical user interface that has been developed to ensure data can be quickly entered and edited The user interface also aims to allow the user to control the amount of information displayed at any one time providing choice between a data display that is very dense but shows a lot of information at a glance and a less dense display that is neater but shows less information at once 2 3 1 Useful User Interface Concepts When editing the LinSig model a number of standard concepts apply These are Data Items A data item is a generic term for the different types of data edited in LinSig For example Arms Lanes Lane Connectors Zones Routes Controllers Signal Groups Phases etc are all Items Selecting an Item Clicking on an item in a LinSig View will select it The select
444. ut View This provides less detail than the Matrix Estimation View but allows Counts and modelled flows to be quickly compared using a Junction Turning Count Matrix 4 13 6 1 Model Validation using the Matrix Estimation View As described above the Matrix Estimation View displays a list of Turning Counts together with a range of statistics comparing the Counts with the modelled flows from the Current Scenario Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 205 A Matrix Estimation View a fo 6 Flow Group fam Peak Current Scenario Import counts Export counts rake pein Traffic Routes BusRoutes Lane based Traffic Counts Zone Totals PEU J1 Ped Crossing J1 Ped Crossing J1 3 gt J1 2 625 650 0 96 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 4 513 500 1 03 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 5 152 150 1 01 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J2 5 220 220 1 00 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J1 3 447 450 0 99 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J2 4 367 250 1 47 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J1 3 220 200 1 10 J2 West Junction J2 4 gt J3 1 740 750 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt B5 424 450 0 94 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 6 300 300 1 00 B Eastluntion B2 gt B4 370 370 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 6 150 150 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 4 297 300 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 5 200 200 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 4 gt J2 2 670 670 1 00 The statistics a
445. ut of date inconsistent don t allow for all sources or sinks of traffic are unlikely to produce an acceptable matrix Matrix estimation is not a point and shoot method Careful checking of count data is required before using the technique in LinSig Keep refining the matrix until it is sufficiently accurate The first run of matrix estimation should not just be accepted and used Often careful examination of the estimated matrix will suggest adjustments which can be made to the counts prior matrix or Network to produce a better matrix As LinSig Networks tend to be smaller with less route choice than larger transportation models on which matrix estimation has traditionally been used and given that for most LinSig Networks all or a very high proportion of junctions will be counted LinSig has a much better chance of estimating a good matrix than much larger models where there are many more unknowns within the model Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 198 View Reference 4 13 3 Working with the Matrix Estimation View The Matrix Estimation View displays information relating to traffic counts used for matrix estimation and also statistics which can be used for validating assigned flows against counts Matrix Estimation View a fo S ea Select the modelled Flow Group fam Peak Current Scenario B Import counts Export counts aa a a Traffic Routes Bus Routes Lane based Traffic Counts Zone
446. ute List displays the following information for each Pedestrian Route Pedestrian Route Number Each Pedesirian Route is given a unique Index number which identifies it Origin Pedestrian Zone The Pedestrian Zone the Route starts from Destination Pedestrian Zone The Pedestrian Zone where the Route ends Flow The traffic flow on the Route in Pedestrian per Modelled Time Period Flow Locked Whether the Pedestrian Route Flow can be modified by the automatic flow assignment Journey Time sec The average time it takes pedestrians to travel from Zone to Zone along this Route Delay sec Ped The average delay to pedestrians on the Route caused by waiting for a green signal Total Delay PedHr The aggregate delay to all pedestrians on the Route caused by waiting for a green signal Total Journey Time PedHr The aggregate time taken by pedestrians using this Route 4 5 1 3 Managing the Route List Routes in both the Traffic Routes List and the Pedestrian Routes List can be managed in similar ways as follows Selecting a Route A Route is selected by clicking on it with the mouse in the Route List The Route is highlighted in Route List indicating it is selected The Route is also highlighted in the Network Layout View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 156 View Reference Editing a Route Flow The traffic flow allocated to a Route can be manually edited by selecting the Route in the Route List and choosing Edit Route Fl
447. vailable for each Count are e The Percentage Difference This compares the count and modelled flow in relative terms and is defined as the percentage of the Count by which the modelled flow exceeds it This is useful for comparing larger flows for example checking that all significant flows are within x of the Count e The Actual Difference For Counts where flows are small the percentage difference between Counts and modelled flows can often be very large even though the flows in actual terms are very close For example a comparison of a count of 25 and an assigned flow of 20 would be regarded as reasonably good but the percentage difference of 20 appears very poor In these cases it is important to also consider the actual difference between Counts and modelled flows e The GEH Statistic The GEH statistic named after Geoffrey E Havers the GLC transport planner who invented the statistic in the 1970s combines the above two measures of relative and absolute difference to provide a single statistic measuring the fit between Counts and modelled flows The value of GEH indicates how different the Count and modelled flow would generally be regarded by a traffic engineer GEH levels in practical terms are o A GEH lt 1 indicates an excellent match between Count and modelled flow o A GEH lt 5 is generally acceptable in a larger network but should be checked in a smaller network to see if improvements can be made o A GEH gt 5
448. ve in Maximum Flow When Giving Way This option should be used where it is felt that the Saturation Flow would not be different from the Maximum Flow value Give Way Left Turns often require this option as the angle of turn often means it is not obviously apparent to opposed traffic that the opposing movements are stopped o Use Lane Saturation Flow Value The Lane s Saturation Flow specified on the Saturation Flow tab is used when the opposing movements are stopped o Use Custom Value PCU Hr A custom value can be specified if for any reason a value other than the other two options is required e Opposing Lanes Any number of opposing Lanes can be used to oppose a movement Also each movement can have different opposing Lanes Opposing Lanes can be added to the Movement Tab by clicking the button to the left of the Opposing Lanes List Settings for each Opposing Lane can then be changed by clicking the setting to be changed in the List The Settings are Lane The Lane Reference of the Opposing Lane Coefficient The A value as described above in LinSig Give Way Model This is used to specify by how much the traffic flow on the Opposing Lane reduces the Give Way Lane s capacity o Clear Conflict Time sec The Clear Conflict Time is the time between a vehicle crossing the opposing Lane s stop line and the time it ceases to oppose traffic on the Give Way Lane It is typically used on large junctions to allow for the
449. ve the Network from the Zone The Zones are also used by Traffic Flow Origin Destination OD matrices to specify traffic flows wishing to travel through the routed regions of the Network Zones are added in the Network Layout View by choosing Add Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network menu Zones are not required for Lane Based Flow Network regions unless Routes are required for calculating journey times through Lane Based Flow Network regions e Create Traffic Flow Groups Flow Groups can be created and managed in the Traffic Flow View Remember that Flow Groups can be defined as a combination of other Flow Groups using a formula to specify how they are combined e Enter Traffic Flow Information into the Origin Destination Matrix Traffic Flow information in LinSig is entered in Passenger Car Unit PCU flows between Zones Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 27 The Traffic Flow View provides a Desired Flow OD Matrix in which the Traffic Flows for each Zone to Zone movement are entered The Actual and Difference Matrices are used to display assigned flow information not to enter data This is described in more detail in Definitions above If the OD matrix isn t Known and only Junction turning counts are available LinSig s Matrix Estimation procedure can be used to estimate a Matrix which is a best fit to the counts If used Matrix Estimation is carried out later in the modelling sequence after Scenar
450. w Arm s Name and Junction Click OK in the Edit Lane dialog box A new Arm containing a single Lane will be created with a Lane Connector joining it to the starting Lane Edit the new Arm and Lane as appropriate New Tear cou Off Arm Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 95 4 3 7 2 Editing Lane Connectors Lane Connectors can be edited using the Edit Lane Connector dialog box which can be opened by e Selecting a Lane Connector with the mouse and choosing Edit Lane Connector from the Lane Connectors pop out menu on the Network Menu or by e Right clicking on the Lane Connector and choosing Edit Lane Connector from the pop up menu The Edit Lane Connector dialog box provides two tabs for editing Lane Connecior seitings These are e General The General tab allows common Lane Connector settings to be changed e Flow Detail The Flow Detail tab provides access to the traffic flow components on the Connector e Overrides The Overrides tab provides fine control over cruise speed times on the Connector General The General tab allows information on cruise speeds times to be edited General How Detail Overrides From Lane pa To By W Allow Routes to use this Connector Default cruise time through this Lane Connector These defaults will be used for all How Groups and all Routes and Layers through this Lane Connector unless otherwise ovemidden on the Overnides page
451. w Reference elay 26 56 pcuHr Cycle 90 5 SCATS Based S Terminology Mode Indicator SCATS Based Mode 4 2 2 1 Using SCATS Based Controllers When LinSig is being used in SCATS Based Terminology mode all traffic signal controllers should be created with SCATS Based Controller type This will be the default when creating a new Controller when SCATS Based Terminology mode is being used When an existing file created using UK mode is being converted to SCATS Based mode Controller types should be changed to SCATS Based using the Controller List View which can be found on the Controllers menu Note LinSig 3 1 introduced the SCATS Based Controller Type so that terminology and numbering was relevant to a SCATS Controller LinSig 3 2 introduced new functionality to allow controller input data to be entered in a form consistent with SCATS Controllers In order to keep these versions separate there are now two distinct controller types namely SCATS Based which includes the new functionality introduced in LinSig 3 2 and SCATS Based Superseded since LinSig 3 2 which should not be used for new models If necessary a Controllers type can be changed as follows e Select a Controller in the Controller List View The Controller List View can be opened by choosing Controller List View from the Controllers menu e Click Edit in the Controller List View to ope
452. w start and end points of a Bus Route to be defined Bus Zones can be set to only generate Routes to other Bus Zones which are defined as Bus Routes Bus Routes are modelled using the Bus modelling settings set on Lane Connectors This allows the different behaviour of Buses to normal traffic to be modelled This includes issues such as bus stop times and increased platoon dispersion of Bus traffic Normally Bus traffic will be specified directly on Bus Routes between Bus Zones rather than assigning an OD Matrix to Bus Routes Bus Zones o Arm 5 p Arm 1 London Road Pa Arm 2 High Street _ 2 h Arm 4 eaae 1000 e R P 200 As the number of movements which LinSig needs to model increases proportional to the square of the number of Zones excessive use of many small Zones will slow down the traffic model and optimiser considerably Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 103 4 3 8 1 Creating Zones To create a Zone e Choose Add Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network menu e Position the Zone in the Network Layout View and drop it by clicking with the mouse e LinSig will automatically connect the Zone to the nearest possible Entry and Exit Arm e The Create Zone dialog box is displayed to configure the new Zone Create Zone fone Arm Entering ane Network Arm Exiting 3 me Network fone Bus Zone all routes will be Bus Routes B
453. ware for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the above disclaimer and the following restrictions Redistributions of source code in whole or in part must retain the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions Redistributions in binary form compiled executables and libraries must reproduce the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions in documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Additional documentation is not needed for executables where a command line license option provides these and a note regarding this option is in the executable s startup banner The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary including SFXWiz as part of a self extracting archive that is permitted without inclusion of this license as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled Altered versions including but not limited to ports to new operating systems existing ports with new graphical interfaces versions with modified or added functionality and dynamic shared or static library versions not from Info ZIP must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source or if binaries compiled from the original source Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info ZIP releases includi
454. which Phase to use The Phase View allows a Phase to be selected by clicking on it the selected Phase being highlighted in red This selected Phase will be used in all situations where an action Is performed on a Phase for example when deleting a Phase 4 9 4 Creating a New Phase To create a new Phase choose Add Phase from the Phases Menu or Right Click at the end of the current Phases and choose Add Phase from the pop up menu The Phase will be created with no Signal Groups running 4 9 5 Changing the Phase Name Each Phase in a Controller can be given a unique name consisting of a single letter A Z In addition if a Phase is intended to be an alternate to another Phase the Phase Name can have an additional numeric suffix indicating it is an alternate lf there are multiple Phases that are all alternates of the same Phase their numeric suffixes will be maintained in numerical order from left to right Each Phase can be renamed as follows e Click on the Phase to be renamed with the right mouse button and choose Edit Name and SCATS Timings from the pop up menu The Edit Phase Details dialog will open Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 174 View Reference e If the Phase is not an alternate choose the Phase Name option and select a new Phase Name from the Phase Name drop list If the new Phase Name already exists LinSig will rename the existing Phases accordingly e lf the Phase is an alternate choo
455. within the Phase Sequence A Phase can be moved within the Phase Sequence by dragging the Phase to its new position with the mouse Provided the Phase s new position creates a valid Phase Sequence LinSig will update the model calculations for Scenarios using Network Control Plans containing the changed Phase Sequence Removing a Phase from the Phase Sequence A Phase can be removed from the Phase Sequence by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Remove Selected Phase from Phase Sequence from the Phase Sequence menu or by right clicking on the Phase and choosing Remove Selected Phase from Phase Sequence from the pop up menu Removing a Phase from a Phase Sequence does not delete the Phase itself Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 11 Network Control Plan View 181 4 11 Network Control Plan View A Network Control Plan is new to Version 3 of LinSig and is used to assist with specifying the signal phasing for larger more complex Networks Each Network Control Plan specifies a Phase Sequence for each Controller in the Network and is used to build up a set of compatible signal sequences for all Junctions This means that each Scenario can specify the signal phasing for the entire Network simply by specifying a single Network Control Plan The alternative would be to specify a Phase Sequence for each Controller in every Scenario which would become time consuming and error prone as Networks become larger Network Control Plans View s
456. ws e Choose Print from the LinSig File menu LinSig will display the Print dialog box e f necessary select the desired printer from the drop down list e f necessary specify which pages are to be printed e f necessary click on Properties to display and change any printer specific settings such as paper size colour or print quality e Click OK to send to the printer 6 2 Printing Flow Profile Diagrams The Flow Profile View allows multiple diagrams to be laid out and printed direct to a printer It can also be included in a Report but direct printing allows a set of diagrams to be printed quickly without having to set up a specific Report The View can be printed as follows e Open the View and create the diagrams required as described in the View s section in the View Reference e Choose Print from the LinSig File menu LinSig will display the Print dialog box e f necessary select the desired printer from the drop down list e Select the desired layout of diagrams on the printed page LinSig will fit the layout of diagrams to the printer s current paper size e f necessary click on Properties to display and change any printer specific settings such as paper size colour or print quality e Click OK to send to the printer 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder The LinSig Report Builder allows detailed reports to be designed and generated as Rich Text Format RIF files The RTF for
457. ws such as the SGroup View or Phases View show information for one Controller at a time The Controller being displayed can either be set to the current edited Controller or locked to a particular Controller Changing the current edited Controller will change the Controller being displayed and edited in all Controller based views set to Current Controller Multiple Traffic Flow Definition Methods LinSig 3 1 and above provide two different ways to define traffic flows Using and OD Matrix and Routes as in LinSig 2 and LinSig 3 0 and Lane Based Flows Each LinSig model can use either method across the whole Network or mix both methods in one model using different methods in different regions of the Network 2 3 3 Important LinSig User Interface Components The LinSig user interface consists of the main program window which contains the following Items More detailed explanations of many items including each View are included in the Views Reference section of this User Guide Main Menu The main menu is located along the top of the LinSig main Window and is the primary method for carrying out tasks in LinSig Unless otherwise stated all tasks in LinSig are carried out by choosing the relevant command from this menu If a menu command is shown in grey this means it is not currently possible to carry out the command For example the Edit Zone command is shown in grey if no Zone is currently selected as LinSig does not know which Zone
458. ws you may have If Auto Assion is not enabled the Desired Flows will not he assianed to Routes until the Assian The Traffic Flows View is split into two panels These are e The Traffic Flow Group List The Traffic Flow Group List shows the different Traffic Flow Groups defined in the LinSig model The list also shows Flow Group currently being displayed and edited in rest of the Traffic Flow View and the Flow Group currently being used by the current Scenario for traffic model calculations e The Origin Destination OD Matrices The matrix displays the traffic or Pedestrian OD flow matrices for the currently selected Flow Group As explained below only the Desired Flows matrix can be edited the other matrices being used to display information calculated from the Network s Route Flows 4 4 1 Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig LinSig 3 1 provides a new alternative method of defining traffic flows as well as the existing Matrix based method Detailed information on both methods including their relative advantages and disadvantages is given in Flow Definition Methods in the Essential Background section 4 4 2 Defining Pedestrian Flows in LinSig The use of pedestrian flows in LinSig is optional LinSig can still model pedestrian delays without pedestrian flow data however flow data is required if estimates of overall aggregate level of delay is required Pedestrian flows in LinSig are entered and managed in a similar way t
459. x and Destination Zones above Each cell contains the desired total traffic flow by any Route from the Origin Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 150 View Reference Zone to the Destination Zone The Desired Flows Matrix is the traffic data used by LinSig when automatically assigning traffic flows to Routes e Actual Flows Matrix The Actual Flows Matrix is derived from the traffic flows actually assigned to each Route as described in the Route List View section Each Zone to Zone total is calculated by summing the Route traffic flows for all Routes connecting an Origin and Destination Zone It represents the total Zone to Zone flow actually assigned to Routes rather than the flow that we are aiming to assign to Routes as is shown in the Desired Flows Matrix As the traffic routing pattern in the Network may be different for each Scenario the Actual Flow Matrix will be dependent on the Current Scenario being shown The aim should still be for each Scenario s Actual Flow Matrix to match the Flow Group s Desired Flow Matrix but any differences may vary by Scenario e The Difference Matrix The Difference Matrix shows the numerical differences between a cell in the selected Flow Groups Desired Flows Matrix and the same cell in the Current Scenario s Actual Flows Matrix As with the Actual Flow matrix it is only shown when the Current Modelled Scenario s Flow Group matches the Flow Group being displayed in the Traffic Flows View The Difference Matrix
460. ximisation In simple terms where a set of traffic counts could be reproduced by many different OD matrices the entropy maximisation technique aims to estimate the most probable OD matrix which will fit the traffic counts This does not mean that this is necessarily the correct matrix only that the estimated matrix is the best possible estimate from the information contained within the traffic turning counts Furthermore the use of a prior OD matrix even if it only contains estimated values can provide additional information about the pattern of OD movements However the OD matrix is obtained it should be remembered that accurate traffic flow information is a fundamental first step to any Junction or Network modelling project The correct pattern of OD movements is also crucial when modelling Networks of closely spaced coordinated signal junctions 4 13 2 Golden Rules of Matrix Estimation Matrix Estimation has been used for many years in larger transportation based models and in some quarters has gained a reputation as being a black art For anyone who has not encountered matrix estimation before the following golden rules will hopefully put the method in context Matrix estimation is the classic garbage in garbage out method Carefully checked and used good quality traffic flows covering a large proportion of the Network will generally produce an acceptably accurate cost effective matrix Poor quality counts which are sparse o
461. xisting file can be opened by choosing Open from the File menu If a different file is already open in LinSig it will be first closed and you will be prompted to save any changes to the file as described below LinSig provides a dialog box that can be used to locate the file you wish to open either on the local computer or on a network Once the LinSig file is open LinSig will not change the file on disk unless you explicitly choose to save it using Save or Save As as described below 2 2 3 Saving LinSig Files The LinSig File currently being edited can be saved to disk at any point by choosing Save from the File menu or if you wish to change the file name Save As Be careful not to overwrite files you wish to keep as you cannot undo file saves from within LinSig Due to the many changes in the data used by LinSig 3 it is not possible to save files in LinSig 1 or LinSig 2 format 2 2 4 Loading and Converting LinSig files from Earlier Versions LinSig 3 uses a new file format but can load amp convert files from Versions 1 and 2 of LinSig which can then be saved to LinSig 3 format As each version of LinSig has made a number of changes extensions and improvements to the file format it is necessary to provide LinSig with some additional information when loading a file from a previous version This additional information is used by LinSig to convert the file into LinSig 3 format 2 2 4 1 Loading and Convert
462. xt Tuesday O38 December 2011 Tuesday U5 December z011 00 05 Int 2260 1 O 2 1 3 0 4 0 o 2 g 0 1O 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 L 0 1L amp 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 0 24 0 Int 2256 1 1 s 3 0 4 0 5 0 O g 0 1O 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 1 0 16 0 19 0 2 0 0 1 0 22 0 2 3 0 24 0 Int 2205 1 1 2 3 3 3 4 1 5 0 6 O LO 1 11s 1 12 1 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 5 1 amp 1 19 1 20 0 21 0 22 0 423 0 24 0 1 4 a5 3 6 q 2 asl b 12 g 0 LO 1 11 0 1l2 2 Les 14 1 15 0 16 0 L 0 1 amp 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 423 0 24 0 Int 2279 1 1 3 0 g 0 1O0 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 L 0 16 0 19 0 20 0 1 0 22 0 423 0 24 0 Sample data file from SCATS Traffic Reporter The data file contains a count value for each detector on each Intersection for each interval over a 24 hour period LinSig will work with any interval duration for example 5 minutes 15 minutes etc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 252 View Reference 4 28 2 Preparing the LinSig model for SCATS Flow Data Import Prior to using the SCATS Flow Data Import Wizard it is necessary to specify which detector numbers and intersection numbers in the data file correspond to which Lane and Junction respectively in the LinSig model 4 28 2 1 Entering SCATS detector numbers Each lane can be associated with a detector number using the Edit Lane dialog box Only the detector that counts the traffic crossing the stopline should be entered Multiple detector numbers can be spe
463. y DegSat Weighting 4 Apply DegSat Limit 5 lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel vanced tab contained the following settings Start Displacement The Start Displacement specifies how long it takes traffic on the Lane to achieve Saturation Flow when the Lane receives a green signal LinSig assumes discharge across the Lanes stop line is zero for the duration of the Start Displacement before jumping to Saturation Flow after the Start Displacement has expired The green duration adjusted for the Start and End Displacements is called the Effective Green In the UK the Start Displacement is commonly set to 2 seconds although where justified by site or regional data this value can be changed Outside the UK where Red Ambers are not used the Start Displacement can be changed to adjust for any difference in effective green Prior to LinSig 3 1 the Start and End Displacements were sometimes used as general adjustments to Lane green times for a range of reasons LinSig 3 1 introduced a new Bonus Green Feature which provides a more flexible way of adjusting green times allowing the Start and End Displacements to be used for their intended purpose End Displacement The End Displacement is similar to the Start Displacement but applies to the end of the green period It specifies how long Saturation Flow is maintained for after the Lane s green has ended In the UK the End Displacement is commonly set to 3 seconds although where justified by sit
464. y Lane Is created as a Short Lane is different e LinSig will model any queue build up in the give way Lane and its effect on the traffic in the Ahead Lane e LinSig will model any Lane starvation effects caused by traffic queuing in the Ahead Lane preventing left turners reaching the left turn Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 282 Examples 7 1 5 Example 5 Right Turn Opposed Movement at Signals A signal controlled junction where a right turn is controlled on a give way basis opposed In this example the right turners must give way to two movements Lane 2 1 and Lane 2 2 It is assumed that three right turners can store in front of the stop line and that two right turners will clear during the Intergreen The Right Turn Factor is assumed to be 0 5 nn tone Clear Conflict 2 seconds Storage Area The mechanism of what happens with respect to the right turning traffic is directly dependant on the method of control However the parameters entered into LinSig are the same and LinSig uses them as appropriate depending on the method of control used I 1 1 f 1 2 _ Arm 1 London Road w The above settings are entered in the Movement and Storage in Front of Stop Line tabs of the right turn Lane s Edit Lane dialog box Edit Lane 1 2 General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Movement Give Way Data ee eee Flow when opposing traffic is
465. y on Microsoft Windows 2000 with Internet Explorer Version 5 5 or above LinSig will not run on Windows 98 or earlier A 3 Installing LinSig Before attempting to install LinSig please ensure you are logged into Windows as an administrator Sometimes Antivirus Software may also interfere with installation in which case it should be temporarily disabled until installation is complete This may require assistance or permission from your IT department To install LinSig from CD e Insert the LinSig CD into the computers CD Drive e f Setup starts automatically simply follow the on screen prompts from the setup program Alternatively if Setup does not run automatically e Click on the Start Button e Choose Run from the start menu e Enter the command x setup exe where x is the drive letter of your CD drive e Follow the on screen prompts from the setup program When Setup is complete LinSig can be started by choosing LinSig 3 from the Programs section of the Start Menu If LinSig Version 2 is installed on the same PC LinSig Version 3 does NOT affect the Version 2 install and installs a new copy of Version 3 A 4 Activating the LinSig Software Licence LinSig includes a sophisticated copy protection mechanism to prevent software theft by unlicensed copying or installation of the software The system has been designed to place as little burden as possible on legitimate licensed users whilst discouraging casual copying of the so
466. yout View Phase Sequence displays one of the following e The available Phases from the Phase View on a Controller e The Phase order for a Phase Sequence from the Phase Sequence View If desired multiple Phase Diagrams can be used for more than one Controller Network Layout View H cf w SB alala oA Fs 2l2lal ks nre SPS sls elle Alelale Find Junction Find Arm g Layer Filter K T Arm 5 Am1 London Road KA BN m ndon Me Arm 2 High Street BN Smas s fi a 3X 3a High StiLondon Ad Park St PRC 867 35 Td Teme Delay 886 ptr AE Rate Deby Per Pat 772 sed Lad Of Seve F SCATS Ste Nunc 102 E 3 i a a Eog a g Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane All Contains Junc Al Arm all Lane All Connec 4 3 13 1 Adding a Phase Diagram to the Network Layout View A Phase Diagram can be added to the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Phase Diagram from the Phase Diagram pop out menu on the Network menu e Click on the Network Layout View where you wish to create the Phase Diagram The Edit Phase Diagram dialog box appears to allow you to set the diagram s options e Select the mode of the Phase Diagram The mode governs what the Phase Diagram shows The options are o Show Available Phases This option displays all the Phases defined in the Phase View and represents all the available Phases config
467. yout View a EX SIIB aele S 2 2 2 2lE Sel ALR Sebel ie SN e 4 4 al amp Find Junction Pa Find Arm Pe mmia g A t Amm Ji K ks ane an E m Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Lane All Destinat Separate LinSig Models after Importing Right Network into Left Network A separate Network can be imported into another Network as follows e Open the base Network in LinSig e Choose Import File into Current Model from the Network menu e Click Next to start the File Import Wizard e Select the File to import e Map Scenarios in the existing and imported model to define new combined Scenarios Where Scenario names match in the base and imported models LinSig will automatically create new Scenarios matching these Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 245 Ale Import Wizard Map Scenarios New Scenario First Scenario Second Scenario AM Peak AM Peak with early cut off AM Peak AM Peak no early cut off PM Peak PM Peak i Add a new entry Remove selected entries Select the Scenario mappings The New Scenario column lists the Scenarios that will edst after the merge consisting of the flow data from the First Scenaro merged with the data from the Second Scenario Any scenarios from either network not listed here will be deleted Default names for the new scenarios have been
468. ype of the Lane Lane Types are U for unopposed Lanes and O for a Give Way Lane which is opposed Controller Stream The number of the Phase Stream controlling this Lane in the format Controller Phase Stream This is not applicable for SCATS Controllers Route Position The sequential position of a Lane along a Route when Lane Results are filtered to display Lanes along a single Route Shown as N A when Lanes are not filtered by Route Full SGroup The Full Green Traffic Signal Group Controlling a Lane All signal controlled Lanes will have a Full Green Signal Group Arrow SGroup The Arrow Signal Group Controlling a Lane Number of Greens The number of green periods for the Lane per cycle Total Green sec The total time the Lane receives a green signal per cycle Start Green sec The time within the cycle when the Lane receives a green signal End Green sec The time within the cycle when the Lane loses its green signal Arrow Green sec The time a Lane receives a green arrow signal per cycle Bonus Green Indicates whether Bonus Greens are present on the Lane Demand Flow PCU The total Traffic Flow in the current Flow Group wishing to travel on the Lane The Demand Flow assumes all traffic reaches the Lane and does not reduce the Flow on the Lane where upstream Lanes are overcapacity and hold back traffic Saturation Flow PCU hr The Saturation Flow on the Lane Capacity PCU The Capacity
469. ys to buses on Bus Routes where general traffic is specified using Lane based Flows e Lane Based Flow Traffic Only Displays the journey times experienced by Lane Based Traffic If multiple Lane Based Flow Layers are used this option aggregates delays over all Layers e Layer Layer Name One option will be available for each Lane Based Flow Layer in the model Each option will display only delay incurred by traffic on the individual Layer This is useful for displaying journey times for a specific class of Lane Based traffic Route List View A oe ee Route Filter Reset Origin Zone C Arm 33 2 Lane All Contains Junc All Arm Al Lane All Destination Zone A Arm 34 4 Lane All am Traffic Mode Pedestrian Mode Al Junctio Options for Journey Times and Delays Show Non Permitted Routes Edit Permitted Routes Route f Org Dest Ong Dest Route Zone Zone Lane Lane Fow C A Bai 41 125 104 14 44 14 E A JA22 J41 124 104 09 54 09 4 5 2 Assigning the Desired Traffic Flow Matrices to Routes using the Route List The Desired Flows Matrix as displayed in the Traffic Flows View defines the total desired movements between Zones The process of assignment to Routes specifies which Routes through the Network traffic will use to travel between two Zones The Route List View is used to display the Routes through the Network and allows the Routes to be assigned traffic flows and managed in o
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
USER MANUAL LÄMPÖÄSSÄ V 7.0 — 30.0 RT-N12E AVERTISSEMENT ERTISSEMENT Carte logique メロディーメイト 取扱説明書 MM-32 LE PARI GAGNANT DES ADjUDICATEURS BRUXELLOIS - Saw-B 17 条 (システム監査) - 大阪労働局 A Guide To Unleashing the Power of Your ALVA PRC2015/Gold User`s Manual - Pralana Retirement Calculator JVC GR-AX970 Camcorder User Manual Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file